2954 6310 00 - Qc4002 MkII User Manual - EN

User manual
Qc4002™ MkII control panel

User Manual for AC Generators
Qc4002™ MkII control panel
Quick start guide ................................................................. 2954 6320 00

User manual ........................................................................ 2954 6330 00
PMS User manual ............................................................... 2954 6340 00
Transformer Maintenance manual........................................ 2954 6170 01
Retrofit instructions ............................................................ 2954 6350 00
Modbus Communicaton manual .......................................... 2954 6360 00
M-logic manual ....................................................................... 2954 6370 00
Parameter list....................................................................... 2954 6380 00
Original instructions
Printed matter N°
2954 6310 00
ATLAS COPCO - PORTABLE ENERGY DIVISION
04/2012
www.atlascopco.com
User Manual
Warranty and Liability Limitation

Use only authorized parts.
Any damage or malfunction caused by the use of unauthorized parts is not covered by Warranty or Product
Liability.
The manufacturer does not accept any liability for any damage arising from modifications, additions or
conversions made without the manufacturer's approval in writing.
Neglecting maintenance or making changes to the setup of the machine can result in major hazards, including
fire risk.
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is correct, Atlas Copco does
not assume responsibility for possible errors.
Copyright 2012, Atlas Copco Airpower n.v., Antwerp, Belgium.

Any unauthorized use or copying of the contents or any part thereof is prohibited.
This applies in particular to trademarks, model denominations, part numbers and drawings.
Quick Start Guide
Qc4002™ MkII – Quick Start Guide

GETTING STARTED AND BASIC PRINCIPLES
CONTENTS
1. DELIMITATION .......................................................................................................................................3
2. GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................4
2.1 Warnings, legal information and safety ...............................................................................................4

2.1.1 Warnings and notes .................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Legal information and disclaimer ............................................................................................................... 4
2.1.3 Safety issues ............................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.4 Electrostatic discharge awareness ............................................................................................................ 4
2.1.5 Factory settings ......................................................................................................................................... 4
3. ABOUT THE QUICK START GUIDE ..........................................................................................................5
3.1 General purpose .................................................................................................................................5

3.2 Intended users ..................................................................................................................................5
4. WHAT IS IN THE DELIVERY? ...................................................................................................................6
4.1 Standard delivery................................................................................................................................6

4.2 Optional delivery ................................................................................................................................7
5. GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................................9
5.1 Connecting the devices ......................................................................................................................9

5.1.1 Connecting the display with the main unit ................................................................................................ 9
6. THE FIRST STEPS ................................................................................................................................. 10
6.1 Switching on the first time ............................................................................................................... 10

6.1.1 Qc4002™ MkII single application ............................................................................................................ 10
6.1.2 Qc4002™ MkII Island ............................................................................................................................ 12
6.1.3 Qc4002™ MkII Mains ........................................................................................................................... 14
6.1.4 Qc4002™ MkII bus tie ............................................................................................................................ 16
6.2 Getting started with the utility software (USW)................................................................................. 18
6.2.1 Downloading the software ...................................................................................................................... 18
6.2.2 Installation of USB drivers ....................................................................................................................... 18
6.2.3 Getting connected with the Qc4002™ MkII ............................................................................................ 19
6.2.4 Uploading parameters ............................................................................................................................. 20
6.2.5 Basic configuration of a device using the utility software ....................................................................... 21
7. DISPLAY PUSHBUTTONS AND LEDS .................................................................................................... 23
7.1 Pushbutton functions ....................................................................................................................... 23

7.2 LED functions .................................................................................................................................. 24
7.3 Display navigation ............................................................................................................................ 25
7.4 Controller setup ............................................................................................................................... 26
7.4.1 Controllers available ................................................................................................................................ 26
|1
Qc4002™ MkII Control Panel
7.4.2 Controller output types............................................................................................................................ 26
8. RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 30
2|
Quick Start Guide
1. Delimitation
This Quick Start Guide covers the following products:
Qc4002™ MkII SW version 4.x.x or later
|3
2. General information
2.1 Warnings, legal information and safety
2.1.1 Warnings and notes

Throughout this document, a number of warnings and notes with helpful user information will be presented. To
ensure that these are noticed, they will be highlighted as follows in order to separate them from the general text.
WARNINGS indicate a potentially dangerous situation, which could result in death, personal injury or
damaged equipment, if certain guidelines are not followed.
NOTES: Notes provide general information, which will be helpful for the reader to bear in mind.
2.1.2 Legal information and disclaimer

Atlas Copco takes no responsibility for installation or operation of the generator set. If there is any doubt about how
to install or operate the engine/generator controlled by the Qc4002™ MkII unit, the company responsible for the
installation or the operation of the set must be contacted.
The Qc4002™ MkII unit is not to be opened by unauthorised personnel. If opened anyway, the warranty will
be lost.
Disclaimer
Atlas Copco reserves the right to change any of the contents of this document without prior notice.
2.1.3 Safety issues

Installing and operating the Qc4002™ MkII unit may imply work with dangerous currents and voltages. Therefore,
the installation should only be carried out by authorised personnel who understand the risks involved in working
with live electrical equipment.
Be aware of the hazardous live currents and voltages. Do not touch any AC measurement inputs as this could
lead to injury or death.
2.1.4 Electrostatic discharge awareness

Sufficient care must be taken to protect the terminal against static discharges during the installation. Once the unit
is installed and connected, these precautions are no longer necessary.
2.1.5 Factory settings

The Qc4002™ MkII unit is delivered from factory with certain factory settings. These are based on average values
and are not necessarily the correct settings for matching the engine/generator set in question. Precautions must be
taken to check the settings before running the engine/generator set.
Please contact your Atlas Copco service center before adjusting the settings.
4|
Quick Start Guide
3. About the Quick Start Guide

3.1 General purpose
This Quick Start Guide mainly includes general product information, mounting instructions and wiring
descriptions.
The general purpose of this document is to help the user with the first steps of installing and using the
Qc4002™ MkII.
Please make sure that you read the Installation Instructions before starting to work with the Qc4002™ MkII
and the genset to be controlled. Failure to do this could result in human injury or damage to the equipment.
3.2 Intended users

This Quick Start Guide is mainly intended for the panel builder in charge. Based on this document, the panel
builder designer will give the electrician the information needed in order to get started with the installation. For
detailed electrical drawings, please see the general Qc4002™ MkII User manual.
|5
4. What is in the delivery?

4.1 Standard delivery
• The main Qc4002™ MkII controller
• The Qc4002™ MkII display
• The Qc4002™ MkII User manual
6|
Quick Start Guide
4.2 Optional delivery
• Display cable (option J1/J2/J6)
• PC cable for utility software (option J7)
• Additional standard display (option X2)
Contains:
• Display cable
• 1089 9561 38 (length = 1m)
• 1089 9561 40 (length = 3m)
• 1089 9561 39 (length = 6m)
• 1089 9561 54: PC Cable

• 1626 1091 00: Additional Display Unit
• 1626 1092 00: AOP1
• 1626 1093 00: AOP2
• Additional Operator's Panel, AOP-1 (option X3)
|7
• Additional Operator's Panel, AOP-2 (option X4)
8|
Quick Start Guide
5. Getting started
5.1 Connecting the devices
5.1.1 Connecting the display with the main unit

Connect the SUB-D display cable to the main unit and the display unit as shown in the picture below.
|9
6. The first steps

6.1 Switching on the first time
The drawings below show the wiring of the most important signals. Once all connections to the main units are
made, the units are ready to be switched on.
6.1.1 Qc4002™ MkII single application

NOTE: The most important connections are marked with an arrow.
10 |
Quick Start Guide
| 11
6.1.2 Qc4002™ MkII Island
12 |
Quick Start Guide
| 13
6.1.3 Qc4002™ MkII Mains
14 |
Quick Start Guide
| 15
6.1.4 Qc4002™ MkII bus tie
16 |
Quick Start Guide
| 17
6.2 Getting started with the utility software (USW)
6.2.1 Downloading the software

The software can be found on GBP, Global Business Portal, in the section service/Generators 2009-..../Software
6.2.2 Installation of USB drivers
Windows Vista:
On Windows Vista machines the USB drivers are installed automatically.
Windows XP:
When you connect the Qc4002™ MkII, Windows XP will launch two “Hardware Wizards”.
Two drivers are to be installed, so please let Windows execute both “Found new Hardware Wizards”.
We recommend letting the Hardware Wizard install the software automatically by choosing the “Recommended”
option.
Please select “Continue Anyway” if a “Hardware Installation” warning (see screenshot below) appears during the
installation.
18 |
Quick Start Guide
6.2.3 Getting connected with the Qc4002™ MkII

1. Connect the Qc4002™ MkII service port to the USB on the computer.
2. Click the PARUS 3 icon on the desktop or in the Windows Start menu.
The window below appears:
3. Open the application settings by clicking the Application button .

4. Open the "Windows device manager".
5. Check the COM port used for communication, and make sure the settings correspond to the application settings.
6. Click the Connect button .

You are now online with the Qc4002™ MkII.
| 19
6.2.4 Uploading parameters

1. Open the “Parameters” list.
2. Click the Upload parameters from device button .

The device is now ready to be configured.
20 |
Quick Start Guide
6.2.5 Basic configuration of a device using the utility software

When the parameters have been uploaded, the options below will be available.
The parameters can be configured as follows:

1. Double-click on the parameter.
A Password window will appear.
2. Enter the correct password (“2003” at Customer level) and click OK.
| 21
3. Adjust the parameter:
• by using the slider : or
• by clicking on the value that needs to be changed:
• Select the Enable checkbox.
4. Click Write to update the single edited parameter directly online in the control module.
5. Click OK to get back to the parameter overview.
NOTE: For more information, please consult the Utility software manual.
22 |
Quick Start Guide
7. Display pushbuttons and LEDs

7.1 Pushbutton functions
The display unit holds a number of pushbutton functions which are described below:
1 INFO Shifts the display 3 lower lines to show the alarm list.
2 JUMP Enters a specific menu number selection. All settings have a specific number attached to
them. The JUMP button enables the user to select and display any setting without having
to navigate through the menus.
3 START Start of the gen-set if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ or ‘MANUAL’ is selected.
4 STOP Stop of the gen-set if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ or ‘MANUAL’ is selected.
By pressing the STOP button once, the generator will be stopped after cooldown.
By pressing the STOP button twice, the generator will be stopped without cooldown.
5 GB Manual activation of close breaker and open breaker sequence if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ is
selected.
6 MB Manual activation of close breaker and open breaker sequence if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ is
selected.
7 VIEW Shifts the first line displaying in the setup menus.
8 LOG Displays the LOG SETUP window where you can choose between the Event, Alarm and
Battery logs. The logs are not deleted when the auxiliary supply is switched off.
9 SEL (ENTER) Is used to select the underscored entry in the fourth line of the display.
10 BACK Jumps one step backwards in the menu (to previous display or to the entry window).
11 MODE Changes the menu line (line 4) in the display to mode selection.
12 UP/DOWN Increases/decreases the value of the selected set point (in the setup menu). In the daily
use display, this button function is used for scrolling the View lines in V1 or the second
line (in the setup menu) displaying of generator values.
13 LEFT/RIGHT Moves the cursor left / right for manoeuvring in the menus.
| 23
7.2 LED functions

The display unit holds 10 LED functions. The colour is green or red or a combination in different situations. The
display LEDs are indicating as follows:
1 ALARM LED flashing indicates that unacknowledged alarms are present.

LED fixed light indicates that ALL alarms are acknowledged.
2 POWER LED indicates that the auxiliary supply is switched on.
3 SELF CHECK OK LED indicates that the self check is OK.
4 ALARM INHIBIT LED indicates that one of the alarm inhibit functions is active.
LED switches off automatically. No action should be taken.
5 RUN LED indicates that the generator is running.
6 GENERATOR VOLTAGE LED green light indicates that the voltage/frequency is present and OK.
7 (GB) ON LED green light indicates that the generator breaker is closed.
LED yellow light indicates that the generator breaker has received a command to close
on a black BUS, but the breaker is not yet closed due to interlocking of the GB.
LED is flashing orange if the ‘Spring load time’ signal from the breaker is missing.
8 (MB) ON LED indicates that the mains breaker is closed.
9 MAINS VOLTAGE LED is green, if the mains is present and OK.
LED is red at a measured mains failure.
LED is flashing green when the mains returns during the ‘mains OK delay’ time.
10 AUTO LED indicates that auto mode is selected.
24 |
Quick Start Guide
7.3 Display navigation
NOTE: For more information, refer to the general Qc4002™ MkII User manual.
| 25
7.4 Controller setup
7.4.1 Controllers available
Governor (std.)
• Synchronisation (static and dynamic sync.)
• Phase angle (static sync.)
• Frequency
• Power
• Load sharing
AVR (option D1)

• Voltage
• Reactive power
• Reactive load sharing
7.4.2 Controller output types
Analogue (option E1, E2, EF2 or EF4)

Transducer output 66 or 71
Relays (std.)
Normally relays 65, 67, 69 and 71, but any configurable relay can be used.
26 |
Quick Start Guide
Setup of a controller with analogue option and AVR option:
| 27
Setup of a controller with relay and AVR option
28 |
Quick Start Guide
Setup of a controller with EIC for GOV control and analogue for AVR control
| 29
8. Related documents
For further information, please consult also:
2954 6330 00 Qc4002™ MkII User manual
2954 6340 00 Qc4002™ MkII PMS User manual
2954 6170 01 Qc4002™ MkII Transformer Maintenance manual
2954 6350 00 Qc4002™ MkII Retrofit instructions
2954 6360 00 Qc4002™ MkII Modbus communication
2954 6370 00 Qc4002 ™ MkII M-Logic
2954 6380 00 Qc4002™ MkII Parameter list
30 |
Qc4002™ MkII - User Manual

DESCRIPTION OF Qc4002™ MkII
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL.........................................................................2 6 STANDARD FUNCTIONS & PROTECTIONS ...............23
6.1. Engine Protection ...............................................23
2 DISPLAY UNIT AND MENU STRUCTURE.....................3
6.2. Alternator Protection .........................................23
2.1. Display unit ...........................................................3
6.3. Voltage/var/cos(phi) control .............................23
2.1.1. Pushbuttons ...........................................................3
6.4. Analogue controller outputs .............................23
2.1.2. LED functions .........................................................4
6.5. Load sharing between gen-sets'
2.2. Menu structure .....................................................5
analogue lines.....................................................23
2.2.1. Entry window .........................................................5
6.6. Engine communication ......................................23
2.2.2. View menu .............................................................5
6.7. Configurable I/O extension card .......................24
2.2.3. Setup menu ............................................................5
6.8. Power Management System (PMS)..................24
3 MODE OVERVIEW ..........................................................7 6.9. Modbus Serial communication .........................24
3.1. Auto .......................................................................7
7 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS & PROTECTIONS .................24
3.2. Semi-auto..............................................................7
7.1. CAN-open Serial communication......................24
3.3. Test mode .............................................................7
7.2. Profibus Serial communication.........................24
3.4. Manual mode ........................................................8
7.3. Analogue Transducer Output of
3.5. Block mode ...........................................................8 measured values (2x 4…20mA).........................24
4 APPLICATIONS OVERVIEW ...........................................9 7.4. 7 Binary Inputs....................................................24
4.1. Island operation....................................................9 7.5. 4 Relay Outputs ..................................................24
4.2. AMF (no back synchronisation) ..........................9 7.6. 4 Analogue Inputs (4…20mA)............................24
4.3. AMF (with back synchronisation) .......................9 7.7. Ethernet - TCP/IP communication ....................24
4.4. Fixed power / base load ......................................9 8 HARDWARE ...................................................................24
4.5. Peak shaving .......................................................10
4.6. Load take over ....................................................10 9 WIRINGS ........................................................................25
4.7. Mains power export ...........................................10 9.1. Wiring for AMF, peak shaving, fixed
power, mains power export and load
4.8. Transformer maintenance .................................10
take over application..........................................25
4.9. Multiple gen-sets with load sharing.................10
9.2. Wiring for Island and PMS mode
4.10. Multiple gen-sets with power management ...10 application...........................................................25
5 APPLICATIONS DETAILS..............................................12 9.3. Load sharing lines ..............................................26
5.1. Single running gen-set.......................................12 9.4. Binary inputs.......................................................26
5.1.1. Island operation ....................................................12 9.5. Analogue inputs (external set-points)..............26
5.1.2. AMF operation......................................................13 9.6. Optocoupler outputs for external counter .......26
5.1.3. Peak shaving application.......................................13 9.7. Display cable .......................................................27
5.1.4. Fixed power..........................................................14 9.8. USB cable for PC.................................................27
5.1.5. Load take over ......................................................15 10 PASSWORD LEVELS.....................................................28
5.1.6. Mains power export .............................................15
5.1.7. Transformer maintenance ....................................16 11 PROCEDURE FOR PARAMETER SETUP......................29
5.2. Multi running gen-sets.......................................17 11.1. Parameter descriptions......................................29
5.2.1. Island operation ....................................................17 11.2. Setup ...................................................................29
5.2.2. AMF operation......................................................17 11.3. Parameter list......................................................29
5.2.3. Peak shaving application.......................................18 12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................30
5.2.4. Fixed power..........................................................19
13 DIMENSIONS.................................................................32
5.2.5. Load take over ......................................................20
5.2.6. Mains power export .............................................20 14 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................33
5.2.7. Power management system ................................21
|1
User Manual
1 General
The Atlas Copco Qc4002™ MkII is a protection and control
unit for a generator driven by a diesel engine. It will carry out
all necessary tasks to control and protect a generator, regardless
of the use of the generator. This means that the Atlas Copco
Qc4002™ MkII can be used for several application types.
The Qc4002™ MkII measuring system is true RMS 3-phase
measurement of generator voltage, generator current, generator
frequency, mains voltage and mains frequency.
The information contained in this User Manual is to assist you
in the installation of your gen-set. If something is not clear,
please do not hesitate to contact Atlas Copco for further help.
2 |
2 Display unit and menu structure
2.1 Display unit

This chapter deals with the display unit including the pushbutton and LED functions. In addition, the unit menu structure will be
presented.
2.1.1 Pushbuttons
The display unit holds 15 pushbuttons with the following functions.
7 13 12 13
9
2
12
3
5 6 8 10 11
1 INFO Shifts the display 3 lower lines to show the alarm list.
2 JUMP Enters a specific menu number selection. All settings have a specific number attached to them. The JUMP button
enables the user to select and display any setting without having to navigate through the menus (see also further
in this manual).
3 START Start of the gen-set if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ or ‘MANUAL’ is selected.
4 STOP Stop of the gen-set if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ or ‘MANUAL’ is selected.
By pressing the STOP button once, the generator will be stopped after cooldown.
By pressing the STOP button twice, the generator will be stopped without cooldown.
5 GB Manual activation of close breaker and open breaker sequence if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ is selected.
6 MB Manual activation of close breaker and open breaker sequence if ‘SEMI-AUTO’ is selected.
7 VIEW Shifts the first line displaying in the setup menus.
8 LOG Displays the LOG SETUP window where you can choose between the Event, Alarm and Battery logs. The logs
are not deleted when the auxiliary supply is switched off.
9 SELECT (ENTER) Is used to select the underscored entry in the fourth line of the display.
10 BACK Jumps one step backwards in the menu (to previous display or to the entry window).
11 MODE Changes the menu line (line 4) in the display to mode selection.
12 UP / DOWN Increases/decreases the value of the selected set point (in the setup menu). In the daily use display, this button
function is used for scrolling the View lines in V1 or the second line (in the setup menu) displaying of generator
values.
13 LEFT / RIGHT Moves the cursor left / right for manoeuvring in the menus.
|3
User Manual
2.1.2 LED functions

The display unit holds 10 LED functions. The colour is green or red or a combination in different situations.
2
1
3
4
10
5 6 7 8 9
1 ALARM LED flashing indicates that unacknowledged alarms are present.

LED fixed light indicates that ALL alarms are acknowledged.
2 POWER LED indicates that the auxiliary supply is switched on.
3 SELF CHECK OK LED indicates that the self check is OK.
4 ALARM INHIBIT LED indicates that one of the alarm inhibit functions is active.
LED switches off automatically. No action should be taken.
5 RUN LED indicates that the generator is running.
6 GENERATOR VOLTAGE LED green light indicates that the voltage/frequency is present and OK.
7 (GB) ON LED green light indicates that the generator breaker is closed.
LED yellow light indicates that the generator breaker has received a command to close on a black BUS,
but the breaker is not yet closed due to interlocking of the GB.
LED is flashing orange if the ‘Spring load time’ signal from the breaker is missing.
8 (MB) ON LED indicates that the mains breaker is closed.
9 MAINS VOLTAGE LED is green, if the mains is present and OK.
LED is red at a measured mains failure.
LED is flashing green when the mains returns during the ‘mains OK delay’ time.
10 AUTO LED indicates that auto mode is selected.
4 |
2.2 Menu structure 2.2.2 View menu
The display includes two menu systems which can be used The view menus (V1, V2 and V3) are the most commonly used
without password entry: menus of the unit.
• View menu system: • View 1: access to up to 15 selectable windows displaying

This is the commonly used menu system. 15 windows are selectable measurements.
configurable and can be entered by using the arrow push- • View 2: window displays selectable measurements.
buttons.
• View 3: window displays operational status and selectable
• Setup menu system: measurements.
This menu system is used for setting up the unit, and if the
user needs detailed information that is not available in the In the view menus various measured values are on display.
view menu system. Changing of parameter settings is The menu navigating starts from the fourth display line in the
password protected. entry window and is carried out using the navigating push-
buttons.
2.2.1 Entry window
The entry window displays view 3.
When the unit is powered up, an entry window appears. The
entry window is the turning point in the menu structure and as
2.2.3 Setup menu
such the gateway to the other menus. It can always be reached
by pressing the BACK push-button 3 times. The setup menu system is used for parameter setup of the unit,
and if the user needs detailed information that is not available in
the view menu system. So, this menu can be used for both daily
QC4002MkII 4 use and setup purposes. The menu is entered from the entry
window by selecting the entry SETUP in the fourth display line.
G 0 0V 0
f-L1 0.00Hz
NOTE: The event and alarm list will appear at power up, if an alarm PROTECTION SETUP
is present. PROT CTRL I/O SYST
Setup menu – access to the following sub-menus:
• Protection setup
• Control setup
• I/O setup
• System setup
|5
User Manual
Setup structure:
QC4002MkII V. 4.00.0
2012-02-06 09.35.54
SETUP V3 V2 V1
G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V
f-L1 50.02Hz f-L1 50.02Hz f-L1 50.02Hz f-L1 50.02Hz
PROTECTION SETUP CONTROL SETUP INPUT/OUTPUT SETUP SYSTEM SETUP
PROT CTRL I/O SYST PROT CTRL I/O SYST PROT CTRL I/O SYST PROT CTRL I/O SYST
G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V G 439 440 440V
1000 G –P> 1 CONTROL SETUP INPUT/OUTPUT SETUP SYSTEM SETUP
Set point -5.0% SYNCHRONICE SETUP BINARY INPUT SETUP GENERAL SETUP
SP DEL OA OB ENA FC SYNC REG BIN AIN OUT GEN MAINS COMM PM
PROT CTRL I/O SYST
1000-1999 SYNC 2000-2499 BIN 3000-3999 GEN 6000-6999
REG 2500-2999 AIN 4000-4999 MAINS 7000-7499
OUT 5000-5999 COMM 7500-7999
PM 8000-8999
6 |
3 Mode overview
The unit has four different running modes and one block mode. Command Description Comment
The required mode can be selected via the MODE puhbutton. Manual AVR The regulator is deactivated and the
Repeat pushing the button until the required mode appears on UP governor output is activated as long as
the display, then press SEL to select or BACK to cancel. See the AVR input is ON.
below for detailed information. Manual AVR The regulator is deactivated and the
DOWN governor output is activated as long as
the AVR input is ON.
3.1 Auto
In this mode the Qc4002™ MkII controls the gen-set and the 3.3 Test mode
circuit breakers (generator breaker GB and mains breaker MB) In this mode it is possible to perform the following tests:
automatically according to the operational state.
• Simple test:
When operating in AUTO mode the STOP and GB The simple test will only start the gen-set and run it at
Open/Close button will not function. nominal frequency with the generator breaker open. The test
will run until the timer expires.
3.2 Semi-auto • Load test:
The load test will start the gen-set and run it at nominal
In semi-auto mode the operator has to initiate all sequences.
frequency, synchronise the generator breaker and produce
This can be done via the pushbutton functions, modbus
the power typed in the set point in menu 7041. The test will
commands or digital inputs. When started in semi-automatic
run until the timer expires.
mode, the gen-set will run at nominal values.
NOTE: To run the load test it is required that ‘Sync to Mains’ is
The following sequences can be activated in semi-auto:
enabled in menu 7084.
Command Description Comment When running a load test sequence the overlap function is
ignored.
Start The start sequence is initiated and
continues until the genset starts or the • Full test:
maximum number of start attempts has
been reached. The frequency (and
The full test will start the gen-set and run it at nominal
voltage) will be regulated to make the frequency, synchronise the generator breaker and transfer the
GB ready to close. load to the generator before opening the mains breaker.
Stop The gen-set will be stopped. After When the test timer expires, the mains breaker will be
disappearance of the running signal, the synchronised and the load is transferred back to the mains
stop sequence will continue to be active before the generator breaker is opened and the generator is
in the 'extended stop time' period.
stopped.
Close GB The unit will close the generator When AMF mode is
breaker, if the mains breaker is open, selected, the unit NOTE: To run the full test it is required that ‘Sync to Mains’ and
synchronise and close the generator will not regulate ‘Back synchronisation’ is enabled in menu 7083 and 7084.
breaker, if the mains breaker is closed. after breaker
closure. Parameter 7042 defines the timer related to the test mode.
Open GB The unit will ramp down and open the
generator breaker at the breaker open
point, if the mains breaker is closed.
The unit will open the generator breaker
instantly, if the mains breaker is open or
the gen-set mode is island mode.
Close MB The unit will close the mains breaker, if
the generator breaker is open,
synchronise and close the mains
breaker, if the generator breaker is
closed.
Open MB The unit opens the mains breaker
instantly.
Manual GOV The regulator is deactivated and the
UP governor output is activated as long as
the GOV input is ON.
Manual GOV The regulator is deactivated and the
DOWN governor output is activated as long as
the GOV input is ON.
|7
User Manual
3.4 Manual mode

When manual mode is selected, the generator frequency and
voltage can be controlled with external inputs.
The following commands are possible:
Command Comment
Start (input or push Gen-set starts (no regulation).
button)
Stop (input or push Gen-set opens GB and stops without cooling-down.
button)
Manual increase speed Unit gives increase signal to speed governor.
Manual decrease speed Unit gives decrease signal to speed governor.
Manual increase Unit gives increase signal to the AVR. (Option AVR
voltage control).
Manual decrease Unit gives decrease signal to the AVR. (Option
voltage AVR control).
NOTE: It is necessary to configure the digital inputs through the PC

utility software to use the manual commands. The number of
configurable digital inputs is option dependent.
It is not possible to open and close the generator breaker or
the mains breaker in manual mode.
MAN mode cannot be selected, when AUTO mode is
selected. To go from AUTO to MAN it is necessary to
go to SEMI-AUTO to make MAN available.
3.5 Block mode

When the block mode is selected, the unit is locked for certain
actions. This means that it cannot start the gen-set or perform
any breaker operations.
To change the running mode from the display, the user will be
asked for a password before the change can be made. It is not
possible to select ‘block mode’ when running feedback is
present.
The purpose of the block mode is to make sure that the gen-set
does not start for instance during maintenance work. If the
digital inputs are used to change the mode, then it is important
to know that the input configured to block mode is a constant
signal. So, when it is ON the unit is in a blocked state, and when
it is OFF, it returns to the mode it was in before block mode was
selected.
NOTE: If block mode is selected using the display after the digital
block input is activated, the Qc4002™ will stay in block
mode after the block input is deactivated. The block mode
must now be changed using the display. The block mode can
only be changed locally by display or digital input.
Alarms are not influenced by block mode selection.
8 |
4 Applications overview
It is possible to select 10 different applications (via display or Semi-auto mode description:
configurator software).
The semi-auto mode is not recommended for AMF.
Gen-set mode
Automatic Mains Failure (no back sync.) 4.3 AMF (with back synchronisation)
Automatic Mains Failure (with back sync.)
Island operation Auto mode description:
Fixed power/base load
Peak shaving
The unit automatically starts the gen-set and switches to
Load take over
generator supply at a mains failure after an adjustable delay
Mains power export
time. It is possible to adjust the unit to change to gen-set
Transformer maintenance
operation in two different ways:
Multiple gen-sets, load sharing • The mains breaker will be opened at gen-set start-up.
Multiple gen-sets, power management
• The mains breaker will remain closed until the gen-set is
For some applications, an optional Power Transducer is
running and the gen-set voltage and frequency is OK.
required. Power Transducers for these applications are available
for: In both cases, the generator breaker will be closed when the
generator voltage and frequency is OK, and the mains breaker
• 230VAC Supply: 1089 9561 56
is open.
• 400VAC Supply: 1089 9561 57
When the mains returns, the unit will synchronise the mains
• 480VAC Supply: 1089 9561 58 breaker to the busbar when the ‘Mains OK delay’ has expired.
Then the gen-set cools down and stops.
• 24VDC Supply: 1089 9561 59
Semi-auto mode description:
4.1 Island operation The semi-auto mode is not recommended for AMF.
This application is possible in combination with SEMI-AUTO
mode or AUTO mode. The internal real time clock timer can 4.4 Fixed power / base load
only be used in AUTO mode.
This application is possible in combination with SEMI-AUTO
Installation is stand alone, never with the Mains. mode or AUTO mode. The internal real time clock timer can
Operation of generator breaker GB. only be used in AUTO mode.
Installation is with the Mains.
4.2 AMF (no back synchronisation) • Operation of generator breaker GB
Auto mode description: • Operation of mains breaker MB (if present)
The unit automatically starts the gen-set and switches to

generator supply at a mains failure after an adjustable delay
time. It is possible to adjust the unit to change to gen-set
operation in two different ways.
• The mains breaker will be opened at gen-set start-up.
• The mains breaker will remain closed, until the gen-set is
running, and the gen-set voltage and frequency is OK.
In both cases, the generator breaker will be closed when the
generator voltage and frequency is OK, and the mains breaker
is open.
When the mains returns, the unit will switch back to mains
supply and cool down and stop the gen-set. The switching back
to mains supply is done without back synchronisation when the
adjusted ‘Mains OK delay’ has expired.
|9
User Manual
4.5 Peak shaving 4.8 Transformer maintenance

This application is possible in combination with the AUTO The purpose of the transformer maintenance mode is to enable
mode or SEMI-AUTO mode. repair of or service on a transformer by disconnecting the Mains
from the system.
Installation with the Mains.
This application is normally used in combination with SEMI-
An optional Power Transducer is required.
AUTO mode in installations with the Mains. It is only
• Automatic starting of the gen-set applicable in combination with a Transformer Maintenance
Box.
• Operation of the mains breaker MB and generator breaker
GB For more information, refer to the Transformer Maintenance
manual.
• Load control
• Stopping of the gen-set
4.9 Multiple gen-sets with load sharing
In this application the units are enabled to share the active and
4.6 Load take over
reactive load equally in percentage of the nominal power. The
The purpose of the load take over mode is to transfer the load load sharing is active when each gen-set is running in island
imported from the mains to the gen-set for operation on mode and the generator breaker is closed.
generator supply only.
This application is possible in combination with SEMI-AUTO 4.10 Multiple gen-sets with power
mode or AUTO mode with internal real time clock timer. management
Installation is stand alone or with the Mains.
This application is only possible in combination with the AUTO
• Operation of the mains and generator breaker GB mode.
An optional Power Transducer is required. If the SEMI-AUTO mode is selected, the PMS operation will
NOT function !!
4.7 Mains power export Installations are possible with stand alone generators or with the
Mains (extra Qc4002™ MkII Mains is then needed):
The mains power export mode can be used to maintain a
constant level of power through the mains breaker. The power • Operation of the generator breaker GB and Mains & Tie
can be exported to the mains or imported from the mains, but breaker
always at a constant level. • Automatic start/stop function with multiple gensets
This application is possible in combination with SEMI-AUTO depending on the load demand.
mode or AUTO mode. The internal real time clock timer can A number of Qc4002™ MkII units are being used in the power
only be used in AUTO mode. management application, i.e. one for each mains breaker
Installation is with the Mains. (Qc4002™ MkII mains controller), if installed, and one for each
generator (Qc4002™ MkII genset controller).
• Operation of generator breaker GB
All units communicate by means of an internal CANbus
• Operation of mains breaker MB (if present) connection.
An optional Power Transducer is required.
10 |
Power management applications: • Parallel with 2 mains with a tie breaker (the tie breaker is
optional):
• Island mode application:
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2
MAINS 1 DISPLAY MAINS 1A DISPLAY MAINS 1B MAINS 2 DISPLAY MAINS 2A DISPLAY MAINS 2B
MAINS 3 Qc4002 Qc4002 MAINS 3 Qc4002 Qc4002

BREAKER BREAKER
MAINS MAINS MAINS MAINS
(MB1) (MB2)
BUSBAR
CAN-bus
CONSUMERS
GENERATOR Qc4002 GENERATOR Qc4002

BREAKER BREAKER DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2
(GB1) (GB2)
TIE
3 3 BREAKER
(TB)
BUSBAR
CAN-bus

BREAKER BREAKER
(GB1) (GB2)
3 3
DIESEL GENERATOR SET 1 DIESEL GENERATOR SET 2
• Parallell to mains application:
• ATS plant, mains unit:

MAINS DISPLAY MAINS
DISPLAY MAINS
MAINS
3
MAINS Qc4002
BREAKER
3
(MB)
MAINS OKAY
DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2
CONSUMERS ATS ON/OFF
CONSUMERS Qc4002
TIE DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2 DISPLAY 3

BREAKER
(TB)
TIE
BREAKER
(TB)
BUSBAR
BUSBAR
CAN-bus
CAN-bus
Qc4002 Qc4002 Qc4002

BREAKER BREAKER
3 3 3
(GB1) (GB2)
3 3
DIESEL GENERATOR SET 1 DIESEL GENERATOR SET 2 DIESEL GENERATOR SET 3
| 11
User Manual
5 Applications details
This chapter shows the correct application configuration for the 5.1 Single running gen-set
different use of the Qc4002™. The following application
configurations are possible:
5.1.1 Island operation
Single gen-set AMF operation AUTO mode
In combination with SEMI-AUTO mode:
(SEMI-AUTO mode)*
Island mode AUTO mode • The gen-set can be started/stopped wih a local start
SEMI-AUTO mode command. The breaker can be closed/opened with a local
Peak shaving AUTO mode
command (= LOCAL START).
SEMI-AUTO mode
In combination with AUTO mode:
Fixed Power AUTO mode
SEMI-AUTO mode • The gen-set can be started/stopped with a remote start
Load Take Over AUTO mode command (= REMOTE START).
SEMI-AUTO mode • This can be a command through a signal from the internal
Mains Power Export AUTO mode real time clock.
SEMI-AUTO mode
• This can be a command through a binary input. When an
Transformer SEMI-AUTO mode
external hard-wired switch (connected to this dedicated
Maintenance
input) is closed, the unit will start up and the generator
Multi gen-sets AMF operation AUTO mode
breaker will be closed. When this external switch is opened
(SEMI-AUTO mode)*
again, the unit will open the generator circuit breaker and
Island mode AUTO mode stop.
SEMI-AUTO mode
Peak shaving AUTO mode
The generator is running in a system without simultaneous
connection to other systems.
SEMI-AUTO mode
Fixed Power AUTO mode LOAD
SEMI-AUTO mode
Load Take Over AUTO mode
SEMI-AUTO mode G
Mains Power Export AUTO mode
SEMI-AUTO mode Qc4002
Power Management AUTO mode
System (SEMI-AUTO mode)*
Related customer settings:
( )* = the AMF and PMS operation will not function properly, when
SEMI-AUTO mode is selected! Select the correct mode (Semi-auto/Auto) pushbutton MODE on
display
It is possible to use the Qc4002™ MkII for one of these Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070
purposes, or for peak shaving/fixed power/ load take over in Cool down setting channel 6210
combination with AMF (only in AUTO mode).
Start command through internal real time channel 6960
The correct configuration can be set through the Qc4002™ clock
MkII Utility Software or via the setup menu on the display. Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
clock
From each of the above applications the module can jump into
the Test mode, by selecting Test mode via the ‘mode’ button on Related customer wirings:
the display. The gen-set will follow the defined Test sequences
• Remote Start switch towards the dedicated binary input
and afterwards the gen-set will return in its previous
application, always in combination with the AUTO mode.
For details on all setpoints, see the Parameter list.
For more detailed information on the Qc4002™ MkII
For details on the wirings, see the circuit diagram.
applications, refer to the Application Data Sheets.
12 |
5.1.2 AMF operation 5.1.3 Peak shaving application

When the mains goes outside the user-defined voltage (over and
under) or frequency (over and under) for a certain user-defined
time, the mains will be disconnected and the gen-set will be • The gen-set will start up when the mains imported power
started to take over the load. (measured through an optional Power Transducer PT)
exceeds a user-defined level. The gen-set will synchronise
When the mains is restored within the user-defined limits for a
with the bus, and will take load according a user-defined
certain user-defined time, the gen-set will synchronise to the
ramp until the user-defined allowable mains imported power
mains and deload the gen-set according a user defined ramp
level is reached.
before disconnecting the gen-set (only if back-synchronisation
feature is enabled) • When the mains imported power decreases below the user-
defined mains imported power level for a user-definable
The gen-set will then go into cool down and stop.
time, the gen-set will deload according a user-defined ramp
The generator is running in a system with only short and disconnect from the bus. Then the gen-set will go into
simultaneous connection to other systems. cooldown.
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature. • It is possible to define two levels of max. mains imported
power: 'day' level and 'night' level.
LOAD
G • The gen-set starts up once a local start command is given.

The gen-set breaker closes once the local command is given,
Qc4002
and the synchronisation is done. The gen-set will take load
only if the mains imported power exceeds a user-defined
level.
Related customer settings: • The gen-set breaker can be opened and the gen-set stopped
with a local command.
Check that the module is in AUTO mode pushbutton on display
Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070 The generator is running in a system with long simultaneous
Cool down setting channel 6210 connection to other systems.
Mains V failure channel 7060 It is possible to enable/disable AMF as a second application
Mains Hz failure channel 7070 when the gen-set is in the peak shaving application. With AMF
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080 enabled, the gen-set will always guard the mains and will act as
breaker an AMF unit when not active as a peak shaving gen-set.
Related customer wirings: It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature.
• Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3.
LOAD
• Wires for control and feedback of the Mains breaker.
For details on all setpoints, see the Parameter list. G

For details on the wirings, see the circuit diagram. Qc4002
PT
| 13
User Manual
Related customer settings: It is possible to enable/disable AMF as a second application

when the gen-set is in fixe power application. With AMF
Select the correct mode (Semi-auto/Auto) pushbutton MODE on
display
enabled, the gen-set will always guard the mains and will act as
an AMF unit when not active as a fixed power gen-set.
Power ramp up / ramp down channel 2610-2620
Mains imported power level channel 7000 It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature.
Daytime period channel 7010
The generator is running in a system with long simultaneous
Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070 connection to other systems.
Cool down setting channel 6210
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080 LOAD
breaker
Enable/disable AMF as 2nd application channel 7080
G
Related customer wirings:
• Power Transducer lines Qc4002
• Wires for control and feedback of the Mains breaker

For details on the wirings, see the circuit diagram display
For more information on the Power Transducer option, please Power ramp up / ramp down channel 2610-2620
contact Atlas Copco. Fixed Power setpoint channel 7050
Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070
Cool down setting channel 6210
5.1.4 Fixed power
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080
breaker
• The gen-set will start up on a local command. The gen-set Start command through internal real time channel 6960
will synchronise with the mains, it will connect with the bus clock
and it will take load according to a user-defined level and Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
according a user-defined ramp. clock
• Stopping on a local command will deload the gen-set Related customer wirings:
according a user-defined ramp and disconnect the gen-set
from the bus. Then the gen-set will go into cooldown and • Remote Start switch towards the dedicated binary input.
stop. • Wires for control and feedback of the Mains breaker.
In combination with AUTO mode: For details on all setpoints, see the Parameter list.
• The gen-set will go through the same sequences once a For details on the wirings, see the circuit diagram.
remote command is given.
• This can be a command through a signal from the internal
real time clock.
• Or this can be a command through a binary input. When an
external hard-wired switch (connected to this dedicated
input) is closed, the unit will start up and the generator
breaker will be closed. When this external switch is opened
again, the unit will open the generator circuit breaker and
stop.
14 |
5.1.5 Load take over Related customer wirings:

• The gen-set will start up on a local command. The gen-set
will synchronise with the mains, it will connect with the bus, • Wires from the optional Power Transducer
and it will take over the load according a user-defined ramp
and disconnect the mains. To know if the load is completely For details on all setpoints, see the Parameter list.
taken over from the mains, an optional Power Transducer
(PT) is necessary.
For more information on the Power Transducer option, please
• After a local stop command, the gen-set will synchronise
contact Atlas Copco.
again to mains, connect the bus to mains, deload the gen-set
according a user-defined ramp and disconnect the gen-set
from the bus. Then the gen-set will go into cooldown and 5.1.6 Mains power export
stop.
In combination with AUTO mode: • The gen-set starts as a result of a digital start command. It
• The gen-set will go through the same sequences once a synchronises to the mains and will start to export power to
remote command is given. the mains. The amount of power exported will be kept at a
fixed level regardless of the load on the busbar (the factory).
• This can be a command through a signal from the internal
real time clock. • The stop command will cause the gen-set to deload and trip
the generator breaker. Afterwards, it will cool down and stop.
• Or this can be a command through a binary input.
• A Power Transducer (PT) is used for indication of the power
It is possible to enable/disable AMF as a second application exported from the mains.
when the gen-set is in the Load Take Over application. With
AMF enabled, the gen-set will always guard the mains and will In combination with SEMI-AUTO mode:
act as an AMF unit when not active as a Load Take Over gen-
set. • The gen-set starts as a result of a local start command. It
synchronises to the mains and will start to export power to
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature. the mains. The amount of power exported will be kept at a
The generator is running in a system with short simultaneous fixed level regardless of the load on the busbar (the factory).
connection to other systems. • The local stop command will cause the gen-set to deload and
trip the generator breaker. Afterwards, it will cool down and
LOAD stop.
• A Power Transducer (PT) is used for indication of the power
G exported from the mains.
Qc4002 It is possible to enable/disable AMF as a second application

when the gen-set is in the Mains Power Export application.
PT With AMF enabled, the gen-set will always guard the mains and
will act as an AMF unit when not active as a Mains Power
Export gen-set.
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature.
display
Power ramp up / ramp down channel 2610-2620 LOAD

Cool down setting channel 6210 G
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080
breaker Qc4002
PT
clock
Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
clock
| 15
User Manual
Related customer settings: 5.1.7 Transformer maintenance

Select the correct mode (Semi-auto/Auto) pushbutton MODE on In combination with SEMI-AUTO mode:
display
• The generator will start up and synchronise with the busbar
to connect to the electrical system. When the generator is
Mains Power Export setpoint channel 7000
synchronised, the generator breaker will close and the
generator starts taking the load. When the Mains power is
Cool down setting channel 6210 zero, the mains breaker can be switched off or the fuses can
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080 be removed.
breaker
Enable/disable AMF as 2nd application channel 7080 • After repair or service of the transformer the generator will
Start command through internal real time channel 6960 be backsynchronised to the mains and fuses can be restored.
clock Power is moved from generator to mains again before
Stop command through internal real time channel 6960 disconnecting.
clock
• A Transformer Maintenance Box is required.
• Wires from the optional Power Transducer

For more information on the Power Transducer option, please
contact Atlas Copco.
• 2 Transformer Maintenance Box cables:
• Control cable (25 m) (1626 4630 00)
• Sensing cable (25 m) (1626 4631 00)

For more information on Transformer Maintenance, refer to the
Transformer Maintance manual.
16 |
5.2 Multi running gen-sets Related customer settings:

5.2.1 Island operation display
In combination with SEMI-AUTO mode: Cool down setting channel 6210
• Starting up and loading generators can be done through local Start command through internal real time channel 6960
commands on the LCDisplays of each unit. For each extra clock
generator that is started, the breaker will close once the local Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
clock
command is given and the synchronisation is done.
Extra related customer settings Qc4002™ MkII Mains
In combination with AUTO mode: controller :
• Starting up and loading generators can be done through a
Int. Communication ID channel 7531
remote command. This can be a command through a signal
PMS configuration channel 8020
from the internal real time clock. Or this can be a command
Priority Select channel 8030
through a binary input.
Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140
Analogue: Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100
Number of ID's channel 7530
• The load sharing can be done through the analogue load Load dependent start channel 8000
sharing lines. Load dedendent stop channel 8010
• This method of loadsharing is compatible with Qc4001™ Related customer wirings:
and Qc4002™ controllers.
PMS:
• PMS communication lines
• Via the power management system (PMS) you have a fully
intelligent system which can determine which gen-sets to For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter
start and stop, according to the actual load and to each gen- list.
set's status. It is possible to do this kind of intelligent load For more details on related customer wirings, see circuit
sharing between up to16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers. diagram.
NOTE: When paralleling generators with PMS, it is no longer
necessary to use the analogue load sharing lines. This will be For more details on the PMS, see PMS User manual.
done through the PMS communication lines.
The generators are running in a system without simultaneous

connection to other systems. 5.2.2 AMF operation
The power management system (PMS) has a fully intelligent
LOAD
system which will start up all gen-sets in case of a mains failure,
G and then stops and starts gen-sets according to the actual load
and according to each gen-set's status.
Qc4002 It is possible to do this kind of intelligent load sharing between
up to 16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers.
G The generators are running in a system with only short

simultaneous connection to other systems. For the correct
Qc4002 working all the generator Qc4002™ MkII controllers need to be
programmed in PMS - AUTO mode and the Qc4002™ MkII
mains controller has to put in AMF - AUTO mode. A complete
G overview on the parameters that needs to be programmed in
both controllers can be found below.
Qc4002
| 17
User Manual
5.2.3 Peak shaving application

G Via the power management system (PMS) you have a fully
intelligent system which will start and stop the necessary gen-
Qc4002 set(s) to limit the imported mains power according the user-
defined level.
PMS can
G It is possible to define 2 levels of max mains imported power:

Tie Mains 'day' level and 'night' level.
Breaker breaker
Qc4002
LOAD
It is possible to do this kind of intelligent peak shaving with up
to 16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers.
G The generators are running in a system with long simultaneous
Qc Mains connection to other systems.
Qc4002
controller
It is possible to enable/disable AMF as a second application
when the gen-sets are in this peak shaving application.
With AMF enabled, the gen-sets will always guard the mains
Check that the module is in AUTO mode pushbutton on display and will act as AMF units when not active as peak shaving gen-
Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070 sets (extra Tie breaker is needed, page 17).
Cool down setting channel 6210 It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature.
Int. Communication ID channel 7531 -
PMS configuration channel 8020 LOAD

Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140 G
Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100
Qc4002
Number of ID's channel 7530 PMS can
Load dependent start channel 8000
Load dedendent stop channel 8010
G
Extra related customer settings Qc4002™ MkII Mains Qc4002
controller :
Mains V failure channel 7060
Mains Hz failure channel 7070 G
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080 Mains
breaker Qc4002 controller
Tie breaker channel 8190
NOTE : The Qc4002™ MkII controller of the generators and the Related customer settings:
Qc4002™ MkII mains controller are NOT the same
controllers. It is not possible to mutual exchange the 2 Select the correct mode (Semi-auto/Auto) pushbutton MODE on
controllers ! display
Related customer wirings: Mains imported power level channel 7000
• Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3. Daytime period channel 7010
• Wires for control and feedback of the Mains and Tie breaker. Cool down setting channel 6210
• PMS communication lines. Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080
breaker
For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter
list.
For more details on related customer wirings, see circuit Priority Select channel 8030
diagram. Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140
Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100
For more details on the PMS, see PMS User manual.
18 |
Related customer wirings: Related customer settings:

• Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3
• Wires for control and feedback of the Mains breaker display
• PMS communication lines Fixed Power setpoint channel 7050
For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter Cool down setting channel 6210
list. Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080
breaker
For more details on related customer wirings, see circuit
diagram.
For more details on the PMS, see PMS User manual. clock
Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
clock
5.2.4 Fixed power
Via the power management system (PMS) you have a fully PMS configuration channel 8020
intelligent system which will start up the necessary gen-set(s) Priority Select channel 8030
when a start signal is given, synchronise the gen-set(s) with the Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140
mains, connect the gen-set(s) with the bus and load according a Running hours priority selection channel 8110
user-defined ramp to meet the user-defined fixed load. Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100
When a stop signal is given, the gen-set(s) will be deloaded
according a user-defined ramp and they will be disconnected
from the bus. The gen-set(s) will go into cooldown and stop.
The start and stop signals can be local commands (in
combination with SEMI-AUTO mode), or remote commands • Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3
from the binary input or from the internal real time clock (in
combination with AUTO mode).
It is possible to do this kind of intelligent fixed loading with up
to 16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers (all equipped with this PMS • PMS communication lines
option).
For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter
The generators are running in a system with long simultaneous
list.
diagram.
when the gen-sets are in this fixed power application. With
AMF enabled, the gen-sets will always guard the mains and will For more details on the PMS, see PMS User manual.
act as AMF units when not active as a fixed power gen-sets
(extra Tie breaker is needed, page 17).
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature.
LOAD
G
Qc4002
PMS can
G
Qc4002
G
Mains
Qc4002 controller
| 19
User Manual
5.2.5 Load take over Related customer settings:

Via the power management system (PMS) you have a fully
intelligent system which will start the necessary gen-set(s) on a display
local command or remote command, synchronise the gen-set(s) Power ramp up / ramp down channel 2610-2620
to mains, connect to the bus, take over the load according a user Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070
defined ramp and disconnect mains. Cool down setting channel 6210
This intelligent system will start and stop gen-sets to meet the Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080
breaker
actual load.
After a local command or remote stop command, the gen-set(s) Start command through internal real time channel 6960
will synchronise to mains, connect the bus to mains, deload the clock
gen-set(s) according a user defined ramp and disconnect the Stop command through internal real time channel 6960
gen-set from the bus. Then the gen-set(s) will go into cooldown clock
and stop. Int. Communication ID channel 7531
It is possible to do this kind of intelligent load take over with up Priority Select channel 8030
to 16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers (all equipped with this PMS Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140
option). Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100
The local commands can be given when the module is in SEMI- Number of ID's channel 7530
AUTO mode. Load dependent start channel 8000
Load dependent stop channel 8010
The remote commands can be given when the module is in
AUTO mode. This can be through the binary input or through a Related customer wirings:
signal from the internal real time clock. • Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3
The generator is running in a system with short simultaneous • Remote Start switch towards the dedicated binary input
when the gen-sets are in this Load Take Over application. With • PMS communication lines
AMF enabled, the gen-sets will always guard the mains and will
act as AMF units when not active as Load Take Over gen-sets For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter
(extra Tie breaker is needed, page 17). list.
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature. For more details on related customer wirings, see circuit
diagram.
LOAD
G
5.2.6 Mains power export
Qc4002
Via the power management system (PMS) you have a fully
intelligent system which will start up the necessary gen-set(s)
PMS can
when a start signal is given, synchronise the gen-set(s) with the

G mains, connect the gen-set(s) with the bus and start to export
power to the mains. The amount of power exported will be kept at a
Qc4002
fixed level regardless of the load on the busbar (the factory).
When a stop signal is given, the gen-set(s) will be deloaded

G according a user-defined ramp and they will be disconnected
from the bus. The gen-set(s) will go into cooldown and stop.
Mains
Qc4002 controller
The start and stop signals can be local commands (in
combination with SEMI-AUTO mode), or remote commands
from the binary input or from the internal real time clock (in
combination with AUTO mode).
It is possible to do this kind of intelligent mains power export
with up to 16 Qc4002™ MkII controllers (all equipped with this
PMS option).
20 |
The generators are running in a system with long simultaneous Related customer wirings:
• Mains sensing lines L1 / L2 / L3
when the gen-sets are in this mains power export application.
With AMF enabled, the gen-sets will always guard the mains • Wires for control and feedback of the Mains breaker
and will act as AMF units when not active as a mains power
• PMS communication lines
export gen-sets (extra Tie breaker is needed, page 17).
It is possible to enable/disable the back synchronisation feature. For more details on related customer settings, see the Parameter
list.
LOAD
diagram.
G
Qc4002
5.2.7 Power management system

PMS can
G PMS (= Power Management System) is a system that will

automatically start & stop generators based on the actual load
Qc4002 dependency. This will be done through a PMS communication
between the different units connected.
PMS applications are always in combination with AUTO mode.
G
The Qc4002™ MkII controllers from the gensets need to be
Mains programmed as PMS in AUTO mode. When a Qc Mains
Qc4002 controller
controller is installed this needs to be programmed in the
application that is required (AMF, LTO, Fixed power) and
Related customer settings: AUTO mode.
Select the correct mode (Semi-auto/Auto) pushbutton MODE on By programming the parameters in AUTO mode, the
display generator can start up immediately.
Power ramp up / ramp down channel 2610-2620 It is recommended to place the generator in SEMI-
Mains Power Export setpoint channel 7000 AUTO mode while programming all the PMS
Gen-set mode (=application) channel 6070 parameters !
Cool down setting channel 6210 In an application with PMS it is important to program correctly
Back synchronisation setting of Mains channel 7080 the Start & Stop signals between the different generators
breaker
because of the following reasons:
Start command through internal real time channel 6960 • The maximum load step needs to be programmed in the
clock Qc4002™ MkIIcontrollers. This never may exceeds the
Stop command through internal real time channel 6960 power reserve of the running generators. Otherwise the
clock gensets will go in overload with a sudden max. load increase
Int. Communication ID channel 7531 before the next generator is started up and connected to the
PMS configuration channel 8020 busbar.
Stop Noncon. Gen-sets channel 8140 • To prevent the gensets to run in a start - stop loop.
Running hours priority selection channel 8110 NOTE: A start - stop loop will result in a deload - load loop = GB
Manual priority selection channel 8080-8100 open - GB close. This can damage the generator breaker.
Number of ID's channel 7530 A start - stop loop can easily be avoided by assuring that the
Load dependent start channel 8000 stop value is higher than the start value.
Load dedendent stop channel 8010 The start signal is the value of the maximum required load step
The stop signal is the value when the generator should be
stopped automatically.
| 21
User Manual
Example : For fixed installation

Installation with 3 gensets : G1 = 300 kW; G2 = 200 kW; G3 = Connections for PMS between 3 generators - straight
200 kW connections to Qc4002™ MkII :
• Start signal is set at 90kW (Maximum load step < 90kW)
G1 G2 G3
Start signal if :
Qc4002 MkII Qc4002 MkII Qc4002 MkII
Total Power needed > (Total available power of running gensets - B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
setpoint start signal)
120 Ω 120 Ω
Only G1 is running; at 210kW load (300kW - 90kW)
=> G2 will be started
G1 & G2 are running; at 410kW load (200kW + 300kW - 90kW) Connections for PMS between 2 generators and the Mains -
=> G3 will be started
straight connections to Qc4002™ MkII:
• Stop signal is set at 100kW and priority is set as (high) G1 >
G2 > G3 (low) G1 G2 Mains
Stop signal if : Qc4002 MkII Qc4002 MkII Qc4002 MkII

B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
Total Power needed < (Total available power of running gensets -
Power of generator with lowest priority - setpoint stop signal)
120 Ω 120 Ω
G1 & G2 & G3 are running; at 400kW (700kW - 200kW - 100kW)

=> G3 will be stopped
G1 & G2 are running; at 200kW (500kW - 200kW - 100kW)
=> G2 will be stopped For movable setup (Plug & Play)
The priority on starting & stopping the generators can be chosen Genset 1 Genset 2 Genset 3 Genset 4
on priority settings or on the amount of running hours. In

manual mode the start & stop sequence is determent by the X30 X30 X30 X30
chosen priority between the generators. The generator with the 1
lowest priority will start as the latest genset and will stop as first. 4 3
2
If running hours are chosen as priority the start & stop sequence
will be defined based on the actual running hours of the
different generators. The lowest running hours will get the
highest priority. 1 Splitter (1626 6901 00)
2 Cable (1626 6906 00)
When paralleling generators with PMS, it is no longer 3 End resistor (male) (1626 6926 00)
necessary to use the analogue load sharing lines. This 4 End resistor (female) (1626 6927 00)
will be done through the PMS communication lines.
Use a screened CAN communication cable with a
maximum total distance of 200 meters. Do not connect
the cable screen to the ground ! Use a 120 Ohm
resistor at both end controllers of the PMS as
described in the drawings below.
For more information on this option, see dedicated

PMS manual.
22 |
6 Standard functions & protections

The Qc4002™ MkII measuring system is true RMS 3-phase 6.3 Voltage/var/cos(phi) control
measurement of generator voltage, generator current, generator
frequency, mains voltage and mains frequency. Selectable (via binary inputs or (optional) serial interface)
functions:
The Qc4002™ MkII module is built up with different extension
cards that are mounted into one of the 9 different slots. Some of • Constant voltage (stand-alone)
these cards are mounted as standard, and some as an option. • Constant reactive power (parallel with mains)
The Qc4002™ MkII has the following control and protection • Constant power factor (parallel with mains)
functions as standard:
• Reactive load sharing (parallel with other generators, island
operation)
6.1 Engine Protection
The engine alarm extension card has the following configurable 6.4 Analogue controller outputs
inputs and outputs:
• +/-25mA for speed governor
• 1 4…20 mA input for Mains Power Transducer
• +/-25mA for voltage/var/cos control
• 2 configurable 4…20mA inputs
• 3 resistive sensor inputs for Engine Oil Pressure/Coolant 6.5 Load sharing between gen-sets'
Level, Coolant Temperature/Alternator Temperature, Fuel
Level
analogue lines
(Gen-set controller only)
• 1 tacho input
• 9 binary inputs for Access Lock, Running Feedback, Engine
Failure, Emergency Stop, 2nd Parameter Set, W/L, Remote 6.6 Engine communication
Start, disable analogue fuel input , Static Battery Charger. Software selectable for:
• IVECO EDC7C1
6.2 Alternator Protection
• Detroit Diesel DDEC communication
• Over current protection, definite time characteristic
• Deutz EMR communication
• Reverse power protection, definite time characteristic
• Volvo EDCIII/EDCIV/EMSII
• Over- and under voltage (generator and busbar)
• John Deere JDEC communication
• Over- and under frequency (generator and busbar)
• Scania EMS/EMSS6 communication
• Vector jump
• Caterpillar C4.4/C6.6
• Df/dt (ROCOF)
• Perkins
• Overload
• Cummins
• Current unbalance
• MTU ADEC/Series 2000 and 4000 (ECU7), J1939 Smart
• Voltage asymmetry connect/Series 1600 (ECU8)
• Reactive power (import (excitation loss)/export) • Generic J1939
| 23
User Manual
6.7 Configurable I/O extension card 7 Optional functions & protections

• 13 binary inputs and 4 relay outputs As standard 6 slots out of 9 slots contain a dedicated extension
NOTE: It is possible to configure binary inputs, analogue inputs and card. This means that 3 slots are still free for the optional
binary outputs. extension cards. The following optional extension cards are
available:
Binary Inputs
• The text can be edited to a more saying name by using the
7.1 CAN-open Serial communication
USW
• Input 10 (terminal 118) can be configured as 'Sprinkler'.
When 'Sprinkler' is selected, all alarms and fail classes are 7.2 Profibus Serial communication
overruled. The only alarms the gen-set will react on are NOTE: It is only possible to have one of the above options on one and
'Emergency Stop' on terminal 117 or a 'Tacho Failure'. Also the same unit.
the gen-set has 7 start attempts before 'Start Failure'.
Analogue Inputs 7.3 Analogue Transducer Output of

measured values (2x 4…20mA)
• The text can be edited to a more saying name
Binary Outputs 7.4 7 Binary Inputs

• The output can be configured as 'Alarm' relay
• The output can be configured as 'Limit' relay 7.5 4 Relay Outputs
6.8 Power Management System (PMS) 7.6 4 Analogue Inputs (4…20mA)

See separate PMS manual. NOTE: It is only possible to have one of the above options on one and
the same unit.
6.9 Modbus Serial communication

7.7 Ethernet - TCP/IP communication
See separate Modbus comunication manual.
Integrated Web Server with web pages for plant presentation.
8 Hardware
The Qc4002™ MkII housing is divided into board slot positions,
some of which are standard (non-changeable) and some
intended for options.
24 |
9 Wirings
9.1 Wiring for AMF, peak shaving, fixed power, mains power export and load take over
application
This drawing gives only a rough overview on the wiring. For details please see the correct circuit diagrams of the machine.
LOAD
GENERATOR
MAINS
L1 L1
L2 S1 S2 L2
L3 S1 S2 L3
N S1 S2 N
73
74
75
76
77
78
U NEUTRAL 84
U L3 83
U L2 81
U L1 79
14
15
17
18
8
9
11
12
U L3 89
U L2 87
U L1 85
L1
L2
L3
GENERATOR
CLOSE MB
CLOSE GB
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
OPEN MB
OPEN GB
MAINS
9.2 Wiring for Island and PMS mode application
This drawing gives only a rough overview on the wiring. For details please see the correct circuit diagrams of the machine.
LOAD
GENERATOR
L1 L1
L2 S1 S2 L2
L3 S1 S2 L3
N S1 S2 N
73
74
75
76
77
78
U NEUTRAL 84
U L3 83
U L2 81
U L1 79
14
15
17
18
U L3 89
U L2 87
U L1 85
L1
L2
L3
GENERATOR
CLOSE GB
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
OPEN GB
BUSBAR
| 25
User Manual
9.3 Load sharing lines

Even though screened cable is not needed, it is recommended if the cable run is longer than 5 m between units.
Genset 1 Genset 2 Genset 3 Genset 4

1 Splitter (1626 6901 00)
2 Cable (1626 6906 00)
X30 X30 X30 X30 3 End resistor (male) (1626 6926 00)
1 4 End resistor (female) (1626 6927 00)
4 3
2
Load sharing cables supplied with unit.

Load share lines of up to 300 metres are commonly used, but 300 metres is not the limit.
NOTE: When the option PMS is installed these load sharing cables are not needed. The loads are shared through the PMS communication cable.
9.4 Binary inputs

All binary inputs are 12/24 VDC.
The binary inputs use fixed signals. They do not use pulse signals.
9.5 Analogue inputs (external set-points)

The set-point inputs are passive, i.e. an external power source is needed. This can be an active output from e.g. a PLC, or a
potentiometer can be used.
9.6 Optocoupler outputs for external counter

The kWh counter (terminals 20-22) and kvarh counter (terminals 21-22) outputs are low-power outputs.
26 |
9.7 Display cable

A standard computer extension cable can be used (9-pole SUB-D male/female plugs) or a cable can be tailored:
• Max. cable length 6 m
Connect shield to plug metallic casing
9-p SUB D 9-p SUB D

male female
= =
> >
? ?
@ @
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
Display cables are available at following lengths:
1m: 1089 9561 38
3m: 1089 9561 40
6m: 1089 9561 39
9.8 USB cable for PC

A standard USB cable (USB/a to USB/b) is used for PC connection.
USB cable is available as 1089 9561 54.
| 27
User Manual
10 Password levels
There are 3 different levels:
• Customer password level
• Service password level
• Master password level
The user can scroll through the entire menu without any
password.
From the moment that the user wants to change a setpoint, a
password will be required. Changing different parameters
requires different password levels. Some parameters cannot be
changed by the end-customer because of safety reasons.
Once the password has been entered, the user can change all the
accessible setpoints. Only if no actions have been taken within
3 minutes, the password entry will be deactivated, and a new
password entry will be needed.
The user can change the Customer password in channel 9116
(only accessible via JUMP menu).
Beware: Write down the new password. If you forget it,
entering the menus will not be possible.
Service password and Master password can only be set through
the Qc4002™ MkII Utility Software.
28 |
11 Procedure for parameter setup
11.1 Parameter descriptions

In the next chapter each parameter description is structured according to the same principles. Under the parameter title heading, the
detailed parameter descriptions are illustrated and presented.
The set points are listed below in numerical order of channel number.
The default values depend on the type of gen-set. Some values are different for QAX, QAS and for QAC gen-sets. The parameter
list below shows random chosen values and might not be representative for any type of gen-set.
Below, a table indicating the parameter facts related to the individual parameter title is presented:
Menu Parameter Changeable Min. max.

number in title and settings set points
display menu indicated
indicated number in display
1000 G -P>
No. Setting Min. Max.
setting setting
1001 G -P> Set point -50.0% 0.0%
1002 G -P> Delay 0.1 s 100.0 s
1003 G -P> Relay output A Not used R3
(relay 3)
1004 G -P> Relay output B Not used R3
(relay 3)
1005 G -P> Enable OFF ON
1006 G -P> Fail class 1 5
NOTE: Small differences due to the character of the parameters may exist between the individual tables.
11.2 Setup
At this point of the process you will have located the specific parameter description that you were looking for. Now, follow the menu
structure presented earlier in this handbook in order to set up the individual parameters. (In this overall example we have chosen to
change the set point of the parameter 1000 G -P>).
Step 1: Enter the ‘setup’ menu via SETUP in the fourth display line in the entry window
Step 2: Enter the ‘protection’ menu via PROT in the fourth display line in the setup menu
Step 3: Use the UP and DOWN pushbuttons to locate the selected parameter
Step 4: Enter the ‘set point’ menu via SP in the fourth display line
Step 5: Enter password to change the set point
Step 6: Use the UP and DOWN pushbuttons to increase/decrease the set point setting
Step 7: Move the ’underscore’ to save and press SEL, the new set point setting has now been saved.
11.3 Parameter list

An overview of all parameters can be found in the separate Parameter list.
| 29
User Manual
12 Technical specifications
Accuracy: Analogue inputs:
Class 1.0 -10...+10V DC:
Fast overcurrent: Impedance: 100kW
3% of 350%*In Not galvanically separated
0(4)...20mA:
Analogue outputs:
Impedance: 50kW
Class 1 according to total range
Not galvanically separated
To IEC 688
RPM (MPU):
Operating temperature:
2...70V AC
CE: -25...70°C
10...10000Hz, 250...3000W
UL: -25...50°C
Multi inputs:
Climate:
0(4)...20mA:
Class HSE, to DIN 40040
0-20mA, +/- 1%
Meas. voltage: Not galvanically separated
100-690V AC +/-20% Binary:
Consumption: Max. resistance for ON detection: 100W
Max. 0.25VA/phase Not galvanically separated
Meas. current: PT100/1000:
-/1 or -/5A AC -40...250°C, +/-1%
Not galvanically separated
Consumption:
To IEC 751 and EN60751
Max. 0.3VA/phase
VDO:
Current overload: 0...1700W, +/-2%
4 x In continuously Not galvanically separated
20 x In, 10 sec. (max. 75A) V DC:
80 x In, 1 sec. (max. 300A) 0...40V DC, +/-1%
Meas. frequency: Not galvanically separated
30...70Hz Relay outputs:
Auxiliary supply (terminals 1 and 2): Electrical rating: 250V AC/30V DC, 5A
12/24 V DC (8...36V continuously, 6V 1 sec.) Thermal rating @ 50°C: 2A: Continuously
Max. 11W consumption Thermal rating @ 50°C: 4A: tON = 5 sec., tOFF = 15 sec. (unit
status output: 1A)
Auxiliary supply (terminals 98 and 99):
12/24 V DC (8...36V continuously, 6V 1 sec.) Open collector outputs:
Max. 5W consumption Supply: 8...36V DC, max. 10mA
Analogue outputs: 0(4)...20mA and +/-25mA
Binary inputs:
Galvanically separated
Optocoupler, bi-directional
Active output (internal supply)
ON: 8...36V DC
Load max. 500W
Impedance: 4.7kW
Update rate: Transducer output: 250 ms
OFF: <2V DC
Update rate: Regulator output: 1000 ms
Load sharing lines:
-5...0...+5V DC
Impedance: 23.5 kW
30 |
Galv. separation: Mounting:

Between AC voltage, AC current and other I/Os: DIN-rail mount or base mount with 6 screws
3250V AC, 50Hz, 1 min. Safety:
Between analogue outputs and other I/Os: To EN 61010-1, installation category (overvoltage category)
500V DC, 1 min. III, 600V, pollution degree 2
Between binary input groups and other I/Os: EMC/CE: To EN 61000-6-1/2/3/4
500V DC, 1 min. SS4631503 (PL4) and IEC 255-3
Response times: Material:
Reverse power: 150 ms All plastic materials are selfextinguishing according to UL94
Overcurrent: 200 ms (V1)
Fast overcurrent: 40 ms Plug connections:
Over-/undervoltage: 150 ms AC current: 4.0 mm² multi stranded
Over-/underfrequency: 300 ms Other: 1.5 mm² and 2.5 mm² multi stranded
df/dt (ROCOF): 75 ms Display:
Vector jump: 20 ms 9-pole Sub-D female
Overload: 200 ms
Service port:
Current unbalance: 200 ms
USB A-B
Voltage unbalance: 200 ms
React. power import/export: 200 ms Protection:
Overspeed: 400 ms Unit: IP20
Digital inputs: 250 ms Display: IP52 (IP54 with gasket)
Emergency stop: 200 ms To IEC 529 and EN 60529
Multi inputs: 800 ms Approvals: CE, UL 508
Wire failure: 600 ms
| 31
User Manual
13 Dimensions
115.0 (4.528)
165.0 (6.496)
144.0 (5.669)
230.0 (9.055) 120.0 (4.724)
OK
115.0 (4.528)
220.0 (9.055)
20.0 (0.787)
32 |
14 Related documents
2954 6320 00 Qc4002™ MkII Quick Start guide
2954 6370 00 Qc4002™ MkII M-logic manual
| 33
User Manual
Qc4002™ MkII – PMS

DESCRIPTION OF POWER MANAGEMENT OPTIONS
CONTENTS
1. DELIMITATION .......................................................................................................................................4
1.1 Scope of PMS option..........................................................................................................................4

2.1.3 Safety issues ............................................................................................................................................. 5
3. DESCRIPTION OF OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................6
3.1 Power management and Plant management options........................................................................... 6

3.2 Terminal description ...........................................................................................................................7
3.3 Breaker feedbacks ..............................................................................................................................8
3.3.1 Generator breaker ..................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Mains breaker (MB) feedback ................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Tie breaker (TB) ......................................................................................................................................... 8
3.4 Wiring diagram ...................................................................................................................................9
4. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Power management functions .......................................................................................................... 10

4.2 Terminal strip overview .................................................................................................................... 11
4.2.1 Qc4002™ MkII generator unit ................................................................................................................. 11
4.2.2 Qc4002™ MkII mains unit....................................................................................................................... 13
4.3 Applications ..................................................................................................................................... 17
4.3.1 Island operation plant .............................................................................................................................. 18
4.3.2 Parallel with mains plant.......................................................................................................................... 19
4.3.3 Dual mains plant ...................................................................................................................................... 20
4.3.4 ATS plant ................................................................................................................................................. 21
4.3.5 ATS plant, multiple start .......................................................................................................................... 21
4.3.6 ATS plant, mains unit .............................................................................................................................. 22
4.3.7 Multiple mains ......................................................................................................................................... 22
5. DISPLAY UNITS .................................................................................................................................... 23
6. POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP ............................................................................................................ 24
6.1 Initial power management setup....................................................................................................... 24

6.1.1 Display setup ........................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.2 PC software setup................................................................................................................................... 24
| 1
Qc4002™ MkII Control Panel - PMS
6.1.3 Application design ................................................................................................................................... 24

6.2 Remove unit from PM ...................................................................................................................... 28
6.2.1 Auxiliary supply OFF ................................................................................................................................ 28
6.2.2 Quick setup ............................................................................................................................................. 28
6.3 CANbus failure handling ................................................................................................................... 29
6.3.1 CAN failure mode .................................................................................................................................... 29
6.3.2 Redundant CANbus communication ....................................................................................................... 30
6.3.3 CANbus alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 30
6.3.4 CANbus fail class..................................................................................................................................... 31
6.4 Quick setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32
6.4.1 Limitations............................................................................................................................................... 33
6.5 9180 Quick setup ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.5.1 9190 Application broadcast ..................................................................................................................... 34
7. POWER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................... 36
7.1 Command unit.................................................................................................................................. 36

7.2 Load-dependent starting and stopping .............................................................................................. 36
7.2.1 Terminology ............................................................................................................................................ 36
7.2.2 Principle – available power method ......................................................................................................... 39
7.2.3 Principle – percentage method ................................................................................................................ 39
7.2.4 Adjusting load-dependent start ............................................................................................................... 40
7.2.5 Adjusting load-dependent stop ................................................................................................................ 41
7.2.6 Power window ........................................................................................................................................ 42
7.3 Load management............................................................................................................................ 42
7.4 Load sharing..................................................................................................................................... 44
7.5 Island ramp up with load steps ......................................................................................................... 45
7.6 Fixed power ramp up with load steps ............................................................................................... 45
7.7 Freeze power ramp .......................................................................................................................... 46
7.8 ATS applications ............................................................................................................................... 46
7.8.1 Qc4002™ MkII mains installed ............................................................................................................... 46
7.8.2 ATS island mode ..................................................................................................................................... 47
7.9 Fail class .......................................................................................................................................... 47
7.10 Local/remote operation..................................................................................................................... 47
7.10.1 Local selection ........................................................................................................................................ 47
7.10.2 Remote selection .................................................................................................................................... 48
7.10.3 Plant operation ........................................................................................................................................ 48
7.10.5 Principle................................................................................................................................................... 49
7.11 Multi starting gensets ...................................................................................................................... 49
7.11.1 Multi-start configuration .......................................................................................................................... 50
7.11.2 Numbers to start ..................................................................................................................................... 50
7.11.3 Minimum numbers running ..................................................................................................................... 51
7.12 Priority selection .............................................................................................................................. 51
7.12.1 Manual .................................................................................................................................................... 52
7.12.2 Running hours ......................................................................................................................................... 53
7.12.3 Fuel optimisation ..................................................................................................................................... 54
7.13 Conditional connection of heavy consumers ..................................................................................... 57
7.13.1 Power feedback from the heavy consumer ............................................................................................ 58
7.13.2 Engagement sequence for HCs with fixed load ...................................................................................... 59
2|
User Manual
7.14 Ground relay..................................................................................................................................... 59

7.15 Stop of non-connected gensets ........................................................................................................ 60
7.16 Secured mode .................................................................................................................................. 60
7.17 Base load ......................................................................................................................................... 60
7.18 Asymmetric load sharing (LS) ........................................................................................................... 61
7.19 Tie breaker configuration .................................................................................................................. 62
7.19.1 Tie breaker selection ............................................................................................................................... 62
7.19.2 Tie breaker control................................................................................................................................... 62
7.19.3 Tie breaker open point............................................................................................................................. 62
7.19.4 Power capacity ........................................................................................................................................ 63
7.20 Island application with TB ................................................................................................................. 63
7.21 Multiple mains ................................................................................................................................. 64
7.21.1 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 65
7.21.2 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 67
7.21.3 Plant mode handling ................................................................................................................................. 68
7.22 Dual mains ....................................................................................................................................... 70
7.22.1 Configuration............................................................................................................................................. 70
7.22.2 Plant mode handling ................................................................................................................................ 71
7.22.3 Internal CAN ID ....................................................................................................................................... 73
7.22.4 Qc4002™ MkII mains unit redundancy ..................................................................................................... 73
7.22.5 Tie breaker configuration ......................................................................................................................... 74
7.23 Configurable CAN IDs ....................................................................................................................... 75
7.24 CAN flags ......................................................................................................................................... 76
7.25 Common PF control.......................................................................................................................... 77
8. PARAMETER LISTS ............................................................................................................................... 78
| 3
1. Delimitation
1.1 Scope of PMS option
This description of options covers the following products:
4|
User Manual


be lost.
Disclaimer
2.1.3 Safety issues



| 5
3. Description of options
3.1 Power management and Plant management options
The options Power management and Plant management are software options and therefore not related to any
hardware apart from the standard-installed hardware.
The options are alike in the basic functionality. In the below table the differences are shown:
Product Qc4002™ MkII generator Qc4002™ MkII mains Qc4002™ MkII bus tie
Power management X X X
Plant management optional
This means that all functionalities available in the Plant management option will also be available in the Power
management option.
6|
User Manual
3.2 Terminal description

The CANbus interface for the internal communication between Qc4002™ MkII units in a Power management /
Plant management application is placed on the engine interface PCB in slot #7.
Term. Function Technical data Description
98 +12/24V DC DC power supply/common for
12/24V DC +/-30%
99 0V DC 118
100 MPU input

2-70V AC/10-10.000 Hz Magnetic pick-up
101 MPU GND
102 A
103 B Multi-input 1
104 C 0(4)-20 mA
105 A Digital
Pt100
106 B Multi-input 2
Pt1000
107 C VDO
108 A 0-40V DC
109 B Multi-input 3
110 C
111 Com. Common Common for terminals 112-117
112 Digital input 112 Optocoupler Configurable
115 Digital input 115 Optocoupler Ext. engine failure/configurable
116 Digital input 116 Optocoupler Start enable/configurable
117 Digital input 117 Optocoupler Running feedback/configurable
Emergency stop and common
118 Digital input 118 Optocoupler
for 119 and 120
119 NO Relay24V DC/5 A Run coil
120 NO Relay24V DC/5 A Start prepare
121 Com.
Relay250V AC/8 A Crank (starter)
122 NO
123 Com. Stop coil w/wire failure
Relay24V DC/5 A
124 NO detection
A1 CAN-H
A2 GND CANbus interface A
A3 CAN-L
B1 CAN-H
B2 GND CANbus interface B
B3 CAN-L
| 7
In menus 7540 and 7550, you can choose which CANbus interface you wish to use for internal communication. For
CANbus redundancy it is possible to use both communication interfaces.
NOTE: If the LED marked "CAN B" on the main unit is alive, then the CANbus port(s) is (are) switched on.
3.3 Breaker feedbacks
3.3.1 Generator breaker

The feedbacks of the generator breaker must always be connected (terminals 26 and 27).
3.3.2 Mains breaker (MB) feedback

MB present: The feedbacks of the mains breaker must always be connected (terminals 24 and 25).
MB not present: Selected in the power plant constructor (USW).
NOTE: When no MB is represented, the MB open and close relays together with the inputs for MB open and close feedbacks
(terminals 24 and 25) will be configurable.
3.3.3 Tie breaker (TB)

TB present: The feedbacks of the tie breaker must always be connected (terminals 26 and 27).
TB not present: Selected in the power plant constructor (USW)
NOTE: When no TB is represented, the TB open and close relays together with the inputs for TB open and close feedbacks
(terminals 26 and 27) will be configurable.
8|
User Manual
3.4 Wiring diagram

The following diagrams show examples with multiple Qc4002™ MkII units connected.
Fixed: Three generators connected – straight connections to Qc4002™ MkII
Fixed: Two generators and one Mains connected – straight connections to Qc4002™ MkII
Movable: Plug&Play connections
1. Splitter (1626 6901 00)

2. Cable (1626 6906 00)
3. End resistor (male) (1626 6926 00)
4. End resistor (female) (1626 6927 00)
NOTE: For distances above 300 meters we recommend to use a CAN to fiber converter.
NOTE: Do not connect the cable shield to the GND terminal of the Qc4002™ MkII units.
| 9
4. Functional description
4.1 Power management functions
In the following chapter the power management functions of the Qc4002™ MkII are listed.
Plant modes:
• Island mode (no mains unit)
• Automatic Mains Failure (needs mains unit)
• Fixed power/base load (needs mains unit)
• Peak shaving (needs mains unit)
• Load takeover (needs mains unit)
• Mains power export/import (needs mains unit)
Display:
• Mains unit display showing mains breaker and tie breaker
• Generator unit showing generator and generator breaker
Power management functions:

• Load-dependent start/stop
• Priority selection
• Manual
• Running hours
• Fuel optimisation
• Ground relay control
• ATS control
• Safety stop (fail class = trip and stop)
• Load management
• Multiple mains support
• Secured mode
• Quick setup/broadcast
• Base load
• Heavy consumer (HC)
• Asymmetric load sharing (LS)
• Common PF control
• CAN flags
10 |
User Manual
4.2 Terminal strip overview
4.2.1 Qc4002™ MkII generator unit
| 11
12 |
User Manual
4.2.2 Qc4002™ MkII mains unit
| 13
14 |
User Manual
4.2.3 Qc4002™ MkII bus tie unit
| 15
16 |
User Manual
4.3 Applications
The Power management option can be used for the applications listed in the table below. The Plant management
option can only be used for an island application with DG units.
Application Drawing below Comment
Island operation Island mode plant Multiple gensets
Automatic Mains Failure Parallel with 1-16 mains No back synchronising
Automatic Mains Failure Parallel with 1-16 mains With back synchronising
Automatic Mains Failure ATS plant, multiple start Multiple start system
Automatic Mains Failure ATS plant, mains unit Mains unit installed
Also called base load
Fixed power Parallel
1-16 mains units
Mains power export Parallel 1-16 mains units
Load takeover Parallel 1-16 mains units
Peak shaving Parallel 1-16 mains units
NOTE: Refer to the Qc4002™ MkII User Manual for description of the individual genset modes.
NOTE: Regarding AC and DC connections for the individual applications, please refer to the Installation Instructions.
| 17
4.3.1 Island operation plant

In an application where up to 16 gensets are installed, the Qc4002™ MkII will automatically operate in an island
mode with load-dependent starting and stopping.
If a mains unit is installed and connected (e.g. for preparing future requirements to the application), the island mode
operation is selected in the mains unit.
18 |
User Manual
4.3.2 Parallel with mains plant

An application where a mains breaker is installed together with up to 16 gensets is shown below.
The application also supports a redundant mains unit.
The application is shown with a tie breaker, but it is also possible to use the application without a tie breaker. The
tie breaker can only be placed as shown in the drawing below.
NOTE: This one-line diagram is also valid for AMF plants without back synchronising and load takeover plants without
possibility of synchronising the genset to the mains.
NOTE: If no CTs are installed on the Qc4002™ MkII mains, a 4-20 mA a power transducer can be used instead.
NOTE: The CT measurements are used when the transducer setup is 4/20 mA = 0/0 kW. The transducer is used when the
transducer setup is changed from 0/0 kW.
| 19
4.3.3 Dual mains plant

An application with two mains breakers installed together with up to 16 gensets is shown below.
The application also supports redundant Qc4002™ MkII mains units.
The application is shown with a tie breaker, but it is also possible to use the application without a tie breaker.
NOTE: The tie breaker can only be placed as shown in the drawing.
NOTE: In this application it will not be possible to synchronise the tie breaker.
20 |
User Manual
4.3.4 ATS plant

Applications that use an ATS for switching between mains supply and generator supply are supported as well. Two
application examples which use an ATS are shown below.
4.3.5 ATS plant, multiple start
| 21
4.3.6 ATS plant, mains unit
4.3.7 Multiple mains

An example of a multiple mains plant is shown below. This is just an example; please refer to the chapter on
multiple mains for further information about the possible combinations.
22 |
User Manual
5. Display units
• Dedicated Generator controller
• Dedicated Mains controller
• Dedicated Bus controller
| 23
6. Power management setup

6.1 Initial power management setup
The Qc4002™ MkII is set up using the display and the PC utility software.
6.1.1 Display setup

5. Enter the menu 9100 using the JUMP push-button. Select one of the following Qc4002™ MkII types:
• Mains unit
• DG unit
• BTB unit
NOTE: When this setting is adjusted, the device returns to factory settings! Therefore this must be changed prior to other
adjustments.
6. Enter the menu 9170 using the JUMP push-button. Select "CAN protocol 2" for a multi mains functionality.
7. Select "CAN protocol 1" for dual mains or single applications.
NOTE: An alarm appears if CAN protocol 2 is needed.
6.1.2 PC software setup

The communication ID must be adjusted in the utility software for each of the Qc4002™ MkII units. In the screen
shot below, the internal communication ID is set to 1.
The numbering of the communication IDs must always start from the lowest number, so an application always
includes a DG with ID 1. The principle also applies to the Qc4002™ MkII mains where the numbering starts from
ID 17 and to the BTB units where the numbering starts from ID 33.
6.1.3 Application design

The application is designed through the utility software.
1. Select "Application configuration".
24 |
User Manual
2. Select a new application and adjust the settings in this dialogue box.
| 25
Description Comments
Product type 1. Select Qc4002™ MkII. PPM is a power management system for marine use.
Use "single DG" if option power management is not selected (or if

2. Select between:
single functionality is needed for a power management Qc4002™
• Single DG MkII).
• Standard Use "standard" if a power management application is needed.
Plant type • Dual mains Use "dual mains" if the power management application with two mains
• Genset group plant units known from version 3.0-3.2 are to be used.
• Genset group Genset group plant and genset group are used for power plants
consisting of 17-256 gensets in the same application. Contact Atlas
Copco for further information.
The Qc4002™ MkII is able Press "Yes" in the pop-up window to set the application to active when
to include four applications. downloading it to the Qc4002™ MkII.
One of these can be active. It is possible to see which application is active when the USW is
connected to the Qc4002™ MkII.
3. Write a proper name of your
application.
Configuration
selection
4. Select "Wrap busbar" if the

Bus tie options BTBs are connected in a ring.
CAN line 5. CAN line A: Connect A1-A3. Atlas Copco uses CAN A for engine CAN communication.
options Atlas Copco uses CAN B for PMS communication.
6. CAN line B: Connect B1-B3.
Now the application can be designed using the section control panel.
26 |
User Manual
For each area it is defined whether a generator and a mains is present, and the number and type of breakers.
| 27
6.2 Remove unit from PM

If one or more units have to be taken out of the power management system, the following possibilities exist
depending on the situation.
6.2.1 Auxiliary supply OFF

The auxiliary supply must be removed from the Qc4002™ MkII. This means that a CANbus alarm occurs on the
other Qc4002™ MkII. These alarms appear in a 2 DG plant where ID 2 is powered down:
Alarms Functioning unit (ID 1)
System alarm Failed CAN tx line
System alarm CAN ID 2 MISSING
Menu 7533 Miss. all units
Menu 7535 Any DG missing
The alarms will be present at all times during the failure. A reconfiguration of the power plant is required to remove
the alarms.
6.2.2 Quick setup

Normally, the quick setup function is typically used for rental applications. It only requires a few settings to be
running, and these settings can be made via the display on the Qc4002™ MkII, so no utility software is needed.
NOTES: For more details, please refer to the chapter "Quick setup" in this document.
The mode changes according to the setting in CAN failure mode (menu 7532).
When the Qc4002™ MkII is reconnected, the ID will automatically be enabled again in the other units when the ID
has been recognised. If the Qc4002™ MkII that is reconnected is a new unit with the factory settings set in the
parameter file, a "Duplicate CAN ID" error message will appear.
When an ID is chosen for the new unit, and the ID chosen is already active in another device, the error message
"CAN ID not available" will appear, and the ID is reset to the start value.
6.2.3 Auxiliary supply ON
If a failure appears on the CANbus lines of a Qc4002™ MkII, the following alarms appear in the example where a
failure appears at ID2:
Alarms Defective unit Functioning unit
System alarm Failed CAN tx line Failed CAN tx line
System alarm CAN ID 1 MISSING CAN ID 2 MISSING
Menu 7533 Miss. all units Miss. all units
Menu 7535 Any DG missing Any DG missing
If the auxiliary supply of the unit where the CANbus is not functioning is connected, the Qc4002™ MkII can be
adjusted to another mode than AUTO. In that case the genset will not take part in the power management routines.
Semi-automatic start or automatic start is possible if the mode is changed to SEMI or AUTO mode. The only
exception to this is when BLOCK mode is selected on a genset Qc4002™ MkII. In this situation the GB can
be closed without allowance from the power management system.
28 |
User Manual
6.3 CANbus failure handling
6.3.1 CAN failure mode

In case of a CAN failure on the internal CAN controlling the power management, the system can be set up in
different ways. In menu 7530 it is decided how the power management system will react in case of a CAN failure.
1. If MANUAL is selected, all Qc4002™ MkII units will change mode to manual mode, and this way the
regulators will have no reaction, and it will not be possible to close any breakers.
Example 1:
• A break on the CAN line is made between ID1 and ID2 shown below.
• Both gensets are running and all breakers are closed.
When the break occurs, the regulators will stop on both gensets, but they will stay online. As the gensets have no
valid information about the other unit, over time a blackout can occur as no load sharing is active between the units.
If for example six gensets are available in an island application, and the CAN failure happens between ID3 and
ID4, the load sharing will still be disabled between all units, as it is the manual mode which is activated.
If the CAN error happens when no gensets are running, it will block the whole system and it will not be possible to
start any gensets, before the CAN error has been fixed.
| 29
2. If SEMI-AUTO is selected, all Qc4002™ MkII units will change mode to semi-auto mode, and this way the
regulators will continue to regulate the load on the gensets which are still "visible" on the internal CAN
communication. This means that in the example with six gensets, the load sharing will continue between the
units which are still connected (ID1-ID3 and ID4-ID6).
If the CAN error happens when no gensets are running, it will not block the whole system, and it will be possible to
start all the gensets in SEMI-AUTO mode, even though the CAN error has not been fixed.
A message will be shown in the status line "BLACKOUT ENABLE" on the display.
If the CANbus error is present and no generator breakers are closed, it will be possible to close two breakers
on the same busbar, which may result in fatal damage to the whole system.
It is recommended to use the analogue load sharing and an interlock system to prevent this situation.
3. If No mode change is selected, all Qc4002™ MkII units will stay in the mode they were in before the failure
appeared.
This setting makes it possible to keep the system in Auto mode in case of a CAN failure, however, the faulty unit
will not be a part of the power management, since it cannot send or receive status and commands on the CANbus.
If this selection is used, it is recommended to use the CANbus fail class settings to disconnect the faulty units (refer
to the "CANbus fail class" in this chapter).
If the CANbus error is present and no generator breakers are closed, it will be possible to close two breakers
on the same busbar, which may result in fatal damage to the whole system.
It is recommended to use the analogue load sharing and an interlock system to prevent this situation.
6.3.2 Redundant CANbus communication

It is possible to use two CANbus communication lines; CAN I/F 1 (A1/A2/A3) and CAN I/F 2 (B1/B2/B3). This
way, the communication will be redundant, and if one of the CANbus communication lines are damaged, the
application will still continue in Auto mode with full functionality. This is only possible on engines without
CANbus communication.
6.3.3 CANbus alarms

The following alarms can be displayed on a Qc4002™ MkII unit in case of CANbus communication failures:
• CAN A ID X MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to one or more CAN IDs on CANbus I/F A.
• CAN A MAINS X MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to the Qc4002™ MkII mains unit on
CANbus I/F A.
• CAN A BTB X MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to the Qc4002™ MkII BTB unit on
CANbus I/F A.
• CAN B ID X MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to one or more CAN IDs on CANbus I/F B.
30 |
User Manual
• CAN B MAINS X MISSING

The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to the Qc4002™ MkII mains unit on
CANbus I/F B.
• CAN B BTB X MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to the Qc4002™ MkII BTB unit on CANbus I/F B.
• MISSING ALL UNITS
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost the CANbus communication to all the other units.
The fail class set in menu 7533 will be executed.
• FATAL CAN ERROR
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to more than one CAN ID on the CANbus line.
• ANY DG MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to one of the generator CAN IDs on the
CANbus line.
• ANY MAINS MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to one of the mains CAN IDs on the CANbus line.
• ANY BTB MISSING
The Qc4002™ MkII unit has lost CANbus communication to one of the BTB CAN IDs on the
CANbus line(s).
6.3.4 CANbus fail class

In menu 7530 it is possible to set a fail class of the following CANbus alarms:
• Missing all units
• Fatal CAN error
• Any DG missing
• Any mains missing
By using these settings, it is possible to disconnect the faulty units and in this way keep the system running in Auto
mode. (Depends on the setting 7532).
NOTE: For a general description of "Fail class" please refer to the Qc4002™ MkII User Manual.
| 31
6.4 Quick setup

This function is made to provide an easy user interface for applications where it is vital for the end-user to be able
to change the application quickly and easily.
It is often applications for the rental market that need this flexibility, and therefore there are some limitations as to
which applications that can be handled through the quick setup menu.
The following applications can be handled through the quick setup menu.
Island applications
Simple applications with connection to one mains
32 |
User Manual
6.4.1 Limitations
In most cases, the rental applications are very simple applications, and therefore there are some limitations that
have to be considered when using the quick setup menu:
• It will not be possible to have any Qc4002™ MkII bus tie units in the application.
• It will not be possible to set up a "dual mains" application through the quick setup menu.
This function is made to facilitate change of a plant configuration without Qc4002™ MkII BTB units. Entering the
quick setup menu 9180 via the display makes it possible to add or remove a genset without the use of utility
software. It is only possible to do the same basic setup as through the "application configuration" in the utility
software.
The functions marked with clear text in the screen shots below can be accessed through the quick setup menu.
| 33
6.5 9180 Quick setup
9181 Mode
OFF: When the mode menu is set to "OFF", the existing application that is about to have this genset included will not
look for this new genset. This will give the operator time to connect all wiring and to do the basic setup of the
genset.
Setup Plant: When the mode menu is set to "Setup Plant", the new Qc4002™ MkII will receive the application configuration
from the other units in the plant. The new Qc4002™ MkII will then notify the rest of the application that a new ID
is available on the line. If the ID of the new Qc4002™ MkII already exists, the new Qc4002™ MkII will – based
on the ID numbers in the application configuration – have the highest ID + 1 assigned. This new ID will then be
included in the application configuration in all the other Qc4002™ MkII. During this process, the existing
application will be able to continue running and will not be affected by the upgrade of the system.
The new Qc4002™ MkII will automatically go to block mode to ensure that it is in a safe mode. When the setup is
done, the end-user must decide in which running mode the added genset is to run.
NOTE: If there are already 16 gensets on the CAN line and a new Qc4002™ MkII tries to connect to the plant, an alarm text,
"No IDs available", will appear.
Setup Stand- When the mode menu is set to "Setup Stand-alone", the Qc4002™ MkII will change the application configuration,
alone: so it will no longer be a part of the application. When the ID is removed from the application, the new application
will be broadcasted to the other Qc4002™ MkII. The IDs of the existing gensets in the application will maintain
their ID, as a rearrangement could lead to unnecessary starting and stopping of the gensets.
If the genset that is to be removed is running, it will not be possible/allowed to continue the process until the
genset has stopped. If it is attempted to disconnect, an info text, "Quick setup error", will appear.
NOTES: If "Setup Stand-alone" is activated when the genset is running, an info text, "Quick setup error", will appear.
If a Qc4002™ MkII BTB is detected in the application, an indicating alarm, "Appl. not possible", will appear.
Change of setup from standard to single DG unit: When disconnecting a standard Qc4002™ MkII unit in a system, it
is important to change the menu 9181, plant setup. After disconnecting, the Qc4002™ MkII unit will become a single
DG.
6.5.1 9190 Application broadcast

This function makes it possible to broadcast an application over the CAN line from one Qc4002™ MkII to all units
present in the application. It takes one operation to activate the broadcast function.
It can be done in two ways:
• By sending the application.
• By sending the application and activating it.
Menu 9191 Enable

OFF: When it is set to OFF, no broadcast will be made.
Broadcast: Broadcast of the selected application in menu 9192 will be sent to the units in the application.
Broadcast + Activate Broadcast is activated and the application in menu 9192 will be broadcasted and activated in all units.
34 |
User Manual
Menu 9192 Application

Applications 1-4 can be drawn in the utility software.
The following pop-up windows in the utility software will guide you through the broadcast.
| 35
7. Power management functions

7.1 Command unit
The power management system is a multi-master system. In a multi-master system, the available generator units
automatically perform the power management control. This means that the system never depends on only one
master unit.
If for instance one unit ID is disabled, and this was the command unit, then the next available unit will take over the
command functions.
The above also applies to the Qc4002™ MkII mains units – in that case the command unit is called Mains
Command Unit (MCU).
The command unit cannot be selected by the operator. It is automatically selected when a power management
setting is accessed.
7.2 Load-dependent starting and stopping

The purpose of this function is to ensure that sufficient power is always available on the busbar. This means that the
gensets will automatically be started and stopped in order to let only the sufficient number of gensets run. This
optimises the fuel economy and the maintenance intervals.
The load-dependent start/stop function is active when the plant is in AUTO mode. The starting and stopping of the
gensets is automatically carried out according to the adjusted setpoints and priority selection.
The load-dependent start/stop function can be selected as:
• Rated power setpoint (P) [kW]
• Apparent power setpoint (S) [kVA]
• Actual or load percentage value [%]
The load-dependent starting and stopping can be selected to base on either produced power calculation (%) or
available power calculation (P or S).
The easiest way is to use produced power calculation; however, this method is not suited for systems with three or
more generators as regards fuel savings and saving running hours.
7.2.1 Terminology
The table shows the abbreviations used.
Short Description Comment
PAVAILABLE Available power PTOTAL - PPRODUCED
PTOTAL Total power ΣPNOMINAL of running sets with GBs closed
PPRODUCED Produced power
PNOMINAL Nominal power
PNOMINAL-STOP Nominal power of the genset to stop Priority-dependent
36 |
User Manual
Deactivate load-dependent stop

The load-dependent stop can be deactivated through M-logic, should this be preferred. This is necessary e.g. to
allow operators to start the factory load after a blackout before the normal load-dependent operation can be started.
In the example below, the function is activated with terminal 43. Now the operator can switch the load-dependent
stop ON or OFF with a switch connected to terminal 44.
Produced power method

This method is in effect if % power is selected in menu 8880 as basis for the start/stop calculation.
If the load % of a generator exceeds the "Start next" setpoint, the start sequence of the lowest priority generator in
stand-by will be initiated.
If the load % of a generator drops below the "Stop next" setpoint, the stop sequence of the running generator with
the highest priority number will be initiated.
If the load of the plant decreases so much that the generator with the highest priority number can be stopped and an
available power of at least the stop setpoint in % is available, then the stop sequence of this generator will be
initiated.
| 37
Available power method

This method is in effect if P [kW] or S [kVA] is selected as basis for the start/stop calculation.
Independent of the selection (P [kW] or S [kVA]), the functionality is basically identical; therefore the example of
the functionality below will be given for the load-dependent start function with selected rated power (P) value.
The apparent power setpoint is typically selected if the connected load has an inductive character and the power
factor is below 0.7.
Description
This drawing illustrates the terms used.
Nominal power
The nominal power is the rated power of the genset that can be read on the type plate of the generator.
Total power
The total power is the summation of the rated nominal power of each individual genset. In the example above the
plant consists of three DGs:
DG 1 = 1500 kW
DG 2 = 1000 kW
DG 3 = 1000 kW
That is a total of: 3500 kW
Produced power
The produced power is defined as the existing load on the busbar. In the example above the produced power is
indicated as the hatched area, and the total of the three gensets = 2450 kW.
38 |
User Manual
Available power
The available power is the difference between the maximum possible power produced by the gensets and the actual
produced power.
In the example above the plant consists of three gensets, in total 3500 kW. The load consumes 2450 kW in total.
Since the total load PTOTAL is 3500 kW, and the produced load PPRODUCED is 2450 kW, then the available power
PAVAILABLE is 1050 kW, meaning that the gensets can handle this load if it should be added to the busbar.
7.2.2 Principle – available power method

One genset is running and is supplying the load. The load increases which means that the available power/apparent
power decreases. At a certain time the load has increased so much that only a little amount of power/apparent
power is available, and the next priority genset will be started in order to increase the amount of available
power/apparent power.
When the load drops, the available power/apparent power will increase. When the available power/apparent power
has increased above the stop level plus the nominal power of the last priority genset, then the last priority genset
will be stopped. Please note that the nominal power of the genset to be stopped is added to the adjusted stop level.
The reason is that otherwise the available power/apparent power would immediately drop below the start level
again.
Example:
If the adjusted stop level is 200 kW (PSTOP = 200 kW), and the genset with the last priority is 1000 kW, it
is necessary that the available power reaches 1200 kW, because the available power will be reduced with
1000 kW immediately after the last priority genset is stopped.
7.2.3 Principle – percentage method

One genset is running and is supplying the load. The load increases which means that the % load increases. At a
certain time the load has increased so much that the load % start will start up the next priority genset in order to
take some of the load.
When the load drops, the produced power will decrease. When the produced power has decreased below the stop
level plus the nominal power of the last priority genset, then the last priority genset will be stopped. Please note that
the nominal power of the genset to be stopped is added to the adjusted stop level. The reason is that otherwise the
produced power would immediately drop below the start level again.
Example:
If the adjusted stop level is 10% (100 kW produced power), and the genset with the last priority is
1000 kW, the last priority generator will produce 20% (200 W) after stop. It is necessary that the start
level is above this value, otherwise an ongoing starting and stopping will take place.
| 39
7.2.4 Adjusting load-dependent start

In the example below the available power is 200 kW. When the load increases, the available power drops below the
start limit. The stand-by genset will start when the start timer runs out, and after the synchronising the available
power increases (in this example to 500 kW).
40 |
User Manual
7.2.5 Adjusting load-dependent stop

In the example below the available power is 500 kW. When the load decreases, the available power increases to
750 kW. The Qc4002™ MkII now calculates what happens if the last priority genset is stopped. In the example
below the last priority genset is 400 kW which means that it can be stopped, because the available power will still
be above the stop level.
Now the difference between the stop level and the available power is 50 kW. This means that only if the genset,
which now has the last priority, is 50 kW, it can be stopped!
NOTE: If the order of priority is changed, the following must be observed:

If the priority does not seem to change as expected, it is because the load-dependent stop function is not able to stop
the lowest priority after having started the new first priority. That would cause two DGs to be running at low load
instead of one DG.
| 41
7.2.6 Power window

The difference between the programmed load-dependent start and stop limits forms the power hysteresis between
the start and stop. This is shown in the diagram below:
7.3 Load management

The function is used to activate a relay when a specific amount of power is available. The purpose of this function
is to be able to connect load groups when the gensets of the emergency power plant are running.
In each of the gensets, five levels can be adjusted (menus 8220-8260):
• Available power 1
These setpoints can activate a relay when the specific amount of available power is reached. The relay output can
be used for connecting load groups when sufficient power is available. The relays will activate when the available
power is higher than the setpoint, but be aware that when the load groups are being connected, the available power
will decrease and the relay(s) deactivate again if the available power is below the setpoint. So it is necessary to
make an external holding circuit.
NOTE: The number of available relays is option-dependent.
The function is not depending on the running modes. The relays will activate in all modes including block. To
avoid activation, e.g. when the genset is stopped, the inhibit function should be used.
42 |
User Manual
It is possible to adjust different levels of available power in all gensets. This gives the possibility to use several load
groups if this is necessary.
Example:
In the example below, generator #1 is started followed by generator #2. The simplified diagram shows the
two gensets and two load groups that are being connected by the available power relays R1 and R2 on
Qc4002™ MkII.
Qc4002™ MkII Qc4002™ MkII
| 43
7.3.1 Functionality description (refer to the diagram below)

The generator #1 is started, and the timer t1 starts running when the GB1 closes. When the t1 is expired, the
selected relay activates (R1), and in the example a 200 kW load group is connected. Now the available power falls
to 300 kW. After some time the generator #2 is started and its generator breaker is synchronised. When the GB2
closes, the timer t2 runs. When the timer t2 expires, the selected relay activates (R2), and the second load group of
200 kW is connected. Now the available power falls to 600 kW.
To connect the load groups, individual relays can be selected on each Qc4002™ MkII or on one of the Qc4002™
MkII units only.
7.4 Load sharing

When the power management communication is running, the load sharing between the gensets is done by using the
CANbus communication between the Qc4002™ MkII units.
If both CANbus ports are being used (A1-A3 and B1-B3), the communication automatically switches to the other
port if e.g. A1-A3 is disconnected or faulty. (Please refer to the description of redundant CANbus).
If both CANbus lines are disconnected or faulty, the Qc4002™ MkII do not automatically switch over to analogue
load sharing. This has to be set up in M-logic: Use the command "Force analogue loadshare". Now the load sharing
continues based on the signals from terminals 37/38/39. This means that the power management will be lost, but the
gensets already running will stay stable.
NOTE: The ALS option has to be active to have the backup of the analogue load share line.
44 |
User Manual
7.5 Island ramp up with load steps
7.6 Fixed power ramp up with load steps
When menu 2614 is enabled, the power setpoint continues to rise in ramp up steps, determined by menu 2615,
towards the load sharing setpoint. The delay time between each ramp up step will be determined by menu 2613.
The ramp up will continue until the load sharing setpoint is reached and then switch the regulator to standard load
sharing mode.
| 45
If the delay point is set to 20% and the number of load steps is set to 3, the genset will ramp to 20%, wait the
configured delay time, ramp to 40%, wait, ramp to 60%, wait and then ramp to the system setpoint. If the setpoint is
at 50%, the ramp will stop at 50%.
7.7 Freeze power ramp

A way to define the ramp up steps is to use the freeze power ramp command in M-logic.
Freeze power ramp active:
• The power ramp will stop at any point of the ramp, and this setpoint will be kept as long as the function is
active.
• If the function is activated while ramping from one delay point to the other, the ramp will be fixed until the
function is deactivated again.
• If the function is activated while the delay timer is timing out, the timer will be stopped and will not continue
until the function is deactivated again.
7.8 ATS applications

Two possibilities are available; the mains unit can either be installed or not.
7.8.1 Qc4002™ MkII mains installed

NOTE: See single line diagram for "Parallel with mains plant".
In an AMF application the Qc4002™ MkII mains will normally operate the mains breaker and thereby make sure
that the supply is coming from the mains if this is healthy.
This function allows the Qc4002™ MkII to be used in an application where an automatic transfer switch is
installed. This is known as an ATS.
In the applications shown as one-line diagrams in the chapter Functional description it can be seen that the ATS
will take care of the switching between the generator supply and the mains supply.
NOTE: If ATS is selected, the Qc4002™ MkII has no control over the ATS ("mains breaker").
Description
Normally the Qc4002™ MkII detects a mains failure based on the voltage and frequency measurement on the
mains. However, when ATS is selected in menu 7085 it is necessary to use a digital input together with the position
feedbacks from the ATS. Thus, the mains failure is not detected by the Qc4002™ MkII measurements but by the
following two requirements:
• Alternative start input ON
• ATS (MB) feedback OFF
To make the Qc4002™ MkII detect a mains failure, the alternative start input has to be ON and the MB OFF
feedback has to be active.
NOTE: The input used as "Alternative start" function is configured in the PC utility software (USW).
The mains unit will not try to operate the ATS (mains breaker) at all. But it is still necessary that position feedbacks
are wired up.
It is possible to have a tie breaker installed. This is useful if more gensets need to be started before supplying the
load, because the tie breaker will not close until the required number of gensets is available.
46 |
User Manual
7.8.2 ATS island mode

NOTE: See single line diagram for "Island operating plant".
If this application is needed, the gensets can be started by activating the "auto start/stop" input. The gensets will be
started and stopped according to the power demand. That is, they will operate in load-dependent start/stop mode.
NOTES: Be aware that since no tie breaker is installed, it is important that the first genset to close on the busbar can carry the
load. If the load is too high, the genset will be overloaded.
This application can be combined with the multi start function.
7.9 Fail class

The fail classes described in the Qc4002™ MkII User Manual are still valid when the power management option is
selected. In addition to these fail classes the safety stop can be used in the Qc4002™ MkII units with power
management.
This means that when a trip + stop alarm occurs, the faulty genset will stay on the busbar until the next priority
genset is started and synchronised to the bus. When the incoming genset has taken the load, the faulty genset will
ramp down the power, followed by trip of the breaker, cooling down of the engine and finally stop.
If the faulty genset has the last priority, or no standby gensets are available, then it will stay on the busbar and will
not trip.
NOTE: If no genset can start in a safety stop situation, then the faulty genset will not be stopped. Therefore it is important that
the safety stop is backed up, e.g. by a trip and stop alarm or a shutdown alarm.
7.10 Local/remote operation

The plant can be adjusted to local or remote operation (menu 8021). This selection is done in the command unit, i.e.
one of the generator units.
NOTE: The setting defines how the plant is started while it is in AUTO mode.
The settings can be changed in M-logic and via display or PC utility software.
Utility SW
Display M-logic
(Parameter setup)
Local X X X
Remote start X X X
The purpose of the selection is to decide whether the plant can be started from the display (local operator) or from
remote (e.g. PLC). Remote means that the control can be carried out by activating the digital input or through
Modbus/Profibus communication.
7.10.1 Local selection

All operation is carried out on the display. In island operation any generator unit display can be used, and in load
takeover, mains power export and fixed power the mains unit display must be used. The plant mode must be
AUTO.
| 47
7.10.2 Remote selection

The plant is started using the digital input "auto start/stop" when "remote" is selected.
Island mode
In island mode the "auto start/stop" input on any of the generator Qc4002™ MkII can be used for starting the plant.
However, Atlas Copco recommends to wire up the "auto start/stop" input to all of the Qc4002™ MkII to be sure
that the automatic operation is able to continue even though one of the DGs is taken out for service (power supply
disconnected to the Qc4002™ MkII)
In island mode any running mode (MAN, AUTO, SEMI, BLOCK) can be selected on the generator units, and the
remote start signal is still working for the remaining Qc4002™ MkII which is still in AUTO mode.
Parallel to mains mode

In load takeover, mains power export and fixed power mode the "auto start/stop" input on the mains unit must be
used for starting the plant.
7.10.3 Plant operation

The table shows how the plant is started:
Plant mode Selection Local Remote
Island mode Display on generator units Auto start/stop on gen. units
Fixed power mode Display on mains unit Auto start/stop on mains unit
Mains power export Display on mains unit Auto start/stop on mains unit
Load takeover Display on mains unit Auto start/stop on mains unit
NOTE: In peak shaving and AMF the automatic operation starts automatically depending on the imported power (peak
shaving) or mains failures (AMF).
48 |
User Manual
7.10.5 Principle
7.11 Multi starting gensets

The multi-start function can be used to determine the number of gensets to start. This means that when the start
sequence is initiated through push-button, digital input or automatic start, then the adjusted numbers of gensets will
start.
This function is typically used e.g. together with applications where a certain number of gensets is required to
supply the load.
Example:
In an AMF application with a tie breaker, the tie breaker must not close before the maximum power is
available (power capacity setpoint).
NOTE: The multi-start function is adjusted in menu 8922-8926.
| 49
7.11.1 Multi-start configuration

The multi-start function can be adjusted to operate with two different settings. These settings consist of setpoints for
how many gensets to start and the minimum number of running gensets.
It is possible to switch between the settings using M-Logic or menu 8924.
Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2
Multi-start (numbers to start) 8922 8925
Min no. running 8923 8926
Default setting
Start condition Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Default setting of DGs to start
Emergency operation Mains failure - X Start all DGs
Normal operation No mains failure X - Auto calculate
The default setting of the selection between setpoint 1 and setpoint 2 is made so the setpoint 1 is adjusted to "Auto
calculation" and is used in all modes except for AMF. Setpoint 2 will automatically be selected in case a mains
failure occurs (this is adjusted in M-logic). Setpoint 2 is adjusted to 16 gensets which means that all available
gensets will start when the mains failure occurs.
NOTE: The default setting can be changed, if convenient.
7.11.2 Numbers to start

The numbers to start (menu 8922/8925) can be selected depending on the number of DGs available. The load-
depending start and stop function will be active as soon as the generator breakers are closed or, if a tie breaker is
installed, as soon as the tie breaker is closed. It is possible to adjust the number of gensets, or an auto calculation
can be selected.
NOTE: If it is needed to delay the load-dependent start and stop function, it can be done through the M-logic function.
50 |
User Manual
Auto calculation
When auto calculation is selected, the sufficient number of gensets will be started as soon as the start command is
given. This is not depending on the plant mode.
Example:
In a four DG plant each generator is rated with 1000 kW. The setpoint for load-dependent start (menu
8001) is adjusted to 100 kW.
If a start command is given in fixed power mode and the setpoint is 2000 kW, then three gensets will be
started immediately and the fourth genset will remain stopped. Three gensets will be started because two
gensets are requested to supply the load (2*1000 = 2000 kW) and the load-dependent start function
requests the third genset.
7.11.3 Minimum numbers running

The multi starting function can be combined with the setting of a minimum number of running gensets (menu
8923/8926). This means that the load-dependent stop function is disregarded when only the specific number of
gensets is running. This is also the situation even though the load would justify a load-dependent stop.
NOTE: "Numbers to start" (menu 8922/8925) and "Minimum numbers running" (menu 8923/8926) are available for all
modes.
7.12 Priority selection

It is possible to use one of five types of priority selection.
NOTE: The parameter for each of the five priority selections will only be enabled (visible) when one of the five options is
selected via the USW channel 8031, or by using the display parameter 8030 Priority select.
| 51
7.12.1 Manual
The manual selection gives a possibility to adjust the order of priority between the adjusted numbers of available
DGs. This means that each genset always has a specific priority setting.
The adjustment is made in the menus 8080 (P1-P5), 8090 (P6-P11) and 8100 (P12-P16). In this example the order
of priority is DG3, DG1, DG2, DG4.
Priority/Genset DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4
Menu 8081 P1 X
Menu 8082 P2 X
Menu 8083 P3 X
Menu 8084 P4 X
NOTE: These settings are only adjusted in the generator units. After the adjustment the order of priority must be transmitted
manually to the other gensets using the transmit function in menu 8086.
Manual abs. (absolute)

Scenario:
The four gensets in the drawing below are set up to have the same priority and ID (genset 1 has priority 1, etc.).
When sections are separated with a BTB and the gensets are in AUTO, the “Manual abs” setup will at all times
keep the priority adjusted for each controller. If the BTB is open the four gensets can start and stop as two
independent applications. E.g. if a genset is running on each side of the BTB, genset 1 and genset 3 will be running
as the first priority gensets. If the BTB is synchronised and closed the genset 2 will start and take over the load from
genset 3. When this is done, genset 3 is stopped and the application is now considered as one common application
with four gensets.
Manual rel. (relative)

Scenario:
The four gensets in the drawing below are set up to have the same priority and ID (genset 1 has priority 1, etc.).
“Manual relative” makes sense if there is a mains connection on each side of the BTB as shown in the picture
below.
When sections are separated with a BTB and the gensets are in AUTO, the “Manual rel” setup will auto-change the
priority depending on the position of the BTB and depending on which mains ID has the “ID to run” function
activated.
52 |
User Manual
If the BTB is open the four gensets can start and stop as two independent applications. E.g. if the gensets 3 and 4
are running on the right side of the BTB and the BTB is synchronised and closed, the gensets 1 and 2 will not start
and take over the load from gensets 3 and 4 as they are seen as new gensets being available in an already running
application, and gensets 1 and 2 will now become priority 3 and 4.
7.12.2 Running hours

The purpose of the priority selection based on running hours is to let all the gensets have the same or nearly the
same amount of running hours.
Every time the adjusted period in menu 8111 is reached, a new order of priority is determined, and the gensets with
first priorities will be started (if not already running), and the gensets with the last priorities will stop.
There are two possibilities for operating the priority routine based on the running hours: Absolute or relative. The
selection between the absolute and relative routine defines whether the offset adjustment of the running hours is
taken into consideration in the priority calculation. The offset adjustment is used e.g. when the Qc4002™ MkII is
installed on an old genset which already has many running hours, or if a Qc4002™ MkII is replaced.
Running hours abs. (absolute)

All gensets participate in the priority routine based on the principle shown in the table below. This means that the
gensets with the lowest number of running hours will be running. This can be a disadvantage for instance if the
application consists of old gensets together with new gensets. In that situation the new gensets will be the first
priorities, until they have reached the same number of running hours as the old gensets. To avoid this, the priority
routine called relative running hours can be used instead.
The actual number of running hours is adjusted in each genset Qc4002™ MkII in menus 6101 and 6102, typically
at the commissioning. The purpose of the menu is to have the correct number of running hours displayed.
| 53
Running hours rel. (relative)

When "relative" is selected, all gensets will participate in the priority routine independently of the number of
running hours adjusted in menus 6101 and 6102. This means that all gensets in AUTO mode participate in the
priority routine. The relative selection gives a possibility to reset the priority routine. When the reset is activated in
menu 8113, the relative running hour counters in the Qc4002™ MkII units will be reset to 0 hours, and at the next
priority selection the calculation is based on the reset values.
Principle for priority routine
The principle for the priority routine is described in the following table where the running hours (menu 8111) are
adjusted to 24 hours. In this example only one genset is required by the load.
DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4

Comment
(int. ID3) (int. ID2) (int. ID4) (int. ID1)
DG2 will start due to the lowest internal ID
Monday 0 1051 h 1031 h 1031 h 1079 h
number
Tuesday 24 1051 h 1055 h 1031 h 1079 h DG3 will be started, and DG2 will be stopped
Wednesday 48 1051 h 1055 h 1055 h 1079 h DG1 will be started, and DG3 will be stopped
DG2 will be started due to the lowest internal ID
Thursday 72 1075 h 1055 h 1055 h 1079 h
number, and DG1 will be stopped
Friday 96 1075 h 1079 h 1055 h 1079 h DG3 will be started, and DG 2 will be stopped
Saturday 120 1075 h 1079 h 1079 h 1079 h DG1 will be started, and DG3 will be stopped
DG4 will be started due to the lowest internal ID
Sunday 144 1099 h 1079 h 1079 h 1079 h
number… and so on
NOTE: The time adjusted in menu 8111 is the time between each priority calculation.
7.12.3 Fuel optimisation

The purpose of the fuel optimisation routine is to always let the gensets run in the best combination at any given
load based on their actual nominal powers.
NOTES: The settings are adjusted in the command unit.
The multi start function cannot be used together with the fuel optimising routine.
Description
The function is set up in the following menus:
Menu number Menu text Description Comment
Load with best fuel economy
8171 Setpoint The units will optimise around this genset load
(% of PNOM)
Swap The improvement in nominal power must be better than this
8172 Initiate optimising
setpoint setpoint to initiate fuel optimising
Optimal combination must be present during this period,
8173 Delay Time delay
before optimising is initiated
8174 Hour Running hours Maximum allowed difference in running hours
8175 Enable Activate running hours Activates the dependency of the running hours
54 |
User Manual
The function is best described with an example. Below an example with three DGs is shown.
• DG1 = 1000 kW
• DG2 = 1000 kW
• DG3 = 500 kW
Settings used in the fuel optimising function in this example:
• 8011 Load-dependent stop = 220 kW (extended with 10% in this function)
• 8171 Setpoint = 100%
• 8172 Swap percentage = 200 kW
Situation 1:
The two 1000 kW gensets must operate. The load is too big for one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset.
Situation 2:
Since the load has decreased to 1400 kW, it would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset. The
improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). The problem is that only 100 kW would be
available. The load-dependent stop requires 220 kW available, so no swapping can take place.
Situation 3:
Now the load has decreased to 1300 kW. It would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset. The
improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). The problem is that only 200 kW would be
available. The load-dependent stop requires 220 kW available, so no swapping can take place.
Situation 4:
Now the load has decreased to 1200 kW. It would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset. The
improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). This means that 300 kW would be available, so
the load-dependent stop does not interfere with the fuel optimising.
Fuel optimising is initiated!
Situation 5:
Now DG3 has been started and is running with 400 kW. This is the best combination at this time, and no swapping
takes place with this load.
| 55
NOTE: The setpoint (menu 8171) in percent is typically set to 80-85% for optimum fuel economy.
Running hours
It is possible to combine the fuel optimising with the running hours. This is enabled in menu 8175. If this setting is
OFF the fuel optimising will be active, but the running hours will not be included in the calculation.
If the function "running hours" is enabled, the principle is the following: If one genset reaches the adjusted amount
of running hours, it will be given quarantine. This means that it will just rest until it has the lowest number of
running hours. The only exception to this is if there is no alternative combination. Then it will be used but will still
be in quarantine.
56 |
User Manual
7.13 Conditional connection of heavy consumers

Each diesel generator unit is able to handle two heavy consumers (HC). When a heavy consumer is requested, the
function for conditional connection of heavy consumers reserves the programmed HC requested value (parameter
8201/8211) on the busbar and blocks for engagement of the heavy consumer, until sufficient predicted available
power is present at the busbar.
When the available power is above the requested HC power, the heavy consumer is subsequently blocked until the
programmed HC acknowledge delay runs out (fixed delay of 4 sec.).
The "DELAY ACK. HC" may be necessary in order to allow the recently started generator set to take load and thus
actually increase the available power at the busbar before engagement of the HC.
The heavy consumers (HC) are connected according to their priority. This means that if two or more heavy
consumers request start acknowledgement at the same time, the HC with the highest priority is handled first, and
subsequently HCs with lower priority, etc.
HC 1.1 (1st HC in DG unit with CAN ID no. 1) is designated the highest priority. This means that HC 1.1 is
handled before HC 1.2, and HC 2.1 is handled before HC 2.2 if they are requested for start at the same time. If there
are any preferential HCs, they must be connected to the hardware interface for the 1st HC in order to ensure first
priority handling.
| 57
The power management system carries out the following systematic sequence when a heavy consumer is requested
for start:
a) The programmed "HC n REQ. VALUE" is reserved at the busbar (parameter 8201/8211).
A PMS start command is transmitted to the next stand-by generator set if the predicted available power is
b)
below the programmed "LOAD START LIMIT".
When sufficient available power is present at the busbar, the timer "DELAY ACK. HC n" starts running
c)
(fixed delay time of 4 sec.).
The start acknowledge signal is transmitted to the HC in question when the timer "DELAY ACK. HC n"
d)
runs out and sufficient available power is still measured at the busbar.
The nominal HC power value (parameter 8202/8212) is used for load-dependent start/stop calculation after
e)
the acknowledge signal is given.
7.13.1 Power feedback from the heavy consumer

The Qc4002™ MkII is able to handle two types of power feedback:
• Binary feedback
• Analogue feedback
The two types of power feedback signals are handled the same way by the conditional connection of heavy
consumers function.
Changing the power feedback type is done by a parameter (8203/8213) in each generator unit.
Activating the corresponding start request binary input activates the HC engagement sequence. The Qc4002™ MkII
system transmits a start acknowledge signal when sufficient predicted available power is present at the busbar.
HC with binary power feedback signal:
58 |
User Manual
7.13.2 Engagement sequence for HCs with fixed load

The power reservation by means of the feedback "HCx fixed load" input is enabled as long as the start request
signal is active. An OFF status (indicates that the HC is not operating) of the power feedback signal results in a
100% power reservation at the busbar. An ON status (indicates that the HC is operating) at the power feedback
signal results in a 0% power reservation at the busbar.
HC with analogue power feedback signal:
The analogue power feedback for the heavy consumer is intended for a power transducer with a 4-20 mA output
corresponding to 0-100% load. If the heavy consumer is of 400 kW, the power transducer has to be calibrated to 0-
400 kW = 4-20 mA, and the setting has to be set for 400 kW.
7.14 Ground relay

The purpose of this function is to always let the star point of only one genset be connected to ground during island
mode operation. The reason for this is to avoid circulating currents between the generators. The function is adjusted
in menu 8120.
The Qc4002™ MkII which has the lowest CAN ID and where the generator breaker is closed will close its ground
relay. Should this genset stop, it will open its ground relay when the generator breaker opens, and the ground relay
of the generator which now has the lowest CAN ID closes its ground relay instead.
NOTE: The number of available configurable relays is option-dependent. The relay for this function is selected in each
Qc4002™ MkII unit.
| 59
7.15 Stop of non-connected gensets

If peak shaving is selected and the imported power increases above the start setpoint, the genset(s) will start. If the
load now drops below the start setpoint, it will remain disconnected from the busbar but will not stop, because the
imported power is higher than the stop setpoint.
The function "stop of non-connected DGs" (menu 8140) will make sure that the gensets stop after the adjusted time.
In other modes, the generator will also be stopped if it is in automatic without the GB closed.
7.16 Secured mode

Secured mode adds an extra generator to the power management system. This means that one genset more than
calculated in load-dependent start will be running.
It is only possible to activate secured mode if the genset is in auto mode.
Secured mode can be activated/deactivated by means of digital inputs or via M-logic.
NOTE: The extra generator running in secured mode will be selected, so it is possible to replace the largest running generator
if this should fail.
7.17 Base load

One genset unit in a power management system can be selected as running with base load (2952). This can be done
from the display unit, via M-logic or via a binary input. If the unit is selected to run with base load, the status
message "FIXED POWER" will be indicated. The fixed power value can be adjusted with parameter 2951.
If a generator runs in base load and the total load decreases to a point below the base load setpoint, the system will
lower the fixed power setpoint. This is to prevent frequency control problems, as the generator running in base load
does not participate in the frequency control.
When the generator breaker is closed, the generator power will be increased to the fixed power setpoint.
60 |
User Manual
If AVR control (option D1) is selected, the setpoint will be the adjusted power factor.
NOTES: The unit selected for base load operation will automatically be set in SEMI-AUTO. Only one generator per
independent busbar can run with base load.
The busbar has to be active with one or more DG units running, before the unit with the lowest ID can activate base
load.
Only one QC4002™ MkII unit at a time can run in base load. The unit with the lowest ID will be allowed to run in
base load.
7.18 Asymmetric load sharing (LS)

When asymmetric LS is enabled in menu 8282, the "normal" Power management load sharing is deactivated in all
Qc4002™ MkII units in the system. The Qc4002™ MkII units will then load share according to the asymmetric LS
setpoint in menu 8281.
Example: Four DGs able to produce 2800 kW each as nominal power. Asymmetric LS setpoint = 90%. Load on the
busbar is 3030 kW.
The generator with priority 01 will start up first, taking 90% of the load = 2727 kW. The generator with priority 02
will take the rest of the load = 303 kW.
NOTE: If the asymmetric LS setpoint in menu 8281 "kW value" is higher than the nominal power of the generators, the whole
system will switch back to symmetric.
| 61
7.19 Tie breaker configuration

Some of the possible applications of the Qc4002™ MkII with option Power management can be used with a tie
breaker, i.e. a breaker connected between the gensets and the load bus.
7.19.1 Tie breaker selection

In menu 8191, the tie breaker can be selected ON (present) or OFF (not present).
7.19.2 Tie breaker control

It can be selected whether the tie breaker should be open or closed when the generators are stopped. This depends
on the application and the auxiliaries. If auxiliary load is connected to the generator bus, the tie breaker must be
closed, but if no load is connected to the generator bus, then the tie breaker is often preferred to be open when the
generators are stopped.
The tie breaker will open or close depending on the setting in the menu 8191 ("Tie breaker enable").
NOTE: The tie breaker only opens or closes depending on the selection in menu 8191 and it is not depending on the selected
mode whether it should open or close.
7.19.3 Tie breaker open point

If the gensets are running parallel to mains and the mains breaker trips, e.g. due to a mains failure, it can be
necessary to trip the tie breaker as well.
This depends on the total nominal power of the running gensets. If the gensets cannot supply the amount of load
which is adjusted in the "tie breaker open point" menu 8192, then the tie breaker will open. It will close again when
the power capacity setpoint menu 8193 is reached.
This delay time can be used to trip non-essential load groups.
Example
In the example illustrated below it can be seen that the tie breaker will trip if DG1 or DG2 is connected to the load,
because they are smaller than 510 kW. If DG1 and DG2 are running together, the tie breaker will also trip, because
the total nominal power is still below 510 kW. If, however, DG3 is running alone or together with one of the two
smaller DGs, then the tie breaker will not trip, because the total nominal power will be higher than 510 kW.
NOTE: The powers mentioned above are nominal powers of the gensets in the application.
62 |
User Manual
7.19.4 Power capacity

The power capacity setting in menu 8193 is used in AMF applications to determine how much power must be
available, before the tie breaker can close. When the gensets are started the generator breakers will close, and when
sufficient power is available, then the tie breaker will be closed.
Power capacity overrule:

In case some of the generators fail starting and the power capacity setpoint is not reached, the tie breaker will never
be closed. Because of this, it is possible to overrule the power capacity setpoint after a period of time set in menu
8194. The function "power capacity overrule" is enabled in menu 8195.
7.20 Island application with TB
A tie breaker in the mains unit can be operated in an island application. It is controlled in the same way as in the
AMF situation described above. The power capacity setpoint menu 8193 is used to ensure that the generators
produce enough power to take the load. This is done to protect the generators from going into overload.
| 63
7.21 Multiple mains

The Qc4002™ MkII can be used in an application with multiple mains incomers. This is an example of the multiple
mains application:
Each application can handle:

• 0-16 mains feeders in the same application
• 0-16 gensets in the same application
• 8 bus tie breakers
NOTE: The multiple mains functionality covers a great variety of different applications. Please contact Atlas Copco for
questions concerning the functionality.
64 |
User Manual
7.21.1 Definitions
A multiple mains application consists of feeders and generators + a number of GBs, TBs, BTBs and MBs.
Sections
The application consists of static and dynamic sections if one or more BTBs are installed. The definition of a
section is mentioned in the table below.
Section Definition
Static section Part of the total application which is separated by one or two open BTBs. There will be no closed BTBs within
this section.
A static section can also be a dynamic section, but not vice versa.
Dynamic Part of the total application which is separated by one or two open BTBs. There may be one or more closed
section BTBs within this section.
| 65
NOTES: If no BTBs are installed, the application consists of a static section only.
Only use remote start signal in island application with BTB units.
Static section:
The BTB 33 is in open position. Therefore the
indicated section is a static section.
Dynamic section:
The section is separated by an open BTB, so this is
a dynamic section.
Dynamic section:
The BTB 34 is in closed position. Therefore the
indicated section is a dynamic section.
66 |
User Manual
7.21.2 Configuration
Select "Standard" in the plant configuration tool to configure this application.
Now the application can be configured using the section control panel.
| 67
7.21.3 Plant mode handling

Basically, six menus are available for setting up the functionality of the application.
No. Setting Min. setting Max. setting Factory setting
8181 MB failure start Enable OFF ON OFF
8182 Parallel Enable OFF ON OFF
8183 No break transfer Enable OFF ON OFF
8184 Auto switch Enable OFF Static Dynamic All OFF
8185 Run type Run one/all mains Run all mains Run one mains Run one mains
8186 Run type ID to run 17 32 17
MB close failure start:

This setting determines whether a start of the DGs should be executed if an MB close failure occurs.
NOTES: If "MB close failure start" is activated, the mode shift functionality will automatically be enabled.
In peak shaving, fixed power, mains power export and load takeover, the function is only active when menu 7081
Mode shift is set to ON.
MB parallel:
This setting determines whether the mains connections (MBs) should be able to run in parallel or not.
NOTE: The setting of "MB parallel" affects the function of the "Auto switch" setting.
No break transfer:
This setting determines whether switching between the mains connections (MBs) should be executed as a black
coupling or a synchronised coupling.
If the TBs in a section are adjusted to normally closed and "MB parallel" is switched OFF, then only one of the TBs
can be closed at the time.
The system will try to keep the ID selected in menu 8186 ("My ID to Run") to keep its TB closed. If, however, the
selected ID does not have a TB configured as a normally closed breaker, or if it fails to close it, it will be the mains
unit holding the lowest ID without TB failures present that will close.
If "My ID to Run" is changed during operation, then the MB parallel setting will decide whether a black or a
synchronised change-over will take place.
NOTE: If "MB parallel" is activated, the "No break transfer" will automatically be enabled.
68 |
User Manual
Auto switch:
This setting determines whether a mains unit detecting a mains failure will try to get the connected load supplied by
another mains or by the available DGs.
Description
OFF The auto switch functionality is switched OFF.
Static section The back-up power is recovered within its own static section.
The back-up power is recovered within its own dynamic section.
Dynamic section
The application will never try to synchronise/close a BTB to get help in an AMF situation.
All sections The back-up power is recovered within all available sections.
NOTES: Sections are divided by bus tie breakers. If no BTBs are installed, then the settings static/dynamic/all have the same
auto switch function.
If dynamic is selected, then please be aware that one mains unit will be requested to carry all load from the dynamic
section without any help from the DGs.
Therefore the remaining mains feeders must be able to carry the load from the entire section.
Run type:
This setting determines how the system in a dynamic section reacts in all the plant modes except island and AMF.
Description Comment
Run one Only one mains breaker is allowed to be "My ID to Run" (menu 8186) determines which mains feeder is
mains closed at the time. allowed to operate parallel to the mains.
If other TBs are closed, they will be tripped in order to only have the
TB of "My ID to Run" closed.
If no TB is available in the section, the MB will be tripped (causing a
blackout).
Run all All mains breakers are allowed to be
mains closed at the time.
NOTE: This setting can be handled from M-logic.
| 69
7.22 Dual mains

If the Qc4002™ MkII are configured with two mains units, the settings for the dual mains application must be
adjusted.
7.22.1 Configuration
Select "Dual mains" in the plant configurator tool to configure this application.
70 |
User Manual
7.22.2 Plant mode handling

This is an illustration of the dual mains application.
| 71
Four additional settings have been specified to determine the behaviour of the system. The settings are to be set in
one of the Qc4002™ MkII mains units and are then communicated via the CANbus to the other mains unit. The
four additional settings in menu 8180 are:
Description Dual mains relevance
8181 MB close failure start X
8182 MB parallel X
8183 No break transfer X
8184 Auto switch X
8185 Run one/all mains Not relevant
8186 ID to run Not relevant
NOTE: The menus 8185 and 8186 are ignored in the dual mains application.
MB close failure start:

This setting determines whether a start of the DGs should be executed if an MB close failure occurs.
NOTES: If "MB close failure start" is activated, the mode shift functionality will automatically be enabled.
In peak shaving, fixed power, mains power export and load takeover, the function is only active when menu 7081
Mode shift is set to ON.
MB parallel:
This setting determines whether the two mains connections (MBs) should be able to run in parallel or not.
NOTE: The setting of "MB parallel" affects the function of the "Auto switch" setting.
No break transfer:
This setting determines whether a priority switch between the two mains connections (MBs) should be executed as
a black coupling or a synchronised coupling.
NOTE: If "MB parallel" is activated, the "No break transfer" will automatically be enabled.
st
1 priority mains:
The configurable input "1st priority mains" determines which of the mains connections to consider the first priority.
The binary input must be configured via the PC utility software (USW). The priority of the mains connections can
then be altered by switching the input status on the Qc4002™ MkII mains units.
NOTE: The "1st priority" input has to be active on one of the mains units at all times.
72 |
User Manual
Auto switch:
MB parallel OFF:
• If "Auto switch" is ON, an attempt will be made to switch to the 2nd priority mains if a mains failure occurs
on the 1st priority mains before the generators are started.
• If "Auto switch" is OFF, no attempt will be made to switch to the 2nd priority in case of a mains failure.
MB parallel ON:
• If "Auto switch" is OFF, the two mains will act as one meaning that both mains breakers have to be closed at
all times, since one mains connection is not enough to supply the load. A mains failure on either of the mains
will cause a trip of both mains breakers and subsequently start of the gensets.
• If "Auto switch" is ON, both mains breakers will be closed in case both mains are OK. If a mains failure
occurs on one of the mains, the mains breaker in question will be tripped, but an AMF start of the gensets will
only happen when a mains failure is present on both mains.
NOTE: If "Auto switch" is enabled (ON), mode shift (menu 7081) must also be enabled (ON).
7.22.3 Internal CAN ID

The internal CAN ID for the Qc4002™ MkII mains units can be set between 17 and 32 when multiple mains has
been selected (otherwise the system only expects one mains and the ID is set to 17 as default). The selection of the
CAN ID cannot be made randomly but must be made with caution. The reason for this is that the system expects ID
17 and ID 18 as a couple controlling the mains breaker for one mains connection, i.e. the ID 18 unit acts as a
redundant unit to ID 17. In the same manner, the system expects ID 19 and ID 20 as a couple controlling the mains
breaker for one mains connection, i.e. the ID 20 unit acts as a redundant unit to ID 19. This means that when no
redundant mains units are present, the ID selected for the two Qc4002™ MkII mains units must be ID 17 and 19.
Setting of the CAN ID in multiple mains applications:
Qc4002™ MkII mains unit ID no. Comment
1A 17 Required
1B 18 Not required, redundant to 1A
2A 19 Required
2B 20 Not required, redundant to 2A
NOTE: Please refer to the drawing above for the location of the Qc4002™ MkII mains units.
7.22.4 Qc4002™ MkII mains unit redundancy

It is possible to install a redundant Qc4002™ MkII mains unit for each mains connection. If this is done, the
redundant Qc4002™ MkII mains unit will automatically take control if:
• a mains breaker failure occurs on the primary control unit
• the primary control unit is suddenly missing on the CAN line due to a CAN error
• the primary control unit is put into semi-auto
When the alarm situation on the primary control unit has been reset, the control is switched back to this Qc4002™
MkII mains unit.
NOTES: The primary control units are ID 17 and ID 19.
Be aware that if "ID to run" is active, the mains unit to run must have higher nominal power than the load on the
busbar to prevent overload.
| 73
The redundant controller is selected in the configuration window (section control).
7.22.5 Tie breaker configuration

In applications with two mains connections, the tie breaker is handled by the Qc4002™ MkII mains unit fulfilling
the following conditions:
• Holding the lowest CAN ID
• No tie breaker error
• Not in semi-auto
If the Qc4002™ MkII mains unit controlling the tie breaker is not able to open the tie breaker, the tie breaker
handling is moved to the next Qc4002™ MkII mains unit fulfilling the conditions above. This will continue until
the tie breaker is opened or all the Qc4002™ MkII mains units have tried to open the tie breaker.
NOTE: Because of the AC wiring it is not possible to synchronise the tie breaker in applications supporting two mains
connections.
74 |
User Manual
7.23 Configurable CAN IDs
Can IDs can be configured as desired, as a mix of DG, mains and BTB units:
16 gensets IDs 1-16
16 mains IDs 17-32
8 bus tie breakers IDs 33-40
This makes a total of 40 CAN IDs
| 75
7.24 CAN flags

16 CAN flags can be accessed in M-logic. They can be used in the same way as digital inputs. CAN flags can be set
active when a CAN command is sent from one unit to another. The benefit is that no wire is needed, as the CAN
flags are activated via the Power management CANbus.
Example: CAN cmd 01 will be active when DG 5 is running. All units in the power management system will
receive "CAN input 01 active" and then be able to act on this information.
NOTE: Only use of constant signals from digital inputs or AOP buttons can activate the CAN inputs. AOP buttons are pulse
inputs, so a latch function must be made to make similar functionality as constant signals.
76 |
User Manual
7.25 Common PF control

A common PF value can be set in menu 7052, and menu 7053 can be set to either "Inductive" or "Capacitive". To
activate the common PF control, menu 7054 must be enabled. These setpoints can only be handled from the AGC
mains unit and then sent through the power management CANbus to all the DG units in the system. The DG units
will then adjust their individual PF control according to the received setpoint.
NOTE: Inductive/capacitive setpoints can be set up from M-logic.
| 77
8. Parameter lists
The Power management option relates to the parameters 2250, 2260, 2270, 2761, 2950, 6071, 6400, 7011-7014,
7041-7044, 7051-7054, 7061-7084, 7531-7536, 7871-7873, 8000-8120, 8170-8175, 8181-8195, 8201-8213, 8220-
8225, 8230-8272, 8280-8282, 8880-8882, 9160, 9170, 9180-9186, 9190-9192.
2954 6320 00 Qc4002™ MkII Quick start guide
2954 6360 00 Qc4002™ MkII Modbus Communication manual
78 |
Retrofit Instructions
Qc4002™ MkII – Retrofit instructions

FOR Qc4002™ TO Qc4002™ MkII UPGRADE
ON QAS STAGE 2 AND QAC RANGE
CONTENTS
1. MAKE FOOTPRINT ..................................................................................................................................2
2. REPLACE QC4002™ MKI BY QC4002™ MKII ..........................................................................................3
2.1 Re-organise I/O’s ................................................................................................................................3
3. ADD WIRES FOR NEW PMS SYSTEM .....................................................................................................4
3.1 Component list...................................................................................................................................4

3.2 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................4
4. ADD TRANSFORMER MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................5
4.1 Component list...................................................................................................................................5

4.2 Make cutouts for X40 & X41 sockets in socket panel.......................................................................... 5
4.3 Mount components X40, X41 .............................................................................................................6
4.4 Mount K200, K201, K202 (on DIN rail) and K203 and U5* ................................................................... 7
4.5 Wire according to circuit diagram........................................................................................................8
5. ADD ANALOG LOADSHARE INHIBIT SWITCH .........................................................................................9
5.1 Component list...................................................................................................................................9

5.2 Mount S31 .........................................................................................................................................9
5.3 Wire according to circuit diagram...................................................................................................... 10
6. FLASH FIRMWARE V4.XX.X .................................................................................................................. 11
7. UPLOAD V4 COMPATIBLE PROJECT FILE ............................................................................................ 11
7.1 List of project files ........................................................................................................................... 11
8. RESTORE CUSTOM SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 11
|1
1. Make footprint
1. Make a footprint of the MkI controller, to store any previously made custom settings of the controller.
2. Choose “Read from the device” in the “Batch read and write” menu in PARUS.
3. Select all parts of the project file and press Run.
4. You will be prompted for a name and location to store the project file.
2|
2. Replace Qc4002™ MkI by Qc4002™ MkII

MkI (1604 9663 01) & MkII (1604 9663 10) controllers are physically 1:1 exchangeable.
2.1 Re-organise I/O’s

(Only for QAC 800-1000)
• Reroute wire 94 (Manual fuel fill) from terminal 46 to terminal 112

• Reroute wire 271 (fuel leakage) from terminal 47 to terminal 113
• Reroute wire 20 (ASV – NO) from terminal 57 to terminal 61
• Reroute wire 2 (ASV – COM) from terminal 58 to terminal 62
• Disconnect wire 19 (Emergency stop) from terminal 114; Isolate it properly, make sure that any bridged
connections are maintained
Note: refer to Circuit diagram 9822 0986 09 for QAC 800-1000
|3
3. Add wires for new PMS system

3.1 Component list
Tag Function Atlas Copco ref. Qty
- Terminal for X30 socket 1088 0029 63 2 pc
3.2 Wiring
• Add wire 151 between terminal X30:4 and terminal X32:1
• Add wire 153 between terminal X30:5 and terminal X32:3
4|
4. Add Transformer Maintenance

(optional; not applicable for QAS 60-80-100)
4.1 Component list
K200 Sensing changeover relay 1089 9410 06 1 pc

K201 & K202 Sensing relay 1089 0645 12 + 1089 9164 70 2 pcs
K203 Emergency stop relay 1089 0341 08 + 1089 0358 01 1 pc
X40 Connector for TM – control 1088 0036 50 + 1088 0029 50 + 1088 0029 52 1 pc
X41 Connector for TM – sensing 1088 0029 73 + 1088 0029 60 + 1088 0029 68 1 pc
- DIN rail 0090 1400 02 150 mm
- RJ11 connector 1089 0693 01 1 pc
R4 120 Ω termination resistor 1089 0310 29 1 pc
U5 DC-DC convertor 1089 9544 14 1 pc*
Note*: U5 only needed on 12Vdc systems.
4.2 Make cutouts for X40 & X41 sockets in socket panel
Note: The actual position of the socket cut outs might differ from the illustration.
|5
4.3 Mount components X40, X41
Mounting positions for X40 & X41 on QAS
X40
X41
Mounting positions for X40 & X41 on QAC
X41
X40
6|
4.4 Mount K200, K201, K202 (on DIN rail) and K203 and U5*
Note*: U5 only needed on 12Vdc systems
Mounting positions for K200; K201, K202 and K203 on QAS
Mounting positions for K200; K201, K202 and K203 on QAC
|7
Mounting position for U5 on QAS (12V system)
4.5 Wire according to circuit diagram
Unit Control system voltage ECU Circuit diagram
QAS 125-150 12V EDC IV 9822 0993 10

QAS 200 24V EDC IV 9822 0993 11
QAS 275-325 24V EMS 2 9822 0993 29
QAS 500 24V EMS 2 9822 0993 49
QAC 24V EMR 2 9822 0986 09
8|
5. Add Analog loadshare inhibit switch

(optional)
5.1 Component list
S31 Switch to inhibit analog loadshare regulators 1089 9473 20 1 pc
5.2 Mount S31

Mounting positions for S31 on QAS
Mounting positions for S31 on QAC
|9
5.3 Wire according to circuit diagram
Unit Control system voltage ECU Circuit diagram
QAS 60 12V n/a 9822 0996 18

QAS 80-100 12V n/a 9822 0996 19
QAS 125-150 12V EDC IV 9822 0993 10
QAS 200 24V EDC IV 9822 0993 11
QAS 275-325 24V EMS 2 9822 0993 29
QAS 500 24V EMS 2 9822 0993 49
QAC 24V EMR 2 9822 0986 09
10 |
6. Flash Firmware v4.xx.x

(see GBP)
7. Upload v4 compatible project file

7.1 List of project files
Unit List of project files
QAS 60 9822 0980 70

QAS 80 9822 0980 71
QAS 100 9822 0980 72
QAS 125 9822 0995 30
QAS 150 9822 0995 31
QAS 200 9822 0995 32
QAS 275 9822 0995 33
QAS 325 9822 0995 34
QAS 500 9822 0995 35
QAC 800 9822 0986 62
QAC 1000 9822 0986 72
8. Restore custom settings

(Compare MkI project file with MkII project file to restore any custom settings)
| 11
2954 6360 00 Qc4002™ MkII Modbus Communication manual
12 |
Transformer Maintenance
Original instructions
Printed matter N°
2954 6170 01 ATLAS COPCO - PORTABLE ENERGY DIVISION
12/2011 www.atlascopco.com
Warranty and Liability Limitation

Use only authorized parts.
Any damage or malfunction caused by the use of unauthorized parts is not covered by
Warranty or Product Liability.
The manufacturer does not accept any liability for any damage arising from modifications,
additions or conversions made without the manufacturer's approval in writing.
Neglecting maintenance or making changes to the setup of the machine can result in major
hazards, including fire risk.
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is correct,
Atlas Copco does not assume responsibility for possible errors.
Copyright 2011, Atlas Copco Airpower n.v., Antwerp, Belgium.

Any unauthorized use or copying of the contents or any part thereof is prohibited.
This applies in particular to trademarks, model denominations, part numbers and drawings.
-2-
Transformer Maintenance
Congratulations on the purchase of your Qc4002™ MkII affiliated Transformer Maintenance Box. It is a solid, safe and reliable tool for transformer maintenance,
built according to the latest technology. Follow the instructions in this booklet and we guarantee you years of troublefree operation. Please read the following
instructions carefully before starting to use your Transformer Maintenance Box.
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is correct, Atlas Copco does not assume responsibility for possible errors. Atlas Copco
reserves the right to make changes without prior notice.
Contents
1 Introduction................................. 4 4 Transformer maintenance 5 Voltage mains

procedure.....................................8 measurement............................ 19
2 Transformer Maintenance 4.1 OFF status...........................................8 5.1 Three-phase measurement .............19
Box ............................................... 4 4.2 Start generator...................................9 5.2 One-phase measurement ................19
2.1 Description .........................................4
4.3 Synchronise the generator..............10
2.2 Specifications .....................................4
4.4 Deload Mains....................................11
6 Cable and plug connection ...... 20
2.3 Safety precautions .............................5 6.1 Cable specifications .........................20
4.5 Island operation ...............................12
2.4 Main components ..............................5 6.2 CAN communication........................20
4.6 Back synchronisation to the
2.4.1 Display ................................................5 Mains.................................................13 6.3 Cable overview.................................20
2.4.2 Turn switches .....................................5
4.7 Manually restore fuses ....................14
2.4.3 Lamp and buzzer ................................5
4.8 Deload the generator.......................15
2.4.4 Voltage connection ............................5
2.4.5 Shutdown ...........................................5 4.9 Stop the generator...........................16
2.4.6 Component overview ........................6 4.10 Settings to increase stability ..........17
4.10.1 PID regulation ...................................17
3 Setting Qc4002™ MkII for 4.10.2 Power factor settings .......................18
transformer maintenance .......... 7 4.10.3 Closing settings ................................18
-3-
1 Introduction 2 Transformer To comply with these demands a TM-box with

following features has been introduced:
By introducing the Qc4002™ MkII Transformer Maintenance Box
– Easy user interface
Maintenance application, Atlas Copco offers you the
possibility of performing transformer maintenance – Designed to be simple in control
2.1 Description
without any power supply interruption for the – Step-by-Step sequences
consumers. To facilitate transformer maintenance a Transformer
Maintenance Box (TM-box) has been developped. – Visual and audible indication
The main principles of transformer maintenance are:
Take load from the Mains

2.2 Specifications
To repair or to preform service on a transformer, the The TM-box is only to be applied together with a
Mains should be disconnected. Qc4002™ MkII. The Qc4002™ MkII is a power
management controller, carrying out generator
1. Synchronise the generator with the busbar to
control, supervision and protection.
connect to the system.
Communication between the generator and the TM-
2. When the generator is synchronised, the generator
box is established via CAN-communication.
breaker will close and the generator takes the load.
3. When the Mains power is zero, the mains breaker
can be switched off or the fuses can be removed.
Back synchronisation to the Mains

1. The generator will synchronise back to the mains. The TM-box complies with the demands of a remote
control box and the new flexibility of a maintenance
2. When this static synchronisation is ok, manually
mobile system.
close the mains breaker or connect the fuses.
These demands are:
The generator can be deloaded.
– Safe maintenance at transformer substations or
3. After deload, the generator breaker is opened and other electrical installations
the generator stops.
– Interface panel close to the connection points
– No interruptions of power supply for the
consumers
-4-
2.3 Safety precautions 2.4 Main components 2.4.3 Lamp and buzzer
When installing/operating the TM-box, keep The ‘Connect mains’ lamp (2) is activated together
following safety precautions in mind: 2.4.1 Display with an internal buzzer as soon as back
The box contains a display, which has the same synchronisation to the Mains is accomplished.
Electrostatic discharge awareness functions as the display mounted directly on the
Sufficient care must be taken to protect the terminals generator’s Qc4002™ MkII. This gives the operator 2.4.4 Voltage connection
against static discharges during the installation. Once the possibility to read out the same values from both Voltage measurements can be quickly and easily
the unit is installed and connected, these precautions displays, such as synchroscope, menus, activity texts, connected directly to the TM-box (5). It is possible to
are no longer necessary. etc. The display will show different views in each have a 1- or 3-phase measurement.
function step to give the necessary information.
Safety issues 2.4.5 Shutdown
The display on the TM-box is set as secondary
Installing and operating the unit implies work with display. The display on the generator remains the The shutdown function is to protect the system.
dangerous currents and voltages. Therefore, the primary display.
installation should only be carried out by authorised Pressing the ‘Shutdown’ button (6) will trigger an
Press for 3 seconds and enter password 2003 to emergency stop which will result in loss of power for
personnel who understand the risks involved in
change this setting. the consumer.
working with live electrical equipment.
The TM-box can be connected or disconnected
Be aware of the hazardous live 2.4.2 Turn switches
without tripping the generator.
currents and voltages. Do not touch Power set point adjustments are made by means of a
any AC measurement inputs as this spring return selector switch (4) that returns to zero
could lead to injury or death. when being released.
Be aware that in some cases a second To select a function, the operator uses a multiposition
source may still provide power to the ‘Function select’ switch (3) that is turned clockwise
busbar without giving notice. in sequential steps to make the generator carry out the
functions indicated until it completes 360 degrees.
Then the generator will stop and it is ready for a new
job cycle.
-5-
2.4.6 Component overview
1 7 6
1 Display
2 Connect mains lamp
3 Function select switch
OK
4 Power switch
Qc4002
5 Voltage measurement point
! Shut down
6 Shutdown button
7 U/F OK LED
LOG
Voltage mains
Connect Function select Power

mains N L1
Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator L2
Generator
Synchronisation to mains synchronisation
L3
Island Deload mains
2 3 4 5
-6-
3 Setting Qc4002™ MkII for transformer maintenance
Hardware installation: Setting the TM-box display as primary display:
– TM-box 1. Set communication ID:
• Press navigation left, up and right button
OK
– 2 TM cables (one CAN communication cable and ! G 0 0

Qc4002
0V
one cable for 230-400V measurement)

E N T E R M E N U N O. 1 9160
together for 3 seconds.
LOG
ENTER
• Enter service password.
Genset 1 G • Select ‘ID 1’.
2. Set display priority:
G • Press 2 seconds on "view" button.
X41 X40
• Enter service password.
1 OK
Qc4002
• Select ‘Priority 1’.
3 2 ! G 0
Standard plant
0 0V
X40 1DG, 1Mains, 0BTB

LOG To protect the unit and the load, a
A1 A2 A3 A4 INACT
X41
suitable protection installed on the
G
power cables between the Mains and
1 Transformer Maintenance Box (1626 4629 00) the Generator should be foreseen by
the end-user.
2 Control cable (25 m) (1626 4630 00)
3 Sensing cable (25 m) (1626 4631 00) OK
Qc4002
! G 0 0 0V
Standard plant
Setting up the Qc4002™ MkII controller: 1DG,
RESET
1Mains, 0BTB
SELECT LOG
1. Make sure application 1 is selected:

• Go with the JUMP button to parameter 9160.
G
• Check if A1 (application 1) is active.

If not, activate A1 by pushing ENTER on A1
and select this application with settings
“1 DG” and “1 Mains” (default settings).
OK
Qc4002
! G 0 0 0V
Standard plant
2. Set the controller in “Remote Maintenance” 1DG, 1Mains,
A1 A2 A3 A4
0BTB
ACT LOG
mode:
• Go with the JUMP button to parameter 6070. G
• Select genset mode "Remote Maintenance".
-7-
4 Transformer maintenance procedure
4.1 OFF status
TM-box
The ‘Function select’ switch is in the OFF position. mains
Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. Manually connect the power cables from the
generator to the busbar.
A live connection has to be made, take all
necessary safety measures. Always check
the phase sequence when connecting.
2. Connect the cables from the TM-box to the

generator.
3. Select remote maintenance mode in parameter 6070.
4. Measure Active power, Reactive power and Power
Factor.
5. Set power factor setpoint according the measured
value in parameter 7050.
-8-
4.2 Start generator
TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Start generator. mains
Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. The generator starts up.
2. When the generator is running (shown on TM-box
display), make sure that voltage and frequency are
OK.
This is indicated by the U/F OK LED (7) on the TM-
box display.
-9-
4.3 Synchronise the generator
TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Generator mains
synchronisation. Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. The generator is forced to make a dynamic
synchronisation to the Mains and closes the
generator breaker.
The synchronisation will be shown on the TM-box
display.
2. The generator will run with a minimum of load.
- 10 -
4.4 Deload Mains
TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Deload mains for mains
Stop OFF 0
load take over.
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. Adjust the generator power by means of the ‘Power
switch’.
2. Measure the current from the mains with a hand-held
ampere meter.
3. When ‘Power Mains  0’, manually disconnect the
Mains by opening the mains breaker or removing the
fuses.
The generator will stay in fixed power mode and take
over the load.
4. When the fuses are opened, switch the function
selector switch ASAP to Island mode.
As long as the generator is in fixed power, load
variation will result in rising or lowering frequency
to unacceptable levels for the consumers and the
generator might trip.
5. In case of instability, please consult section 4.10.
- 11 -
4.5 Island operation
TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Island as quickly as mains
Stop OFF 0
possible to prevent frequency variation due to load
Deload generator
changes. Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. The generator runs in a normal island operation with
frequency regulation.
2. It is now possible to disconnect the TM-box.
The generator will continue running in island mode.
Meanwhile the TM-box can be removed to ensure
that only authorised personnel is operating the
system, or the TM-box could be used in another
application.
3. When reconnecting the TM-box to the application
the system will only react when the ‘Function select’
switch is turned to the Island position.
When reconnecting with the ‘Function
select’ switch in Island position nothing will
happen. Switch back and forward to Island
to reactivate the system
Be aware that in some cases a second source may provide power to the busbar without the operator's knowledge. When the fuses to one of the
transformers are removed and the system is set to island operation, the frequency regulation will indicate this by starting to “fight” the Mains to
keep the nominal setting. This will cause the generator to accelerate, and high current will run through the transformer cable. In this case, switch
back to “Deload mains” (fixed power) to avoid instability in the system and breaking/destroying the cable.
- 12 -
4.6 Back synchronisation to the Mains
Flow
Connect the voltage measurement line between the TM-
box and the mains connection point (fuses/breaker).
Do not forget to check the phase sequence of these
measuring cables. See also section 5 for the difference
between three phase and single phase measurement.
TM-box
1. Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Connect Function select Power
mains
Synchronisation to mains. Stop OFF 0
2. The generator starts static synchronization. Deload generator
Start generator
2 regulators will become active :
Generator
• frequency synchronisation: regulates the voltage Synchronisation to mains synchronisation
towards the closing window, Deload mains
Island
• phase angle synchronization: takes over in the
closing window.
3. For improved stability, synchronization behaviour
can be adjusted in parameters 2040 and 2060. For
details, please check section 4.10.
4. For improved accuracy, the closing window and
delay setting can be changed in parameters 2033 and
2034.
- 13 -
4.7 Manually restore fuses
TM-box
When the synchroscope in the display is stable at 12 Connect Function select Power
mains
o'clock, the Connect mains lamp will light up and a Stop OFF 0
buzzer will be activated. Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
Manually close the mains breaker or reconnect the fuses
to reconnect the Mains.
- 14 -
4.8 Deload the generator
TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Deload generator. Connect Function select Power
mains
Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
The generator deloads and opens the generator breaker.
The speed of deload can be selected in parameter 2620
where the ramp down %/s can be adjusted. Set deload
speed slow enough to assure smooth load transfer from
the generator to the mains.
- 15 -
4.9 Stop the generator

TM-box
Turn the ‘Function select’ switch to Stop to stop the Connect Function select Power
mains
generator. Stop OFF 0
Deload generator
Start generator
Generator
Island Deload mains
Flow
1. After the cooldown time, set by the operator, the
generator will stop automatically.
2. The generator can be disconnected and moved to
another job.
- 16 -
4.10 Settings to increase stability
4.10.1 PID regulation

To fine-tune synchronisation when switching back to the Mains, it is recommended to adjust PID regulation.
To improve stability of the active power regulation following parameters can be used/adjusted:
Reg 2530 Power PID

Reg 2531 Kp Proportional
Reg 2532 Ti Integrative
Reg 2533 Td Derivative
Parameters can be found on the display menu structure: SETUP/ CTRL / SYNC or by entering the number in the JUMP menu.
Two different PID regulators are used to adjust the frequency at static synchronisation:
– Use following parameters to adjust the frequency synchronization PID:
Sync 2041 f sync. Kp 74 5
Sync 2042 f sync. Ti 75 2 s
Sync 2043 f sync. Td 76 0 s
– Use following parameters to adjust the phase PID:
Sync 2061 Phase Kp 78 8
Sync 2062 Phase. Ti 79 1.2 s
Sync 2063 Phase Td 80 0.3 s
When the voltage vector is outside the closing window, the “f sync.” regulator will be active, when the voltage vector is inside the closing window the phase PID regulator
will be active.
- 17 -
4.10.2 Power factor settings

To approach the actual power factor measured at the
Mains as close as possible, adjust parameters 7051
and 7052.
Parameter 7051 will be adjusted by the power button
on the TM-box, so no adjustments are to be made on
the display
Parameter 7052 is to be set equally to the measured
mains power factor.
When the parameters for power regulation have been
adjusted to the actual power factor, the operation of
the generator will become more stable.
4.10.3 Closing settings

Parameter 2033: Closing window: with this
parameter the width of the closing window is defined
(1 degree difference results in 7 Volts difference
when closing). 7 degrees should not be exceeded.
Parameter 2034: Static sync delay: sets the time delay
for the buzzer to be activated when the voltage vector
is inside the closing window.
- 18 -
5 Voltage mains 5.1 Three-phase measurement 5.2 One-phase measurement
measurement All three phases are connected on the TM-box , which The static synchronisation to the Mains can be done
means that the synchronisation check is carried out at by measuring one phase only, which means that the
A manual connection of the voltage reference line all three phases. synchronisation check is only done at one phase.
from the Mains is necessary when static
synchronisation to the Mains is to be carried out. Common neutral connection between
Voltage mains generator and transformer
Be aware of the hazardous live
currents and voltages when
connecting the voltage reference line. Voltage mains
N L1
Make sure that the voltage reference
line is connected correctly. Do not
forget to fuse properly. N L1
L2
Make sure that the entire 3-phase
system is OK before closing the
L2
breaker or connecting the fuses. L3
When using three-phase measurement it is not L3
necessary to connect the neutral, as it is calculated

internally by the Qc4002™ MkII controller.
Only one phase and neutral are connected on the TM-
Phase sequence check box to measure voltage at the Mains.
When all three phases are used to measure the This can only be done if the neutral of the generator
voltage, the Qc4002™ MkII will automatically run a and the transformer are correctly connected, so the
phase sequence check. common measurement point is the same.
No phase sequence check

When measurement is carried out with one phase and
neutral only, automatic phase sequence check is not
possible. Therefore it is very important that it is
checked manually!
- 19 -
6 Cable and plug connection 6.3 Cable overview

To make the system flexible and secure, the TM-box is
based on pulse detection of the buttons and switches
inside the box. This way the operator will be able to
disconnect the box and keep the system in the same
function. GND
4 1 6 10A 600V 10
When the generator is running in island, it is possible to
Han 10A-M 16A 250V QV3
remove the box without stopping the generator. Or it 3 2
1 2 3 4 5
could function as a kind of access lock of the system.
6.1 Cable specifications

The connection between the generator’s Signal Pin no. Cable wire Qc4002™ MkII
Qc4002™ MkII and the TM-box is split into two cables: Harting (colour/no.) Slot #8 (H8.8)
one CAN communication and one cable for 230-400V Voltage measurements cable
measurement. For more details, see circuit diagram Voltage meas L1 1 BLACK 1 85
inside the instruction manual of your generator. Voltage meas L2 2 BLACK 2 87
Voltage meas L3 3 BLACK 3 89
6.2 CAN communication Voltage meas N 4 BLACK 4 88
When the CAN communication between the Qc4002™ EARTH GN/YL
MkII and the TM-box is established, it is necessary to Data cable
adjust the CAN ID of both displays. This is done by EARTH GN/YL
pressing the left, up and right buttons on the display +24V DC 1 RED 1
simultaneously to activate the CAN ID selection menu.
0V DC 2 BLUE 2
The CAN ID is changed by means of the up and down
Shutdown 6 GREY/PINK See Note*
buttons. Press ENTER to select. Adjust the display of
Beckhoff CAN-H 3 WHITE 130 or 133
the generator to CAN ID 1 and the display of the box to
CAN ID 2. Beckhoff CAN-GND 4 SCREEN
Beckhoff CAN-L 5 BROWN 128 or 131
DU-2 CAN-H 8 GREEN Blue cable
DU-2 CAN-L 10 YELLOW Green cable
Note*: activates a relay in series with the existing emergency stop circuit.
- 20 -
User Manual
Qc4002™ MkII – Modbus communication

DESCRIPTION OF MODBUS COMMUNICATION
CONTENTS
1. DELIMITATION .......................................................................................................................................3
1.1 Scope of Modbus Communication ......................................................................................................3

2.1.3 Safety issues ............................................................................................................................................. 4
3. DESCRIPTION OF OPTION ......................................................................................................................5
3.1 Terminal description ...........................................................................................................................5

3.2 Hardware settings ..............................................................................................................................5
4. PARAMETERS.........................................................................................................................................6
5. DATA TABLES .........................................................................................................................................7
5.1 Configurable area (read only) (function code 04h)................................................................................7

5.1.1 Legend ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.1.2 Analogue values ........................................................................................................................................ 7
5.1.3 Alarms ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.1.4 *Multi-input – unscaled values ................................................................................................................ 21
5.2 Measurement table (read only) (function code 04h)........................................................................... 24
5.3 Alarm and status table (read only) (function code 04h) ...................................................................... 38
5.4 Power management measurement table (read only) (function code 04h) ........................................... 64
5.5 Power management alarm and status table (read only) (function code 04h)....................................... 71
5.6 Control register table read (03h)/write (10h) ...................................................................................... 91
5.7 Command flags table (write only) (function code 0Fh) ....................................................................... 96
5.8 Status flags table (read only) (function code 02h) ............................................................................ 100
5.9 Digital input table (read only 02h).................................................................................................... 102
5.10 Digital input table (read only 01h).................................................................................................... 105
6 PARAMETER SETTING ........................................................................................................................ 107
6.1 Parameter reading and writing ........................................................................................................ 107

6.1.1 Function 01(01hex) read/write flag status ............................................................................................. 107
6.1.2 Function 02(02hex) read flag status ...................................................................................................... 107
6.1.3 Function 04(04hex) read registers ......................................................................................................... 107
6.1.4 Function 15(0Fhex) write multiple flags, function 5(05hex) write single flag......................................... 108
6.1.5 Function 16(10hex) write multiple register, function 6(06hex) write single register .............................. 108
6.2 Parameter addresses ...................................................................................................................... 108
| 1
Qc4002™ MkII Control Panel – Modbus communication
6.2.1 Limitations............................................................................................................................................. 108

6.2.2 Examples............................................................................................................................................... 109
7. RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 110
2|
User Manual
1. Delimitation
1.1 Scope of Modbus Communication
| 3


be lost.
Disclaimer
2.1.3 Safety issues



4|
User Manual
3. Description of option
3.1 Terminal description
The Modbus communication option is a hardware option, and therefore a separate PCB is installed in slot #2 in
addition to the standard-installed hardware. These terminal positions are used in all products mentioned in this
document.
Term. Function Description
29 DATA + (A) Modbus RTU, RS485
30 DATA GND
31 DATA - (B)
32
33 DATA + (A)
34
35 DATA - (B)
36
NOTE: Terminals 29 and 33 are internally connected.

Terminals 31 and 35 are internally connected.
3.2 Hardware settings

These are the RS485 hardware settings:
• 9600 or 19200 bps
• 8 data bits
• None parity
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
| 5
4. Parameters
The Modbus communication option relates to the parameters 7500-7520.
For details, see separate Parameter list.
6|
User Manual
5. Data tables
5.1 Configurable area (read only) (function code 04h)
5.1.1 Legend
Columns:
• ”X” means standard feature.
• Empty field means not available.
• Letter/number combination refers to an option number.
5.1.2 Analogue values
Qc4002™ MkII bus tie

Qc4002™ MkII mains
Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Bit
Content
UL1-L2 Generator voltage L1-L2 [V] X
0
UL1-L2 Mains voltage L1-L2 [V] X
UL1-L2 Bus A voltage L1-L2 [V] X
UL1-L2 Shore voltage L1-L2 [V]
1
2
UL1-N Generator voltage L1-N [V] X
3
UL1-N Mains voltage L1-N [V] X
UL1-N Bus A voltage L1-N [V] X
UL1-N Shore voltage L1-N [V]
4
5
fL1 Generator f L1 [Hz/100] X
6
fL1 Mains f L1 [Hz/100] X
fL1 Bus A f L1 [Hz/100] X
fL1 Shore f L1 [Hz/100]
| 7

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Bit
Content
IL1 Generator current L1 [A] X
7
IL1 Mains current L1 [A] X
IL1 Bus current L1 [A] X
IL1 Shore current L1 [A]
8
9
PGEN Generator power [kW] X
10
PMAINS Mains power [kW] X
PBA Bus power [kW] X
PSC Shore power [kW]
QGEN Generator reactive power [kVAr] X
11
QMAINS Mains reactive power [kVAr] X
QBA Bus reactive power [kVAr] X
QSC Shore reactive power [kVAr]
SGEN Generator apparent power [kVA] X
12
SMAINS Mains apparent power [kVA] X
SBA Bus apparent power [kVA] X
SSC Shore apparent power [kVA]
Cos-phi Generator PF [cosPhi/100] X
13
Cos-phi Mains PF [cosPhi/100] X
Cos-phi Bus PF [cosPhi/100] X
Cos-phi Shore PF [cosPhi/100]
14 [Hi] RGEN Reactive energy counter [kVArh] X
15 [Lo] X
16 [Hi]
EGEN Active energy counter [kWh] X X X
17 [Lo]
UBBL1-L2 U BB L1-L2 [V] X X

18
UBBL1-L2 U BB B L1-L2 [V] X
19
20
8|
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Bit
Content
UBBL1-N U BB L1-N [V] X X
21
UBBL1-N U BB B L1-N [V] X
22
23
BB f L1 [Hz/100] X X
24 FBB
BB B f L1 [Hz/100] X
25 PHIBBL1-L2 U BB phase angle L1-L2 [Deg/10] X X X

U BB L1 - U GEN L1
26 PHIBBL1-DGL1 X
phase angle [Deg/10]
U BB L1 - U Mains L1
PHIBBL1-ML1 X
U BB A L1 - U BB 2 L1
PHIBAL1-BBL1 X
27 Alarms No. of alarms X X X
28 Alarms No. of unack. alarms X X X
29 Start attempts Start attempts X
30 [Hi]
Abs. run. hours Abs. run hours X
31 [Lo]
GBoper No. of GB operations X

32
TBoper No. of TB operations X
BTBoper No. of BTB operations X
SCBoper No. of SCB operations
MBoper No. of MB operations X X
33
TBoper No. of TB operations
34 USUPPLY DC supply term. 1-2 [V/10] X X X
35 USUPPLY M4 DC supply term. 98-99 [V/10] X X X
36 RPM RPM X
Multi-input 102 unscaled X X X
37
Multi-input 46 unscaled
38
39
| 9

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Bit
Content
40 Control register address 0 X X X
Control register address 6 X X X

46
0 SWBD mode
1 Fixed frequency
2 Fixed P
3 P load sharing
4 Frequency droop
5 Ext. GOV setpoint
6 Fixed voltage
7 Fixed Q
8 Fixed PF
9 Q load sharing
10 Voltage droop
11 Ext. AVR setpoint
12 Remote
13 Local
14 Deload
15 Start sync./control
10 |
User Manual
5.1.3 Alarms

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
48 Generator/mains/busbar 1/shore connection
0 1000 G -P> 1 X
M -P> 1 X
BTB -P> 1 X
SC -P> 1
1 1010 G –P> 2 X
M -P> 2 X
BTB -P> 2 X
SC -P> 2
2 1020 Reserved
3 1030 G I> 1 X
M I> 1 X
BTB I> 1 X
SC I> 1
4 1040 G I> 2 X
M I> 2 X
BTB I> 2 X
SC I> 2
5 1050 G I> 3 X
M I> 3 X
BTB I> 3 X
SC I> 3
6 1060 G I> 4 X
M I> 4 X
BTB I> 4 X
SC I> 4
7 1090 Reserved
8 1120 Reserved
9 1130 G I>> 1 X
M I>> 1 X
BTB I>> 1 X
SC I>> 1
10 1140 G I>> 2 X
M I>> 2 X
BTB I>> 2 X
SC I>> 2
11 1150 G U> 1 X
M U> 1 X
| 11

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
BB-A U> 1 X
SC U> 1
12 1160 G U> 2 X
M U> 2 X
BB-A U> 2 X
SC U> 2
13 1170 G U< 1 X
M U< 1 X
BB-A U< 1 X
SC U< 1
14 1180 G U< 2 X
M U< 2 X
BB-A U< 2 X
SC U< 2
15 1190 G U< 3 X
M U< 3 X
BB-A U< 3 X
SC U< 3
49 0 1210 G f> 1 X
M f> 1 X
B1 f> 1 X
SC f> 1
1 1220 G f> 2 X
M f> 2 X
BB-A f> 2 X
SC f> 2
2 1230 G f> 3 X
M f> 3 X
BB-A f> 3 X
SC f> 3
3 1240 G f< 1 X
M f< 1 X
BB-A f < 1 X
4 1250 G f< 2 X
M f< 2 X
BB-A f< 2 X
SC f< 2
5 1260 G f< 3 X
M f< 3 X
12 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
BB-A f< 3 X
SC f< 3
Busbar/mains
6 1270 BB U> 1 X X
BB-B U> 1 X
7 1280 BB U> 2 X X
BB-B U> 2 X
8 1290 BB U> 3 X X
BB-B U> 3 X
9 1300 BB U< 1 X X
BB-B U< 1 X
10 1310 BB U< 2 X X
BB-B U< 2 X
11 1320 BB U< 3 X X
BB-B U< 3 X
12 1330 BB U< 4 X X
BB-B U< 4 X
13 1350 BB f> 1 X X
BB-B f> 1 X
14 1360 BB f> 2 X X
BB-B f> 2 X
15 1370 BB f> 3 X X
BB-B f> 3 X
50 0 1380 BB f< 1 X X
BB-B f< 1 X
1 1390 BB f< 2 X X
BB-B f< 2 X
2 1400 BB f< 3 X X
BB-B f< 3 X
3 1410 BB f< 4 X X
BB-B f< 4 X
4 1420 df/dt (ROCOF) X X X
5 1430 Vector jump X X X
6 1440 BB pos. seq. volt. low X X X
Generator/mains/busbar A/shore
7 1450 G P> 1 X
M P> 1 X
BA P> 1 X
SC P> 1
| 13

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
8 1460 G P> 2 X
M P> 2 X
BA P> 2 X
SC P> 2
9 1470 G P> 3 X
M P> 3 X
BA P> 3 X
SC P> 3
10 1480 G P> 4 X
M P> 4 X
BA P> 4 X
SC P> 4
11 1490 G P> 5 X
1500 M P> 5 X
1510 BA P> 5 X
SC P> 5
12 Unbalance curr. X X
13 Unbalance volt. X X
14 1520 G -Q> X
M -Q> X
BA -Q> X
SC -Q>
15 1530 G Q> X
M Q> X
BA Q> X
SC Q>
51 Synchronising
0 2120 Synchronising window X X X
1 2130 Synchronising failure GB X
Synchronising failure TB X
Synchronising failure BTB X
2 2140 Synchronising failure MB X X
Synchronising failure SGB
Synchronising failure SCB
3 2150 Phase sequence failure X X X
4 2160 GB open failure X
TB open failure X
BTB open failure X
5 2170 GB close failure X
14 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
TB close failure X
BTB close failure X
6 2180 GB pos. failure X
TB pos. failure X
BTB pos. failure X
7 2200 MB open failure X X
TB open failure
SGB open failure
SCB open failure
8 2210 MB close failure X X
TB close failure
SGB close failure
SCB close failure
9 2220 MB pos. failure X X
TB pos. failure
SGB pos failure
SCB pos failure
10 2250 Close before excitation failure X
11
12
13
14
15
52 Digital alarms
0 3130 Digital alarm input 43 43 43
13
14
| 15

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
15
53 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
15
54 0 3400 Multi-in. alarm 102 102 102
1 3410 Multi-in. alarm 105 105 105
2 3420 Multi-in. alarm 108 108 108
3 3401 Wire fail. 102 102 102
4 3411 Wire fail. 105 105 105
5 3421 Wire fail. 108 108 108
(Emer. stop)
13
14
15
55 0 3500 Digital alarm input 127 127 127
16 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
56 Analogue input alarm
0 4000 4-20mA 91.1 91.1 91.1
1 4010 4-20mA 91.2 91.2 91.2
2 4020 Wire failure analogue 91 91 91
3 4030 4-20mA 93.1 93.1 93.1
4 4040 4-20mA 93.2 93.2 93.2
6 4060 4-20mA 95.1 95.1 95.1
7 4070 4-20mA 95.2 95.2 95.2
9 4090 4-20mA 97.1 97.1 97.1
10 4100 4-20mA 97.2 97.2 97.2
12
13
14
15
57 Multi-functional input
0 4120 4-20mA 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4130 4-20mA 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4140 V DC 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4150 V DC 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4160 PT 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4170 PT 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4180 VDO oil 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4190 VDO oil 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4200 VDO water 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4210 VDO water 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4220 VDO fuel 102.1 102.1 102.1
| 17

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
1 4230 VDO fuel 102.2 102.2 102.2
2 4240 W. fail. 102 102 102
3 4250 4-20mA 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4260 4-20mA 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4270 V DC 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4280 V DC 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4290 PT 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4300 PT 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4310 VDO oil 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4320 VDO oil 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4330 VDO water 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4340 VDO water 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4350 VDO fuel 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4360 VDO fuel 105.2 105.2 105.2
5 4370 W. fail. 105 105 105
6 4380 4-20mA 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4390 4-20mA 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4400 V DC 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4410 V DC 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4420 PT 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4430 PT 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4440 VDO oil 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4450 VDO oil 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4460 VDO water 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4470 VDO water 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4480 VDO fuel 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4490 VDO fuel 108.2 108.2 108.2
8 4500 Wire failure 108 108 108
Analogue input alarm
9 4510 Oversp. 1 X
10 4520 Oversp. 2 X
11 4530 Crank failure X
12 4540 Running feedback failure X
13 4550 MPU wire failure X
14 4560 Hz/V failure X
15 4570 Start failure X
Output
58 0 5000 Relay 5 5 5
1 5010 Relay 8 8 8
18 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
2 5020 Relay 11 11 11
3 5030 Relay 14 14 14
4 5040 Relay 17 17 17
5 5050 Relay T20 T20 T20
6 5060 Relay T21 T21 T21
7 5070 Relay 29 29 29
8 5080 Relay 31 31 31
9 5090 Relay 33 33 33
10 5100 Relay 35 35 35
11 5110 Relay 57 57 57
12 5120 Relay 59 59 59
13 5130 Relay 61 61 61
14 5140 Relay 63 63 63
15
59 General
0 Block mode X X
1 Manual mode X
SWBD mode
2 Semi auto mode X X X
3 Auto mode X X X
4 Test X X
5 Island X X
6 AMF X X
7 Peak shaving X X
8 Fixed power X X
9 Mains power export X X
10 Load takeover X X
11 Power management X X
Genset group X
12 DG supply
13 SG/SC supply
14 Reserved
15 AMF active X X
60 EIC alarm
0 7570 Communication error X
1 7580 Warning X
2 7590 Shutdown X
3 7600 Overspeed X
4 7610 Cool water temp. high 1 X
| 19

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
5 7620 Cool water temp. high 2 X
6 7630 Oil pressure low 1 X
7 7640 Oil pressure low 2 X
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
61 Analogue inputs
0 4800 4-20 mA 127.1 127.1 127.1
1 4810 4-20 mA 127.2 127.2 127.2
2 4820 W. fail input 127 127 127
3 4830 4-20 mA 129.1 129.1 129.1
4 4840 4-20 mA 129.2 129.2 129.2
5 4850 W. fail input 129 129 129
6 4860 4-20 mA 131.1 131.1 131.1
7 4870 4-20 mA 131.2 131.2 131.2
8 4880 W. fail input 131 131 131
9 4890 4-20 mA 133.1 133.1 133.1
10 4900 4-20 mA 133.2 133.2 133.2
11 4910 W. fail input 133 133 133
12
13
14
15
62 0 Virtual event 1
1 Virtual event 2
2 Virtual event 3
3 Virtual event 4
4 Virtual event 5
5 Virtual event 6
6 Virtual event 7
7 Virtual event 8
8 Virtual event 9
9 Virtual event 10
20 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Parameter
Address
Bit
Content
10 Virtual event 11
11 Virtual event 12
12 Virtual event 13
13 Virtual event 14
14 Virtual event 15
15 Virtual event 16
63 0 Virtual event 17
1 Virtual event 18
2 Virtual event 19
3 Virtual event 20
4 Virtual event 21
5 Virtual event 22
6 Virtual event 23
7 Virtual event 24
8 Virtual event 25
9 Virtual event 26
10 Virtual event 27
11 Virtual event 28
12 Virtual event 29
13 Virtual event 30
14 Virtual event 31
15 Virtual event 32
5.1.4 *Multi-input – unscaled values

A short description of the unscaled values and how to interpret these according to the input type selected is made in
this document.
The unscaled values have a full range of 0 to 1023 bit.
4-20mA
0mA: 0 bit
4mA: 170 bit
20mA: 853 bit
25mA: 1023 bit
| 21
Linearity between the unscaled value and the scaled value yields.
0-40V DC
0V DC: 0 bit
40V DC: 925 bit
Linearity between the unscaled value and the scaled value yields.
Pt100
Linearity between the unscaled value and the input resistance yields according to the following equation:
Ω = (x + 509) * 100/771
x: Unscaled value.
Ω: PT resistance value.
Pt1000
Linearity between the unscaled value and the input resistance yields according to the following equation:
Ω = (x + 519) * 10/79
x: Unscaled value.
Ω: PT resistance value.
VDO
Linearity between the unscaled value and the input resistance yields according to the following equations:
If maximum resistance on the sensor is less than or equal to 90.0Ω:
Ω = ((x * 1000) + 300)/10330
x: Unscaled value.
Ω: VDO resistance value.
If maximum resistance on the sensor is above 90.0Ω and less than or equal to 190.0Ω:
Ω = ((x * 1000) - 800)/5160
x: Unscaled value.
If maximum resistance on the sensor is above 190.0Ω and less than or equal to 490.0Ω:
Ω = ((x * 1000) + 1000)/2070
x: Unscaled value.
22 |
User Manual
If maximum resistance on the sensor is above 490.0Ω:

Ω = ((x * 1000) + 294)/520
x: Unscaled value.
Binary
Input high: < 50 bit
Input low: ≥ 50 bit
Cable failure: > 950 bit
NOTE: It is recommended to use the scaled values for Pt100/1000 and VDO readings.
| 23
5.2 Measurement table (read only) (function code 04h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
501 UL1-L2 Generator voltage L1-L2 [V] X
504 UL1-N Generator voltage L1-N [V] X
507 fL1 Generator f L1 [Hz/100] X
24 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
510 Phi U gen. phase angle L1-L2 [Deg/10] X
Phi U mains phase angle L1-L2 [Deg/10] X
Phi U BA phase angle L1-L2 [Deg/10] X
Phi U SC phase angle L1-L2 [Deg/10]
513 IL1 Generator current L1 [A] X
IL1 Bus A current L1 [A] X
516 PGEN L1 Generator power L1 [kW] X
PMAINS L1 Mains power L1 [kW] X
PBA L1 Bus A power L1 [kW] X
PSC L1 Bus A power L1 [kW]
519 PGEN Generator power [kW] X
PMAINS Mains power [kW] X
PBA Bus A power [kW] X
| 25

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
PSC Shore power [kW]
520 QGEN L1 Generator reactive power L1 [kVAr] X
QMAINS L1 Mains reactive power L1 [kVAr] X
QBA L1 Bus A reactive power L1 [kVAr] X
QSC L1 Bus A reactive power L1 [kVAr]
523 QGEN Generator reactive power [kVAr] X
QMAINS Mains reactive power [kVAr] X
QBA Bus A reactive power [kVar] X
QSC Shore reactive power [kVAr]
524 SGEN L1 Generator apparent power L1 [kVA] X
SMAINS L1 Mains apparent power L1 [kVA] X
SBA L1 Bus A apparent power L1 [kVA] X
SSC L1 Bus A apparent power L1 [kVA]
527 SGEN Generator apparent power [kVA] X
SMAINS Mains apparent power [kVA] X
SBA Bus A apparent power [kVA] X
SSC Shore apparent power [kVA]
528 [Hi] RGEN, EXP Export, reactive energy counter [kVArh] X
529 [Lo]
528 [Hi] RMAINS, EXP Export, reactive energy counter [kVArh] X
529 [Lo]
528 [Hi] RBA, EXP Export, reactive energy counter [kVArh] X
529 [Lo]
26 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
528 [Hi] RSC, EXP Export, reactive energy counter [kVArh]
529 [Lo]
530 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Export, active energy counter, day [kWh] X
531 [Lo]
530 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Export, active energy counter, day [kWh] X
531 [Lo]
530 [Hi] EBA, EXP Export, active energy counter, day [kWh] X
531 [Lo]
530 [Hi] ESC, EXP Export, active energy counter, day [kWh]
531 [Lo]
532 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Export, active energy counter, week [kWh] X
533 [Lo]
532 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Export, active energy counter, week [kWh] X
533 [Lo]
532 [Hi] EBA, EXP Export, active energy counter, week [kWh] X
533 [Lo]
532 [Hi] ESC, EXP Export, active energy counter, week [kWh]
533 [Lo]
534 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Export, active energy counter, month [kWh] X
535 [Lo]
534 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Export, active energy counter, month [kWh] X
535 [Lo]
534 [Hi] EBA, EXP Export, active energy counter, month [kWh] X
535 [Lo]
534 [Hi] ESC, EXP Export, active energy counter, month [kWh]
535 [Lo]
536 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Export, active energy counter, total [kWh] X
537 [Lo]
536 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Export, active energy counter, total [kWh] X
537 [Lo]
536 [Hi] EBA, EXP Export, active energy counter, total [kWh] X
537 [Lo]
536 [Hi] ESC, EXP Export, active energy counter, total [kWh]
537 [Lo]
538 Cos-phi Generator PF [cosPhi/100] X
Cos-phi Mains PF [cosPhi/100] X
Cos-phi Bus A PF [cosPhi/100] X
Cos-phi Shore PF [cosPhi/100]
539 UBBL1-L2 U BB L1-L2 [V] X X X
| 27

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
542 UBBL1-N U BB L1-N [V] X X X
545 FBB BB FL1 [Hz/100] X X X
546 FBB f BB L2 [Hz/100] X X X
547 FBB f BB L3 [Hz/100] X X X
551 PHIBBL1-DGL1 U BB L1 - U GEN L1 X
PHIBBL1-ML1 U BB L1 - U Mains L1 X
PHIBAL1-BBL1 U BB A L1 - U BB B L1 X
PHISCL1-BBL1 U BB A L1 - U BB B L1
PHIBBL2-MAINSL2 U BB L2 - U mains L2 X
PHIBBL2-BAL2 U BB L2 - U bus A L2 X
PHISCL2-BAL2 U BB L2 - U bus A L2
PHIBBL3-MAINSL3 U BB L3 - U mains L3 X
PHIBBL3-BAL3 U BB L3 - U bus A L3 X
PHISCL3-BAL3 U BB L3 - U bus A L3
554 [Hi] Abs. run. hours Absolute. run hours X
555 [Lo]
556 [Hi] Rel.. run. hours Relative. run hours X
557 [Lo]
558 Alarms No. of alarms X X X
559 Alarms No. of unack. alarms X X X
560 Alarms No. of active acknowledged alarms X X X
28 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
561 Run. min. Running min. counter, shutdown override X
562 Run. hours Running hour counter, shutdown override X
563 GBoper No. of GB operations X
TBoper No. of TB operations X
BTBoper No. of BTB operations X
564 MBoper No. of MB operations X X
TBoper No. of TB operations
SGBoper No. of SGB operations
SCBoper No. of SCB operations
565
566 Start attempts Start attempts X
567 USUPPLY DC supply term. 1-2 [V/10] X X X
568 USUPPLY M4 DC supply term. 98-99 [V/10] X X X
569 Service Service timer 1 run. hours X
570 Service Service timer 1 run. days X
571 Service Service timer 2 run. hours X
572 Service Service timer 2 run. days X
573 Cos-phi Cos-phi [cosPhi/100] X X X
574 Cos-phi Cos-phi Inductive/Capacitive 0=Inductive,
X X X
1=Capacitive
575
576 RPM RPM X
577 [Hi] Running hours load Running hours load profile X
profile
578 [Lo] Running hours load Running hours load profile X
profile
579
580 Multi-input 102 unscaled X X X
583 Multi-input 102 scaled X X X
Multi-input 46 scaled
586 Ain 4-20mA input, scaled 91 91 91
| 29

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
590
591 PBB BUS power 105
PBA Bus A 105
592 PMAINS Mains power [kW] 102 102
PTB Tie breaker power
593 EIC speed [RPM] X
594 EIC coolant temp. [deg] [F] X
595 EIC oil pressure [bar/100] [psi/100] X
596 EIC no of faults [Faults] X
597 EIC oil temp. [deg/10] [F/10] X
598 EIC fuel temp. [deg] [F] X
599 EIC intake manifold #1 P [bar/100] [psi/100] X
600 EIC air inlet temp. [deg] [F] X
601 EIC coolant level [%/10] X
602 EIC fuel rate [L/h/10] X
603 EIC charge air press [bar] [psi]
604 EIC intake manifold 1T (or EIC charge air T) [deg] [F] X
605 EIC d.d. % torque [%] X
606 EIC actual % torque [%] X
607 EIC acc. pedal pos. [%] X
608 EIC % load, c. speed [%] X
609 EIC air inlet pressure [bar/100] [psi/100] X
610 EIC exhaust gas temp. [deg/10] [F/10] X
611 EIC engine hours [H] X
612 EIC oil filter diff. press. [bar/100] [psi/100] X
613 EIC battery voltage [V/10] X
614 EIC fuel del. press. [bar/100] [psi/100] X
615 EIC oil level [%/10] X
616 EIC crankcase press. [bar/100] [psi/100] X
617 EIC coolant pressure [bar/100] [psi/100] X
618 EIC water in fuel [2 bits] X
619 Reserved
620 Reserved
621 Reserved
622 Reserved
623 EIC turbo oil temp. [deg/10] [F/10] X
30 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
624 EIC trap inlet [bar/100] [psi/100] X
625 EIC Air filter diff press [bar/1000] [psi/1000] X
626 EIC Cool filter diff press [bar/100] [psi/100] X
627 EIC Atm press [bar/100] [psi/100] X
628 EIC Ambient air temp [deg/10] [F/10] X
629 EIC exch. temp A [deg] [F]
630 EIC exch. temp B [deg] [F]
631 EIC Winding 1 temp[deg] [F]
634 Reserved
635 Reserved
636 EIC Turbo 1 compr outlet press [bar] [psi]
637 EIC Intercooler temp [deg] [F]
638 EIC trip fuel_gaseous [kg] X
639 EIC total fuel used_gaseous [ton/10] X
640 EIC engine trip fuel [L] X
641 EIC engine total fuel used [kL/10] X
642 RegAddr. Control register address 0 X X X
650 RegAddr Control register address 8 X X X
653 RegAddr Control register address 11
654 Reserved
656 Ain Analogue input 127 X X X
660 Ext Ain External Ain 1 (unscaled) X X X
| 31

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
668 0 SWBD mode
1 Fixed frequency
2 Fixed P
3 P load sharing
4 Frequency droop
5 Ext. GOV setpoint
6 Fixed voltage
7 Fixed Q
8 Fixed PF
9 Q load sharing
10 Voltage droop
12 Remote
13 Local
14 Deload
669-
699
700 Nominal power active (1-4) X X X
701 Mains power transducer used X
Tie breaker power transducer used
702 [Hi] Fan A running hours X
703 [Lo] Fan A running hours X
704 [Hi] Fan B running hours X
705 [Lo] Fan B running hours X
706 [Hi] Fan C running hours X
707 [Lo] Fan C running hours X
708 [Hi] Fan D running hours X
709 [Lo] Fan D running hours X
790 [Hi] RGEN, EXP Export reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
791 [Lo]
790 [Hi] RMAINS, EXP Export reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
32 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
791 [Lo]
790 [Hi] RBA, EXP Export reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
791 [Lo]
792 [Hi] RGEN, EXP Export reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
793 [Lo]
792 [Hi] RMAINS, EXP Export reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
793 [Lo]
792 [Hi] RBA, EXP Export reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
793 [Lo]
794 [Hi] RGEN, EXP Export reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
795 [Lo]
794 [Hi] RMAINS, EXP Export reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
795 [Lo]
794 [Hi] RBA, EXP Export reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
795 [Lo]
796 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Import active energy counter, total [kWh] X
797 [Lo]
796 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Import active energy counter, total [kWh] X
797 [Lo]
796 [Hi] EBA, EXP Import active energy counter, total [kWh] X
797 [Lo]
798 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Import active energy counter, month [kWh] X
799 [Lo]
798 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Import active energy counter, month [kWh] X
799 [Lo]
798 [Hi] EBA, EXP Import active energy counter, month [kWh] X
799 [Lo]
800 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Import active energy counter, week [kWh] X
801 [Lo]
800 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Import active energy counter, week [kWh] X
801 [Lo]
800 [Hi] EBA, EXP Import active energy counter, week [kWh] X
801 [Lo]
802 [Hi] EGEN, EXP Import active energy counter, day [kWh] X
803 [Lo]
802 [Hi] EMAINS, EXP Import active energy counter, day [kWh] X
803 [Lo]
802 [Hi] EBA, EXP Import active energy counter, day [kWh] X
803 [Lo]
| 33

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
804 [Hi] RGEN, IMP Import reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
805 [Lo]
804 [Hi] RMAINS, IMP Import reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
805 [Lo]
804 [Hi] RBA, IMP Import reactive energy counter, total [kWh] X
805 [Lo]
806 [Hi] RGEN, IMP Import reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
807 [Lo]
806 [Hi] RMAINS, IMP Import reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
807 [Lo]
806 [Hi] RBA, IMP Import reactive energy counter, month [kWh] X
807 [Lo]
808 [Hi] RGEN, IMP Import reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
809 [Lo]
808 [Hi] RMAINS, IMP Import reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
809 [Lo]
808 [Hi] RBA, IMP Import reactive energy counter, week [kWh] X
809 [Lo]
810 [Hi] RGEN, IMP Import reactive energy counter, day [kWh] X
811 [Lo]
810 [Hi] RMAINS, IMP Import reactive energy counter, day [kWh] X
811 [Lo]
810 [Hi] RBA, IMP Import reactive energy counter, day [kWh] X
811 [Lo]
812 [Hi] Counter Pulse counter 01 X X X
813 [Lo]
814 [Hi] Counter Pulse counter 02 X X X
815 [Lo]
816 Ipeak Demand of peak current 1 X X X
819 Ipeak, AVG Demand of avg.peak current 1 X X X
820 Ipeak, AVG Demand of avg. peak current 2 X X X
821 Ipeak, AVG Demand of avg. peak current 3 X X X
822-
899
900 EIC trip average fuel rate [L/h]
901 EIC nominal power [Kwm] X
902 [Hi] EIC trip fuel liquid [L/2] X
34 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
903 [Lo] EIC trip fuel liquid [L/2] X
904 [Hi] EIC total fuel liquid [L/2] X
905 [Lo] EIC total fuel liquid [L/2] X
906 [Hi] EIC mean trip fuel consumption [L/h] X
907 [Lo] EIC mean trip fuel consumption [L/h] X
908 EIC engine power [Kwm] X
911 EIC intake manifold #1 absolute pressure [bar/100] or X
[psi/100]
1370 [Lo] DM1/SPN SPN diagnostic no. 1 X
1380 [Hi] DM1/SPN SPN diagnostic no. 1 X
1390- DM1/SPN Not used - Reserved X
1401
1402 DM1/FMI FMI diagnostic no. 1 X
| 35

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
1412- DM1/FMI Not used - Reserved X
1417
1418 DM1/OC Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1 X
1428- DM1/OC Not used - Reserved X
1433
1454- DM2/SPN Not used - Reserved X
1465
36 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address Content
1476- DM2/FMI Not used - Reserved X
1481
1492- DM2/OC Not used - Reserved X
1499
| 37
5.3 Alarm and status table (read only) (function code 04h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
1000 Generator/mains/busbar A/shore connection
0 1000 G -P> 1 X
M -P> 1 X
BA -P> 1 X
SC -P> 1
1 1010 G -P> 2 X
M -P> 2 X
BA -P> 2 X
SC -P> 2
2 1020 Reserved
3 1030 G I> 1 X
M I> 1 X
BA I> 1 X
SC I> 1
4 1040 G I> 2 X
M I> 2 X
BA I> 2 X
SC I> 2
5 1050 G I> 3 X
M I> 3 X
BA I> 3 X
SC I> 3
6 1060 G I> 4 X
M I> 4 X
BA I> 4 X
SC I> 4
7 1090 G I> inv.
8 1110 G Iv> X X X
9 1130 G I>> 1 X
M I>> 1 X
BA I>> 1 X
SC I>> 1
10 1140 G I>> 2 X
M I>> 2 X
BA I>> 2 X
SC I>> 2
38 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
11 1150 G U> 1 X
M U> 1 X
BA U> 1 X
SC U> 1
12 1160 G U> 2 X
M U> 2 X
BA U> 2 X
SC U> 2
13 1170 G U< 1 X
M U< 1 X
BA U< 1 X
SC U< 1
14 1180 G U< 2 X
M U< 2 X
BA U< 2 X
SC U< 2
15 1190 G U< 3 X
M U< 3 X
BA U< 3 X
SC U< 3
1001 0 1210 G f> 1 X
M f> 1 X
BA f> 1 X
BA f> 1
1 1220 G f> 2 X
M f> 2 X
BA f> 2 X
SC f> 2
2 1230 G f> 3 X
M f> 3 X
BA f> 3 X
SC f> 3
3 1240 G f< 1 X
M f< 1 X
BA f < 1 X
4 1250 G f< 2 X
M f< 2 X
BA f< 2 X
| 39

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
SC f< 2
5 1260 G f< 3 X
M f< 3 X
BA f< 3 X
SC f< 3
BB/mains
6 1270 BB U> 1 X X X
7 1280 BB U> 2 X X X
8 1290 BB U> 3 X X X
9 1300 BB U< 1 X X X
10 1310 BB U< 2 X X X
11 1320 BB U< 3 X X X
12 1330 BB U< 4 X X X
13 1350 BB f> 1 X X X
14 1360 BB f> 2 X X X
15 1370 BB f> 3 X X X
1002 0 1380 BB f< 1 X X X
1 1390 BB f< 2 X X X
2 1400 BB f< 3 X X X
3 1410 BB f< 4 X X X
4 1420 df/dt (ROCOF) X X X
5 1430 Vector jump X X X
6 1440 BB pos. seq. volt. low X X X
Generator/mains/busbar A/shore
7 1450 G P> 1 X
M P> 1 X
BA P> 1 X
SC P> 1
8 1460 G P> 2 X
M P> 2 X
BA P> 2 X
SC P> 2
9 1470 G P> 3 X
M P> 3 X
BA P> 3 X
SC P> 3
10 1480 G P> 4 X
M P> 4 X
40 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
BA P> 4 X
SC P> 4
11 1490 G P> 5 X
M P> 5 X
BA P> 5 X
SC P> 5
12 1500 Unbalance curr. X X
13 1510 Unbalance volt. X X
14 1520 G -Q> X
M -Q> X
BA -Q> X
SC -Q>
15 1530 G Q> X
M Q> X
BA Q> X
SC Q>
1003 Generator/busbar
0 1540 Gen. neg. seq. I X
Mains neg. seq. I X
1 1550 Generator neg. seq. U X
Mains neg. seq. U X
Bus A neg. seq. U X
2 1570 Gen. zero seq. I X
Mains zero seq. I X
Bus A zero seq. I X
3 1580 Zero seq. U X
Mains zero seq. U X
Bus A zero seq. U X
Busbar/mains
4 1600 Directional overcurrent 1 X X X
5 1610 Directional overcurrent 2 X X X
6 1620 BB unbalance U X X X
7 1800 NEL 1 I> X X
8 1810 NEL 2 I> X X
9 1820 NEL 3 I> X X
10 1830 NEL 1 BB f< X X
11 1840 NEL 2 BB f< X X
12 1850 NEL 3 BB f< X X
| 41

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
13 1860 NEL 1 P> X X
14 1870 NEL 2 P> X X
15 1880 NEL 3 P> X X
1004 0 1890 NEL 1 P>> X X
1 1900 NEL 2 P>> X X
2 1910 NEL 3 P>> X X
3 1930 DG/SG max. parallel time
4 1940 DG/SC max. parallel time
5 1950 EDG/MSB max. parallel time
6 1960 Uq< 1
7 1970 Uq< 2
8 1980 GB ext. trip
9 1980 MB ext. trip
10 1650 Ut< 1 monitoring active
11 1660 Ut< 1
12 1690 Ut< 2 monitoring active
13 1700 Ut< 2
14 1760 G P dep. Q< X
15 1790 G P dep. Q> X
1005 Synchronising
0 2120 Synchronising window X X X
1 2130 Synchronising failure GB X
Synchronising failure TB X
Synchronising failure BTB X
2 2140 Synchronising failure MB X X
Synchronising failure SGB
Synchronising failure SCB
Synchronising failure TB
3 2150 Phase seq. failure X X X
4 2160 GB open failure X
TB open failure X
BTB open failure X
5 2170 GB close failure X
TB close failure X
BTB close failure X
6 2180 GB pos. failure X
TB pos. failure X
BTB pos. failure X
42 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
7 2200 MB open failure X X
SGB open failure
SCB open failure
TB open failure
8 2210 MB close failure X X
SGB close failure
SCB close failure
TB close failure
9 2220 MB pos. failure X X
SGB pos. failure
SCB pos. failure
TB pos. failure
10 2270 Close before excitation failure X
11 2190 Vector mismatch
12
13
14
15
1006 Regulation
0 2560 GOVERNOR regulation fail. X
1 2630 Deload error X
2 2680 AVR regulation fail. X
3 2960 P loadshare fail.
4 2970 Q loadshare fail.
5 2730 GOV mode undef.
6 2750 AVR mode undef.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1007 Digital alarms
| 43

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
5 3050 Digital alarm input
13
14
15
13
14
15
44 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
14
15
1010 0 3400 Multi-in. alarm 102 102 102
1 3410 Multi-in. alarm 105 105 105
2 3420 Multi-in. alarm 108 108 108
3 3401 Wire fail. 102 102 102
4 3411 Wire fail. 105 105 105
5 3421 Wire fail. 108 108 108
(Emergency stop)
13
14
15
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
| 45

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
14
15
1012 Analogue input alarm
0 4000 4-20mA 91.1 91.1 91.1
1 4010 4-20mA 91.2 91.2 91.2
3 4030 4-20mA 93.1 93.1 93.1
4 4040 4-20mA 93.2 93.2 93.2
6 4060 4-20mA 95.1 95.1 95.1
7 4070 4-20mA 95.2 95.2 95.2
9 4090 4-20mA 97.1 97.1 97.1
10 4100 4-20mA 97.2 97.2 97.2
12
13
14
15
1013 Multi-functional input
0 4120 4-20mA 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4130 4-20mA 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4140 V DC 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4150 V DC 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4160 PT 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4170 PT 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4180 VDO oil 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4190 VDO oil 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4200 VDO water 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4210 VDO water 102.2 102.2 102.2
0 4220 VDO fuel 102.1 102.1 102.1
1 4230 VDO fuel 102.2 102.2 102.2
2 4240 W. fail. 102 102 102
3 4250 4-20mA 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4260 4-20mA 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4270 V DC 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4280 V DC 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4290 PT 105.1 105.1 105.1
46 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
4 4300 PT 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4310 VDO oil 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4320 VDO oil 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4330 VDO water 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4340 VDO water 105.2 105.2 105.2
3 4350 VDO fuel 105.1 105.1 105.1
4 4360 VDO fuel 105.2 105.2 105.2
5 4370 W. fail. 105 105 105
6 4380 4-20mA 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4390 4-20mA 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4400 V DC 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4410 V DC 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4420 PT 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4430 PT 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4440 VDO oil 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4450 VDO oil 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4460 VDO water 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4470 VDO water 108.2 108.2 108.2
6 4480 VDO fuel 108.1 108.1 108.1
7 4490 VDO fuel 108.2 108.2 108.2
8 4500 W. fail. 108 108 108
Analogue input alarm
9 4510 Overspeed 1 X
10 4520 Overspeed 2 X
11 4530 Crank failure X
12 4540 Running feedback failure X
13 4550 MPU wire failure X
14 4560 Hz/V failure X
15 4570 Start failure X
1014 0 4580 Stop failure X
1 4960 U< aux. term. 1 1 1
2 4970 U> aux. term. 1 1 1
3 4980 U< aux. term. 98 98 98
4 4990 U> aux. term. 98 98 98
5 4590 Underspeed 1 X
6
7
8
| 47

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1015 0 6110 Service timer 1 X
1 6120 Service timer 2 X
2 6270 Stop coil wire break X
3 6280 Internal communication failure X X X
4 6330 Engine heater 1 X
5 6410 Battery test X
6 6440 Battery asymmetry 1 X X X
7 6450 Battery asymmetry 2 X X X
8 6470 Max. ventilation 1 X
9 6480 Max. ventilation 2 X
10 6500 Blk. swbd. error X
11 6510 Stp. swbd. error X
12 6540 Unit not in auto X X X
13 6550 Fuel pump logic X
14 6370 Not in remote
15
1016 Output
0 5000 Relay 5 5 5
1 5010 Relay 8 8 8
2 5020 Relay 11 11 11
3 5030 Relay 14 14 14
4 5040 Relay 17 17 17
5 5050 Relay T20 T20 T20
6 5060 Relay T21 T21 T21
7 5070 Relay 29 29 29
8 5080 Relay 31 31 31
9 5090 Relay 33 33 33
10 5100 Relay 35 35 35
11 5110 Relay 57 57 57
12 5120 Relay 59 59 59
13 5130 Relay 61 61 61
48 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
14 5140 Relay 63 63 63
15
1017 0 5150 Relay 65 65 65
1 5160 Relay 67 67 67
2 5170 Relay 69 69 69
3 5180 Relay 71 71 71
4 5190 Relay 90 90 90
5 5200 Relay 92 92 92
6 5210 Relay 94 94 94
7 5220 Relay 96 96 96
8 5230 Relay 126 126 126
9 5240 Relay 128 128 128
10 5250 Relay 130 130 130
11 5260 Relay 132 132 132
12 Run. coil relay X
13 Start prepare X
14 Start relay X
15 Stop coil relay X
1018 Status
0 Mains failure X X
Main busbar failure
1 MB pos. ON X X
SGB pos. ON
SCB pos. ON
TB pos. ON
2 DG ramp down X
3 Start regulation X
4 GB pos. ON X
TB pos. ON X
BTB pos. ON X
5 GB synchronising X
TB synchronising X
BTB synchronising X
6 Engine running X
7 Running detect. timer expired X
8 4560 DG Hz/V OK, timer expired X
9 6410 Battery test X
10 Printing log X X X
| 49

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
11 GB position OFF X
TB position OFF X
BTB position OFF X
12 MB position OFF X X
SGB position OFF
SCB position OFF
TB position OFF
13 BB Hz/V OK X X X
14 MB synchronising X
15
1019 General/Modes
0 Block mode X X
1 Manual mode X
SWBD mode
2 Semi auto mode X X X
3 Auto mode X X X
4 Test X X
5 Island X X
6 AMF X X
7 Peak shaving X X
8 Fixed power X X
9 Mains power export X X
10 Load takeover X X
Genset group X
12 DG supply
13 SG/SC supply
14 Reserved
15 AMF active X X
1020 EIC Alarms Qc4002™ MkII, Perkins engines
0 7570 EIC communication error X
1 7580 EIC warning X
2 7590 EIC shutdown X
3 7600 EIC overspeed X
4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1 X
6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1 X
50 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1 X
10 7670 EIC coolant level 1 X
EIC Alarms Qc4002™ MkII, EMR2 – EMR3 –
Deutz engines
EIC Alarms Qc4002™ MkII, Generic J1939
EIC Alarms Qc4002™ MkII, JDEC – John
Deere engines
| 51

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
EIC Alarms Qc4002™ MkII, Volvo penta
engines
1024 EIC Alarms engine controller (DM1), Perkins
engines
1 EIC low oil pressure, warning X
2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown X
3 EIC boost pressure, warning X
4 EIC high coolant temperature, warning X
5 EIC low coolant level, shutdown X
6 EIC high inlet air temperature, warning X
7 EIC fuel temperature, warning X
8 EIC ECM yellow lamp, warning X
9 EIC ECM red lamp, shutdown X
10 EIC overspeed, warning X
11 EIC overspeed, shutdown X
12 EIC protection X
13 EIC malfunction X
EIC Alarms engine controller (DM1), EMR2 –
EMR3 – Deutz engines
0 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown X
52 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
2 EIC overspeed, shutdown X
3 EIC EMR shutdown (LS: lamp status) X
4 EIC EMR warning (LS: lamp status) X
5 EIC communication error X
6 EIC protection X
7 EIC malfunction X
EIC Alarms engine controller (DM1), Generic
J1939
1 EIC yellow X
2 EIC red X
3 EIC protection X
4 EIC malfunction X
EIC Alarms engine controller (DM1), JDEC –
John Deere engines
0 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown X
2 EIC fuel temperature, shutdown x
3 EIC fuel control valve, shutdown X
4 EIC ECU failure, shutdown X
5 EIC oil pressure, warning X
6 EIC intake manifold, warning X
7 EIC coolant temperature, warning X
8 EIC fuel injection pump, warning X
9 EIC JDEC shutdown (LS: lamp status) X
10 EIC JDEC warning (LS: lamp status) X
12 EIC protection X
EIC Alarms (DM1), Volvo penta engines
0 EIC overspeed, warning X
1 EIC oil pressure, warning X
2 EIC oil temperature, warning x
3 EIC high coolant temperature, warning X
4 EIC low coolant level, warning X
5 EIC fuel pressure, warning X
6 EIC ECM yellow lamp, warning X
7 EIC ECM red lamp, shutdown X
8 EIC high inlet air temperature, warning X
| 53

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Content
10 EIC battery voltage, warning X
11 EIC low oil level, warning X
12 EIC protection X
1025 Reserved X
1026 Reserved X
-
1028
54 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
1031 Internal communications
0
1 CAN 1 missing ID 1 1 1
1032 0 CAN 1 missing ID 16 16 16
1
1033 0 CAN 2 missing ID 15 15 15
2 Communication error ext. X X X
3
4
| 55

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1034 0
1 Ext. comm. errror ID 1 1 1
1035 0 Ext. comm. errror ID 16 16 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
56 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
12
13
14
15
1036 External inputs
0 12000 Analogue in. 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
1 12010 Analogue in. 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
2 12020 W. fail. analogue 1 1 1 1
3 12030 Analogue in. 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
4 12040 Analogue in. 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
5 12050 W. fail. analogue 2 2 2 2
6 12060 Analogue in. 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
7 12070 Analogue in. 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
8 12080 W. fail. analogue 3 3 3 3
9 12090 Analogue in. 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1
10 12100 Analogue in. 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
11 12110 W. fail. analogue 4 4 4 4
12 12120 Analogue in. 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
13 12130 Analogue in. 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2
14 12140 W. fail. analogue 5 5 5 5
15 12150 Analogue in. 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
1037 0 12160 Analogue in. 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2
1 12170 W. fail. analogue 6 6 6 6
2 12180 Analogue in. 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1
3 12190 Analogue in. 7.2 7.2 7.2 7.2
4 12200 W. fail. analogue 7 7 7 7
5 12210 Analogue in. 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
6 12220 Analogue in. 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
7 12230 W. fail. analogue 8 8 8 8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1038 0 12540 External digital input 1 1 1
1 12550 External digital input 2 2 2
| 57

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
1039 0 12790 External digital output 1 1 1
1 12800 External digital output 2 2 2
1040 0 CAN 1 missing ID no. 1 1 1
1 CAN 1 missing ID no. 2 2 2
58 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
1041 0 CAN 1 missing ID no. 17 17 17
1042 0 CAN 1 missing ID no. 33 33 33
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
| 59

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
1043 0 CAN 2 missing ID no. 1 1 1
1044 0 CAN 2 missing ID no. 17 17 17
1045 0 CAN 2 missing ID no. 33 33 33
60 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1046 0 4800 4-20 mA alarm no. 127.1 127.1 127.1
1 4810 4-20 mA alarm no. 127.2 127.2 127.2
2 4820 Wire fail analogue input 127 127 127
3 4830 4-20 mA alarm no. 129.1 129.1 129.1
4 4840 4-20 mA alarm no. 129.2 129.2 129.2
6 4860 4-20 mA alarm no. 131.1 131.1 131.1
7 4870 4-20 mA alarm no. 131.2 131.2 131.2
9 4890 4-20 mA alarm no. 133.1 133.1 133.1
10 4900 4-20 mA alarm no. 133.2 133.2 133.2
12
13
14
15
1047 0 GG group 1 missing X
1 GG group 2 missing X
| 61

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
0 GG mains 17 missing X
Reserved
Reserved
0 Virtual event 1 X X X
62 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Channel
Address
Bit
Function
0 Not used
0 G In> Inverse
1 G Ie> Inverse
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 1710 G unbalance I 2 X
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
| 63
5.4 Power management measurement table (read only) (function code 04h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
PMS option – Power Management
1500 Total power X
1501 Available power X
1502 Total nominal power X
1503 Total genset power X
1504 Total reactive power X
1505 Number of gensets X
1506 Mains selection X
1507 Load-dependent stop X
1508 Load-dependent start X
1509 Stop genset calculation X
1510 Nominal power genset 1
1526 Power genset 1
1527 Power genset 2
1528 Power genset 3
1529 Power genset 4
1530 Power genset 5
1531 Power genset 6
1532 Power genset 7
1533 Power genset 8
1534 Power genset 9
1535 Power genset 10
64 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1542 Reactive power genset 1
1558
1559
1560 Power, mains 1A X
1561 Power, mains 1B X
1562 Power, mains 2A X
1563 Power, mains 2B X
1564
1565 Reactive power mains 1A X
1566 Reactive power mains 1B X
1567 Reactive power mains 2A X
1568 Reactive power mains 2B X
1569 Power mains 17 X
Power shaft 17
Power shore 17
Power shaft 18
Power shore 18
Power shaft 19
| 65

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
Power shore 19
Power shaft 20
Power shore 20
1585 Reactive power mains 17 X
Reactive power shaft 17
Reactive power shore 17
66 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1601 Power bus tie breaker 33 X
1609 Reactive power bus tie breaker 33 X
1617 Plant mode mains 17 X
1633 Bus power mains 17 X
| 67

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1649 0 ID 17 mains transducer-configured X X X
1 ID 18 mains transducer-configured X X X
1650 0 ID 17 TB transducer-configured X X X
1 ID 18 TB transducer-configured X X X
68 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1651 0 ID 33 BTB transducer-configured X X X
1 ID 34 BTB transducer-configured X X X
1652 0 ID 33 BTB controlled X X X
1 ID 34 BTB controlled X X X
1653 ID 17 nominal power X X X
1669 0 ID 1 Transducer-configured
1 ID 2 Transducer-configured
| 69

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1670 ID 1 Transducer-measured value
1671 ID 2 Transducer- measured value
1680 ID 11Transducer-measured value
1649-
Reserved
1699
70 |
User Manual
5.5 Power management alarm and status table (read only) (function code 04h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1700 PMS option – Power Management
TB available X
0
Shore unit available
Mains unit available X
1
SG unit available
Any MB pos. ON X
2
Any SGB/SCB pos ON
Any MB pos. OFF X
3
Any SGB/SCB pos OFF
TB pos. ON (Mains Command Unit) X
4
SCB pos ON
TB pos. OFF (Mains Command Unit) X
5
SCB pos OFF
Any GB pos. ON X
6
Any GB pos ON on Main BB
Any GB pos. OFF X
7
Any GB pos OFF on Main BB
8 Any TB pos. ON X
9 Any TB pos. OFF X
10 Any BTB pos. ON X
10 Any BTB pos. ON in section
Any BTB pos. OFF X
11
Any BTB pos. OFF in section
12
13
14
15
1701 0 GB pos. ON ID 1 X X X
1 GB pos. ON ID 2 X X X
| 71

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1702 0 GB pos. OFF ID 1 X X X
1 GB pos. OFF ID 2 X X X
1703 0 DG Hz/V OK, ID 1 X X X
1 DG Hz/V OK, ID 2 X X X
9 DG Hz/V OK, ID10 X X X
72 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1704 0 Mains OK, single mains X X X
1 Mains OK, mains 1A X X X
2 Mains OK, mains 1B X X X
3 Mains OK, mains 2A X X X
4 Mains OK, mains 2B X X X
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1705 0 Ready for auto start, ID 1 X X X
1 Ready for auto start, ID 2 X X X
1706 0 Mains not in semi, single mains X X X
1 Mains not in semi, mains 1A X X X
2 Mains not in semi, mains 1B X X X
3 Mains not in semi, mains 2A X X X
4 Mains not in semi, mains 2B X X X
5
6
| 73

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1707 0 Any alarms, ID 1 X X X
1 Any alarms, ID 2 X X X
1708 0 Any alarms, single mains X X X
1 Any alarms, mains 1A X X X
2 Any alarms, mains 1B X X X
3 Any alarms, mains 2A X X X
4 Any alarms, mains 2B X X X
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
74 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
14
15
1709 0 Engine running, ID 1 X X X
1 Engine running, ID 2 X X X
1710 0 MB pos. ON, single mains X X X
1 MB pos. ON, mains 1A X X X
2 MB pos. ON, mains 1B X X X
3 MB pos. ON, mains 2A X X X
4 MB pos. ON, mains 2B X X X
5 MB pos. OFF, single mains X X X
6 MB pos. OFF, mains 1A X X X
7 MB pos. OFF, mains 1B X X X
8 MB pos. OFF, mains 2A X X X
9 MB pos. OFF, mains 2B X X X
10
11
12
13
14
15
1711 0 GB synchronising, ID 1 X X X
1 GB synchronising, ID 2 X X X
| 75

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1712 0 Mains OK, ID 17 X X X
Shaft OK, ID 17
Shore OK, ID 17
1 Mains OK, ID 18 X X X
Shaft OK, ID 18
Shore OK, ID 18
Shaft OK, ID 19
Shore OK, ID 19
Shaft OK, ID 20
Shore OK, ID 20
1713 0 Mains not in semi 17 X X X
1 Mains not in semi 18 X X X
76 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1714 0 Any alarms, mains ID 17 X X X
Any alarms, Shaft ID 17
Any alarms, Shore ID 17
Any alarms, mains ID 18 X X X
1 Any alarms, Shaft ID 18
2 Any alarms, mains ID 19 X X X
1715 0 MB pos. ON, ID 17 X X X
SGB/SCB ON, ID 17
1 MB pos. ON, ID 18 X X X
| 77

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
SGB ON, ID 18 X X
SGB/SCB ON, ID 19 X X
SGB/SCB ON, ID 20 X X
1716 0 MB pos. OFF, ID 17 X X X
SGB/SCB pos OFF, ID 17
1 MB pos. OFF, ID 18 X X X
1717 0 Mains failure, ID 17 X X X
1 Mains failure, ID 18 X X X
78 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1718 0 MB synchronising, ID 17 X X X
SGB/SCB synchronising, ID 17
1 MB synchronising, ID 18 X X X
1719 0 TB pos. ON, ID 17 X X X
1 TB pos. ON, ID 18 X X X
| 79

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1720 0 TB pos. OFF, ID 17 X X X
1 TB pos. OFF, ID 18 X X X
1721 0 TB synchronising, ID 17 X X X
1 TB synchronising, ID 18 X X X
80 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1722 0 Any alarms, BTB ID 33 X X X
1 Any alarms, BTB ID 34 X X X
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1723 0 BTB pos. ON, ID 33 X X X
1 BTB pos. ON, ID 34 X X X
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1724 0 BTB pos. OFF, ID 33 X X X
1 BTB pos. OFF, ID 34 X X X
| 81

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1725 0 BTB synchronising, ID 33 X X X
1 BTB synchronising, ID 34 X X X
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1726 0 Ext. comm. error, ID 1 X X X
1 Ext. comm. error, ID 2 X X X
82 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1729 0 EDG TB pos. ON, ID 1
1 EDG TB pos. ON, ID 2
| 83

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1730 0 EDG TB pos. OFF, ID 1
1 EDG TB pos. OFF, ID 2
1731 0 Shaft/shore running ID 17
1 Shaft/shore running ID 18
4
5
6
7
8
84 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1732 0 BB Hz/V OK, ID 1 X X X
1 BB Hz/V OK, ID 2 X X X
| 85

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1735 0 BB Hz/V present, ID 1 X X X
1 BB Hz/V present, ID 2 X X X
86 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1738 0 BA Hz/V OK, ID 32 X X X
1 BA Hz/V OK, ID 33 X X X
1739 0 BA Hz/V present, ID 1 X
Mains present, ID 1 X
DG Hz/V present, ID 1 X
1 BA Hz/V present, ID 2 X
| 87

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
88 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
| 89

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr.
Bit
Function
1742 0 EDG TB synchronising ID 1
1 EDG TB synchronising ID 2
1743
- Reserved
1999
90 |
User Manual
5.6 Control register table read (03h)/write (10h)

NOTE: Control commands must only be used to send a command. They cannot be used to monitor bit status.

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
0 Power regulator setpoint 0...100% of nominal power.
X X
Activated in menu 7501
1 PF regulator setpoint 60...100 stated as PF value/100. The value 100 means PF = 1.
X
2 Reactive power regulator +/-100% of nominal power. A negative value means
setpoint capacitive reactive power, and a positive value means
X
inductive reactive power. Activated in menu 7505
3 Frequency regulator +/-100% corresponding to +/-10.0% of nominal frequency.

X
setpoint Activated in menu 7502
4 Voltage regulator setpoint +/-100% corresponding to +/-10.0% of nominal voltage.
X
5 Control command Bit 0 This bit must be 1 when writing the command
word. If the bit is 0, the control command is X X X
ignored.
Bit 1 Remote start X X
Bit 2 Remote GB ON X X
Bit 2 Remote TB ON X
Bit 3 Remote GB OFF X X
Bit 3 Remote TB OFF X
Bit 4 Remote stop X X
Bit 5 Reset analogue regulation outputs X X
Bit 6 Start + sync. (semi)
Bit 7 Alarm inhibit 1 X X X
Bit 10 Alarm ack. This bit is automatically reset X X X
Bit 11 Nominal setting 1 X X X
Bit 15 Deload (semi)

6 Control command Bit 0 This bit must be 1 when writing the command
word. If the bit is 0, the control command is X X X
ignored.
| 91

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
Island X X X
Bit 1
DG supply
Automatic mains failure (AMF) X X X
Bit 2
SG supply
Peak shaving X X X
Bit 3
SHORE supply
Bit 4 Fixed power X X X
Mains power export (MPE) X X X
Bit 5
SPLIT
Load takeover (LTO) X X X
Bit 6
Connect to DG supply
Bit 7 Connect to SG supply
Bit 8 Connect to SHORE supply
Bit 9 MB/SG/SC/EDG-TB ON X X X
Bit 10 MB/SG/SC/EDG-TB OFF X X X
Bit 11 Auto start/stop X X X
Bit 12 Manual mode X X
Bit 13 Auto mode X X X
Bit 14 Semi-auto mode X X X
Bit 15 Test mode X X X
7 Bit 0 This bit must be 1 when writing the command word.
X X X
If the bit is 0, the control command is ignored.
Bit 1 External frequency control X
Bit 2 External voltage control X
Bit 3 External power control X X
Bit 4 External reactive power control X
Bit 5 External power factor control X
Bit 6 Capacitive PF X X
Bit 7 Base load X
Bit 8 1. priority X X
Bit 9 Application 1 X X X
Bit 13 Battery test X
Bit 14 Event printer X X
Bit 15 Synchronise clock to 4:00 AM X X X
X X X
If the bit is 0, the control command is ignored
Bit 1 Virtual 1 X X X
92 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
X X X
X X X
| 93

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description

Bit 1 Fixed frequency
Bit 2 Fixed P
Bit 3 P load sharing
Bit 4 Frequency droop
Bit 5 Ext. GOV setpoint
Bit 6 Fixed voltage
Bit 7 Fixed Q
Bit 8 Fixed PF
Bit 9 Q load sharing
Bit 10 Voltage droop
Bit 11 Ext. AVR setpoint
Bit 12 Remote
Bit 13 Local
Bit 14 Deload
Bit 15 Start sync./control
Bit 1 Manual GOV up
Bit 2 Manual GOV down
Bit 3 Manual AVR up
Bit 4 Manual AVR down
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
94 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
X
Bit 1 Enable external frequency control X
Bit 2 Disable external frequency control X
Bit 3 Enable external voltage control X
Bit 4 Disable external voltage control X
Bit 5 Enable external power control X
Bit 6 Disable external power control X
Bit 7 Enable external VAr control X
Bit 8 Disable external VAr control X
Bit 9 Enable external CosPhi control X
Bit10 Disable external CosPhi control X
Bit 11 Enable PM base load X
Bit 12 Disable PM base load X
58000 Year 2003-2099 X X X
58001 Month 1-12 X X X
58002 Date 1-31 X X X
58003 Day 1…7 (Monday…Sunday) X X X
58004 Hour 0-23 X X X
58005 Min. 0-59 X X X
58006 Sec. 0-59 X X X
NOTE: All control bits are automatically reset by the Qc4002™ MkII unit except for ”Auto start/stop” (register 6, bit 11).
| 95
5.7 Command flags table (write only) (function code 0Fh)

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
0 Remote start X
1 Remote GB ON X
Remote TB ON X
Remote BTB ON X
2 Remote GB OFF X
Remote TB OFF X
Remote BTB OFF X
3 Remote stop X
4 Alarm inhibit 1 X X X
7 Reset analogue regulation outputs X
8 Reserved
9 Alarm ack. X X X
10 Nominal setting 1 X X X
14 Start+sync. (semi)
15 Deload/stop (semi)
16 Island X X
DG supply
17 Automatic mains failure (AMF) X X
SG 1 supply
18 Peak shaving X X
SG 2 supply
19 Fixed power X X
SHORE supply
20 Mains power export (MPE) X X
SPLIT
21 Load takeover (LTO) X X
22 DG supply
23 SG/SC supply
24 MB/SG/SC/EDG TB ON X X
25 MB/SG/SC/EDG TB OFF X X
26 Auto start/stop X
96 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
27 Manual mode X
28 Semi-auto mode X
29 Auto mode X
30 Test mode X
31 External frequency control X
32 External voltage control X
33 External power control X
34 External reactive power control X
35 External power factor control X
36 Capacitive PF X X
37 Base load X
38 1. priority X X
39 Reserved
40 Application 1 X X X
44 Battery test X
45 Event printer X X X
46 Synchronise clock to 4:00 a.m. X X X
47 Reserved
| 97

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
80 Fixed frequency
81 Fixed P
82 P load sharing
83 Frequency droop
84 Ext. GOV setpoint
85 Fixed voltage
86 Fixed Q
87 Fixed PF
88 Q load sharing
89 Voltage droop
91 Remote
92 Local
93 Deload
95 Reserved
96 Manual GOV up
97 Manual GOV down
98 Manual AVR up
99 Manual AVR down
123 Enable external frequency control X
124 Disable external frequency control X
125 Enable external voltage control X
126 Disable external voltage control X
127 Enable external power control X
98 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content Description
128 Disable external power control X
129 Enable external VAr control X
130 Disable external VAr control X
131 Enable external CosPhi control X
132 Disable external CosPhi control X
133 Enable PM base load X
134 Disable PM base load X
NOTE: All flags are automatically reset by the Qc4002™ MkII unit except for ”Auto start/stop” (flag, address 26).
| 99
5.8 Status flags table (read only) (function code 02h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content
0 GB position ON X
TB position ON X
BTB position ON X
1 MB position ON X X
SGB position ON
SCB position ON
EDG-TB position ON
2 Reserved
3 Running X
4 Generator voltage/frequency OK X
5 Mains failure/main busbar failure X X
6 Block mode X X
7 Manual mode X
SWBD control
8 Semi-auto mode X
9 Auto mode X
10 Test mode X X
11 Remote
12 Local
13 Island X X
DG supply
14 Automatic mains failure (AMF) X X
SG 1 supply
15 Peak shaving X X
SG 2 supply
16 Fixed power X X
SHORE supply
17 Mains power export (MPE) X X
SPLIT
18 Load takeover (LTO) X X
20 Any alarm DG1 X X X
100 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
Address
Content
28 Any alarm mains (Mains Command Unit) X X X
29 Battery test X
30 Event printer X
31 Ready auto-start DG1 X
39 Ready
40 Regulator ON
41 Fixed frequency
42 P load sharing
43 Frequency droop
44 Ext. GOV setpoint
45 Fixed voltage
46 Fixed Q
47 Fixed PF
48 Q load sharing
49 Voltage droop
51 Deload
| 101
5.9 Digital input table (read only 02h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr. Description Comments
22500 Digital input 97 97 97 Option 7x Binary Input
22501 Digital input 96 96 96
22507 Digital input 133 133 133 Option 7x Binary Input
22508 Digital input 132 132 132
22509 Digital input 131 131 131
22510 Digital input 130 130 130
22511 Digital input 129 129 129
22512 Digital input 128 128 128
22513 Digital input 127 127 127
22514 Digital input
22515 Stop coil wire break
22516 Emergency stop
22517
22518
22519
22520
22521
22522
22523
22524
22525
22526
22527
22528 Digital input 43 43 43 13x Binary Input,
22529 Digital input 44 44 44 4x Relay Output
22530 Digital input 45 45 45 (Standard fo r
Qc4002™ MkII
genset and mains,
22532 Digital input 47 47 47 option for Qc4002™
22533 Digital input 48 48 48 MkII bus tie)
102 |
User Manual

Qc4002™ MkII
22541 Digital input 23 23 23 Standard
22546
22547
22548
22549
22550
22551
22552
22553
22554
22555
22556
22557
22558
22559
22560
22561
22562
22563
22564
22565
22566
22567
22568
22569
22570
22571
22572
22573
22574
22575
22576
22577
| 103

Qc4002™ MkII
22578
22579
22580
22581
22582
22583 Digital input (emer. stop) 118 118 118 Standard
22584 Digital input 117 117 117
22585 Digital input 116 116 116
22586 Digital input 115 115 115
22587 Digital input 114 114 114
22588 Digital input 113 113 113
22589 Digital input 112 112 112
22590 Stop coil superv. (M4) 123 123 123
22591 Multi-func. input cable fail. 108 108 108
22594 External digital input 1 1 1 Option External I/O
22595 External digital input 2 2 2 Modules
22596 External digital input 3 3 3
104 |
User Manual
5.10 Digital input table (read only 01h)

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr Description Comments
23000 Relay 65 65 65 Option 4x Relay output
23001 Relay 67 67 67 (only for Qc4002™
MkII mains and bus tie)
23002 Relay 69 69 69
23003 Relay 71 71 71
23004 Relay 132 132 132 Option (only for
23005 Relay 130 130 130 Qc4002™ MkII mains
and bus tie)
23006 Relay 128 128 128
23007 Relay 126 126 126
23008 Relay 96 96 96 Option (only for
23009 Relay 94 94 94 Qc4002™ MkII mains
and bus tie)
23010 Relay 92 92 92
23011 Relay 90 90 90
23012 Relay
23013
23014
23015
23016 Relay 57 57 57 13x Binary Input,
23017 Relay 59 59 59 4x Relay Output
23018 Relay 61 61 61 (Standard for Qc4002™
MkII genset and mains,
23019 Relay 63 63 63 option for Qc4002™
MkII bus tie)
23020
23021
23022
23023
23024
23025 Relay 5 5 5 Standard
23026 Relay 8 8 8
23027 Relay 11 11 11
23028 Relay 14 14 14
23029 Relay 17 17 17
23030 Relay T20 T20 T20
23031 Relay T21 T21 T21
23032
23033
23034
| 105

Qc4002™ MkII
Addr Description Comments
23035
23036
23037
23038
23039
23040
23041
23042
23043
23044
23045
23046
23047
23048
23049 Run. coil X Stadard
23050 Start prepare X
23051 Start relay (crank) X
23052 Stop coil X
Option Power
23053 LED CAN B X X X
Management
Option MTU&J1939
23054 LED CAN A X EIC (only Qc4002™
MkII genset)
23055 LED USB X X X
23056 External digital output 1 1 1 Option External I/O
23057 External digital output 2 2 2 Modules
23058 External digital output 3 3 3
106 |
User Manual
6 Parameter setting
6.1 Parameter reading and writing
The entire setting of parameters can be made using the Modbus. The combination of function and address areas
used is described below:
6.1.1 Function 01(01hex) read/write flag status

Reads the ON/OFF status of discrete flags in the slave unit.
Address area for reading of status flags:
Data to request Table Address area
Enable Parameter table 2000-3999
NOTE: The maximum number of data query is limited by the length of the actual table.
6.1.2 Function 02(02hex) read flag status

Reads the ON/OFF status of discrete flags in the slave unit.
Address area for reading of status flags:
Alarm active Parameter table 4000-5999
Alarm acknowledge Parameter table 6000-7999
Timer output Parameter table 8000-9999
Timer running Parameter table 10000-11999
NOTE: The maximum number of data query is limited by the length of the actual table
6.1.3 Function 04(04hex) read registers

Reads the binary of registers in the slave unit.
Address area for reading of registers:
Timers minimum Parameter table 2000-3999
Timers maximum Parameter table 4000-5999
Output a minimum Parameter table 6000-7999
Output a maximum Parameter table 8000-9999
Output b minimum Parameter table 10000-11999
Output b maximum Parameter table 12000-13999
Fail class minimum Parameter table 14000-15999
Fail class maximum Parameter table 16000-17999
Timers elapsed time Parameter table 20000-21999
| 107
6.1.4 Function 15(0Fhex) write multiple flags, function 5(05hex) write single flag
Writes each flag (0 x reference) in a sequence of flags to either ON or OFF.
Address area for writing of status flags
Ack. alarm Parameter table 6000-7999
6.1.5 Function 16(10hex) write multiple register, function 6(06hex) write single register
Writes values into a sequence of registers.
Address area for writing of registers
Timers used Parameter table 2000-3999
Values used Parameter table 4000-4999
Output a Parameter table 10000-11999
Output b Parameter table 12000-13999
Fail class used Parameter table 14000-15999
Inhibit Parameter table 18000-19999
6.2 Parameter addresses

Channel and Modbus address numbers can be found in the utility software parameter list for the unit in question.
6.2.1 Limitations
It is possible to write to channels where the option is not activated. It is not possible to enable the channel. E.g. if an
attempt is made to write a ”1” to the enable flag, then the ”1” will be discarded, and the enable flag remains ”0”. It
is not possible to write to offset address 0. These values are used for DEIF internal version control.
108 |
User Manual
6.2.2 Examples
Write nominal frequency (6011), offset 258, 60Hz
ID = 1, 60Hz = 600Hz/10 = 0258h
Address 4000 + 258 = 4258d = 10A2h
Tx: 01h 10h 10h A2h 00h 01h 02h 02h 58h AEh 49h
Rx: 01h 10h 10h A2h 00h 01h A4h EBh
Read nominal frequency (6011) offset 258, 60Hz

Tx: 01h 03h 10h A2h 00h 01h 21h 28h
Rx: 01h 03h 02h 02h 58h B8h DEh
Read 0258h = 600d
| 109
110 |
User Manual
Qc4002™ MkII – M-Logic

DESCRIPTION OF M-LOGIC
CONTENTS
1. DELIMITATION .......................................................................................................................................2
1.1 Scope of M-Logic ...............................................................................................................................2

2.1.3 Safety issues ............................................................................................................................................. 3
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.........................................................................................................................4
3.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................4
4. CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................5
4.1 Starting ..............................................................................................................................................5

4.1.1 Starting the M-Logic .................................................................................................................................. 5
4.2 Read/write .........................................................................................................................................6
4.3 Save/open ..........................................................................................................................................6
4.4 Basic functions ...................................................................................................................................6
4.4.1 Events A, B and C ..................................................................................................................................... 7
4.4.2 Operators .................................................................................................................................................. 8
4.4.3 Enable the rule .......................................................................................................................................... 8
4.4.4 Output ....................................................................................................................................................... 8
4.5 Definitions..........................................................................................................................................9
4.6 Examples ...........................................................................................................................................9
4.6.1 Virtual events ............................................................................................................................................ 9
4.6.2 Set/reset function .................................................................................................................................... 10
4.6.3 Toggle function ....................................................................................................................................... 10
4.6.4 Controlling a relay output with one single AOP button............................................................................ 11
4.6.5 Power up in a specific mode ................................................................................................................... 12
4.6.6 Flip-flop function ...................................................................................................................................... 12
5 LIST OF EVENTS AND COMMANDS...................................................................................................... 13
5.1 Events .............................................................................................................................................. 13

5.2 Operators ......................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3 Outputs ............................................................................................................................................ 21
| 1
Qc4002™ MkII Control Panel – M-Logic
1. Delimitation
1.1 Scope of M-Logic
2|
User Manual


be lost.
Disclaimer
2.1.3 Safety issues



| 3
3. General description
3.1 Introduction
The M-Logic is a small logic controller incorporated in the Qc4002™ MkII unit. Even though it is a logic
controller, it must not be confused with a PLC. The M-Logic can be compared with a PLC limited in functionality
and can only be used for uncomplicated tasks.
The M-Logic can carry out binary control functions only; there are no possibilities for analogue reading and/or
control functions.
4|
User Manual
4. Configuration
4.1 Starting
4.1.1 Starting the M-Logic

Once the USW has been started, there will be an icon on the lower left-hand side to activate M-Logic
Click the icon, and the following screen appears:
| 5
4.2 Read/write
When the M-Logic screen is shown, the M-Logic toolbar appears at the top of the screen. The toolbar has two
buttons which are used to write and read the M-Logic configuration to and from the unit.
The M-Logic configuration can also be saved/opened to/from a file using the default save/open buttons.
Read M-Logic settings from the unit

Activating this button will read all M-Logic settings from the unit to the USW.
Write M-Logic settings to the unit

Activating this button will write the M-Logic settings from the USW to the unit.
4.3 Save/open
Save
Activating this button makes it possible to save the M-Logic configuration to file (part of
the general Multi-line 2 configuration file “.USW”).
Open
Activating this button makes it possible to open a previously saved logics file.
4.4 Basic functions

The M-Logic consists of a number of “lines”, Logic 1, Logic 2 and so on. Each of these lines have three event
settings, two operator settings, one enable tick box and one output setting.
The Logic line can be collapsed or expanded using this button. The free text will still be shown.
NOTE: The free text is stored in the .usw file, but not in the product itself.
6|
User Manual
The available functions are:
4.4.1 Events A, B and C

These are used to trigger the logic.
Note that for each event, the function "NOT" can be selected to get an inverted function.
When opening the roll-down window of the events, this window appears:
Event Description
Alarms: Use an alarm to activate.
Limits: Same as alarms, only with no time delay on binary inputs.
Events: Events that are not alarms, e.g. "Engine running".
Cmd timers: If the activating (triggering) event is required to be a pulse, these can be used (1 sec. pulse).
CAN inputs: Status of M-logic functions broadcasted on the power management CAN line.
Logic: Can be TRUE or FALSE. TRUE means always, FALSE means never.
Inputs: Direct activation of a binary input. The availability of binary inputs is option-dependent.
Modes: Running modes and plant modes, e.g. "AUTO".
Relays: Activation when a relay activates. The availability of relay outputs is option-dependent.
Virtual events: A number of internal (virtual) events that can be activated from another logic line. By using these
virtual events, the number of activating (triggering) events can be expanded from the three available in
each logic line to, in theory, an unlimited number of events.
Fail class: The event activates upon activation of any alarm with the chosen fail class, e.g. "Shutdown".
EIC event: Events that are related to engine communication.
This event is option dependent:
- MTU & J1939 EIC (option for Qc4002™ MkII genset) or
- J1939 EIC (standard for Qc4002™ MkII genset)
Power management: Status related to power management, e.g. "All GB on".
Heavy consumers: Status related to heavy consumers, e.g. "HC01 request ID01" or "HC02 ack. ID05".
| 7
4.4.2 Operators
Two operators are available, and they can be:
“OR” (any operator activates the function output),
“AND” (all activated operators must have status ON to activate the function output).
4.4.3 Enable the rule

If this tick box is not ticked, the logic in question will not operate.
4.4.4 Output
This is the selection of the reaction of the system upon activation of the function.
Note that the output has a delay function. If set to 0 s (default), there is no delay.
Output Description
Commands: Command to the Qc4002™ MkII unit, e.g. select AUTO running mode.
Virtual events: A number of internal (virtual) events that can be activated and used in another logic line. By
using these virtual events, the number of activating (triggering) events can be expanded from
the three available in each logic line to, in theory, an unlimited number of events.
Virtual events can also be trigged from Modbus.
Relays: Selection of a relay output. The selection of these is option-dependent.
Inhibits: A selection of inhibit functions for the alarms.
Gov/AVR control: Possibility to force the speed/voltage control up or down for 5 sec.
EIC commands: Commands that are related to engine communication.
The commands are option dependent:
- MTU & J1939 EIC (option for Qc4002™ MkII genset) or
- J1939 EIC (standard for Qc4002™ MkII genset)
CAN cmd: Command to the Multi-line unit connected to the power management CAN line, e.g. select
AUTO running mode in all Qc4002™ MkII units.
NOTE: If a relay output is chosen, the relay in question must be set up to be a limit relay output. This is done in the parameter
list under "OUTPUTS".
8|
User Manual
4.5 Definitions
The TRUE and FALSE states are explained below.
A TRUE state of an input/event will be detected, if the condition defined in the input/event is met.
Examples given:
• Digital input is TRUE when activated (12/24V DC applied)
• Alarm condition is TRUE when the alarm is present
• Mode condition is TRUE when the mode is selected
• A FALSE state of an input event will be detected, if the condition defined in the input event is not met.
Examples given:
• Digital input is FALSE when deactivated (12/24V DC not applied)
• Alarm condition is FALSE when the alarm is not present
• Mode condition is FALSE when the mode is not selected
4.6 Examples
By using the events, rules can be made for the use of the M-Logic.
4.6.1 Virtual events

Virtual events are used to expand the number of events in a logic sequence.
The following shows how the output of Logic 1 is used to continue the sequence in Logic 2.
• The Logic 1 output is set to Virtual Event 1.

• The Event A in Logic 2 is Virtual Event 1.
This gives a total of five events that can be used in this logic sequence (A + B + C in Logic 1 and B + C in Logic
2).
| 9
4.6.2 Set/reset function

If you use a single binary input for e.g. selection of AUTO/MANUAL, you need a SET/RESET function, since two
binary inputs are normally required for this.
In the following example, binary input no. 10 is used to switch between AUTO (input ON) and MANUAL (input
OFF).
First line: If input 10 = ON and AUTO = OFF (NOT Auto operation mode), then set AUTO mode
command.
Second line: If input 10 = OFF and MANUAL = OFF (NOT Manual operation), then set MANUAL mode
command.
In M-Logic, it looks like this:
4.6.3 Toggle function

Using a single button to toggle between two running modes.
In this example, the button no. 1 on the AOP-2 (configured in a separate tool) is used to activate Virtual event 1.
Logic 1 selects AMF if the mode is NOT AMF, and Logic 2 selects LTO mode if the mode is NOT LTO. In this
way, one single button can be used for toggling between AMF and LTO modes.
AOP-2 configurator
The window below appears.

1. Read the present setting by clicking here:
10 |
User Manual
2. Click button 1 and you select this:
The item text can be written freely and printed, so it can be put in the AOP-2 front pockets.
3. Click OK. Remember to save the AOP-2 setting, and close the AOP-2 window.
4. Select M-Logic (bottom left-hand side).
4.6.4 Controlling a relay output with one single AOP button

In this example, the relay can be replaced by any other output, and the AOP button can be replaced by e.g. a binary
input.
The button of the AOP-2 must be set to activate Virtual Event 1 (VE 1) (in this case).
In Logic 1, the VE 1 will activate the relay output (26). At the same time, the relay output (26) will remain ON,
unless Virtual Event 2 (VE 2) is activated (AND NOT VE 2).
In Logic 2, the VE 1 will activate VE 2 if the relay output (26) is ON (AND Relay output (26)).
The result is that the relay changes position every time the AOP button is activated.
| 11
4.6.5 Power up in a specific mode
In the above example, the unit will always power up in manual mode. The timer in Logic 1 sets the output for 5 s,
and this is used to set manual mode in event 2. When the timer expires, you can freely select any mode since the
virtual event 1 turns ON and the Logic 2 says NOT virtual event 1.
4.6.6 Flip-flop function

If a flip-flop (periodical relay output ON/OFF) function is required, the following example can be used:
The example shows how to configure relay 5 as an output for a flashing light (or similar) during engine stopping
sequence.
The event "DG Stop activated" triggers the function.
Logic 1: DG stop activated event triggers the function. The relay output resets if the virtual event (VE) 1 is
active.
Logic-2: Relay 5 triggers VE 1 or VE 1 holds itself ON provided VE 2 is NOT active. The time delay of VE 1 is
the relay 5 ON time
Logic 3: VE 1 triggers VE 2. The time delay of VE 2 is the relay 5 OFF time. This time has to be longer than the
time delay of VE 1.
The relay 5 (parameter) has to be set to "Limit".
12 |
User Manual
5 List of events and commands

NOTE: The terms used in the lists are those used in the description of options in the Qc4002™ MkII User manual.
Please refer to this document for detailed explanations.
If there are no references to the function in question, the reference can be found in the Qc4002™ MkII User manual.
5.1 Events
Event Qc4002™ MkII Description Notes
Alarms All alarms are available as events in the
alarm category. Note that the list will
X show all alarms, also those that are not -
available in the present configuration of
basic unit and options.
Limits If the outputs A and B of the alarm in
question (e.g. BB < 1) are set to "limit", the
Like the alarm list it represents the
X alarm message will not appear, but the
alarms.
function will still trigger in the M-Logic
limits section.
Events Mains failure condition (single generator
X Mains fail
set).
X MB closed
X MB opened Mains breaker (single generator set).
X MB synchronising
X BTB closed
X BTB opened Bus tie breaker unit
X BTB synchronising
X GB opened
Generator breaker (generator set).
X GB closed
Generator breaker synchronising in
X GB synchronising
progress (generator set).
Peak shaving cuts the peak of the mains
X Peak shaving active consumption by paralleling the generator to
the mains (single generator set).
X G volt/freq OK delay expired Diesel generator V/Hz OK (generator set).
Generator breaker is being closed on a dead
X GB direct in
busbar (generator set).
Generator breaker direct close on request to
X GB black close request
dead busbar.
X Running Engine is running (generator set).
X Access lock Binary input access lock activated.
X Emergency stop Emergency stop activated.
X DG ready for auto start All is normal, no alarms.
X Cranking Crank output activated.
X Start activated Start sequence activated.
X Lamp test Lamp test in progress.
| 13

X Battery test activated Battery test in progress.
X Cool down active Cool down sequence in progress.
Force/release block of engine heater
X Engine heater in manual control
(toggle function)
Alternative start is a full AMF sequence
X Alternative start activated test of the plant. This is started on the
Qc4002™ MkII Mains.
X Event log selected for printing
For the printer option, these three printouts
X Alarm log selected for printing
can be selected.
X Battery log selected for printing
X Parameter set 1 used
X Parameter set 2 used The parameter sets can be selected
X Parameter set 3 used internally or with binary input.
X Parameter set 4 used

X DG in quarantine The diesel generator cannot be used.
- DG supply Status information on BTB unit.
X Test mode simple selected
X Test mode load selected Selection of test mode.
X Test mode full selected
X Multi-start 1 selected Multi-start is the selection of number of
X Multi-start 2 selected generator sets to be started upon blackout.
X BA voltage OK Busbar A voltage for BTB unit.

X BB voltage OK Busbar voltage. (Busbar B for BTB unit)
X Application 1 activated
X Application 2 activated The applications are the choices of the
plant layout. Four different layouts can be
X Application 3 activated stored at the same time.
X Application 4 activated
X Single DG selected
- Dual mains selected
X Multi-mains selected Application selection.
X Genset group selected
X Genset group plant selected
X Dynamic section equal static section Power management feature.
Generator frequency and voltage are within
X G volt/freq OK
range.
Update of setting on local Qc4002™ MkII
X Update mode local selected
only.
X Update mode on all selected Update of setting on all Qc4002™ MkII.
X Absolute prio. used Fixed start priority.
14 |
User Manual

Start priority relative to running hour
X Relative prio. used
counters.
X Ack. all alarms active Acknowledge all active alarms.
X MB synchronisation to DG activated
Mains breaker.
X MB synchronisation to DG deactivated
X GB synchronisation to mains activated
GB synchronisation to mains Generator breaker.
X
deactivated
X Mode shift activated Mode shift between a running mode and
X Mode shift deactivated AMF (Automatic Mains Failure).
X GOV up 5 s activated
Speed governor.
X GOV down 5 s activated
X AVR up 5 s activated
AVR (voltage control).
X AVR down 5 s activated
X CBE activated Activate Close Before Excitation function.
Deactivate Close Before Excitation
X CBE deactivated
function.
X 3-phase system
X Split L1L3-phase system
AC configuration.
X Split L1L2-phase system
X Single phase system
X Inductive reference selected
Inductive or capacitive cosphi reference.
X Capacitive reference selected
X Dynamic sync selected
Sync. method selected.
X Static sync selected
X Power offset 1 activated
X Power offset 2 activated Power reference offset.
X Power offset 3 activated
X Cosphi offset 1 activated
X Cosphi offset 2 activated Cosphi reference offset.
X Cosphi offset 3 activated
Test application selected with output Emulation with engine and breaker relay
X
cmd enabled reaction.
Test application selected with output Emulation without engine and breaker
X
cmd disabled relay reactions.
X BB Parameter set 1 used
Nominal busbar settings 1 and 2.
X BB Parameter set 2 used
X 60 Hz system The event becomes true if the nominal
frequency is higher than 55 Hz.
| 15

- Alarm inhibit 1 active
- Alarm inhibit 2 active Binary inputs for alarm inhibit
- Alarm inhibit 3 active
- Ramp up active
Power ramping active for diesel generator.
- Ramp down active
Diesel generator being taken off
- Deload active
busbar/grid.
- Min. nbr. run. Off
- Min. nbr. run. Set 1 The minimum number running function is
- Min. nbr. run. Set 2 set to setting 1, 2, 3 or Off.
- Min. nbr. run. Set 3

- Max. nbr. run. Off
- Max. nbr. run. Set 1 The maximum number running function is
- Max. nbr. run. Set 2 set to setting 1, 2, 3 or Off.
- Max. nbr. run. Set 3

Logic X Not used -
X TRUE “Always”.
X FALSE “Never”.
Remote Main- X RMB state off
tenance Box
X RMB state start
X RMB state sync.
X RMB state deload mains Configuration of Transformer Maintenance
X RMB state island Box Qc4002™ MkII only.
X RMB state sync to mains

X RMB state deload
- RMB state connected
Command X Cmd timer 01 active
timers
X Cmd timer 02 active
The command timers will operate in pairs
X Cmd timer 03 active of two to activate and deactivate a flop-flop
function.
X Cmd timer 04 active
X Any Cmd timers active
CAN inputs The CAN inputs are handled as binary
X CAN inputs 01-16 active inputs but are CAN telegrams in the power
management CAN line.
Inputs The number of binary inputs selectable is
Binary input activated (digital input or hardware option-dependent. The number
X
external I/O) indicates the terminal number for the input
in question.
- Stop coil wirebreak Stop coil wire break alarm active.
16 |
User Manual

Emergency stop input activated (note that
- Emergency stop
this is normal state for emer.).
Modes Island is one or several generators running
X Island
in an island NOT connected to mains grid.
X AMF Automatic mains failure.
Peak shaving cuts the peak of the mains
X Peak shaving consumption by paralleling the generator to
the mains.
X Fixed power Mains grid parallel fixed generator power.
X Mains power export Export of power to the mains grid.
Load is transferred from mains to
X Load takeover
generator, and mains is disconnected.
X Power management Power management active.
X Genset group mode Optional on Qc4002™ MkII Mains.
X Remote maintenance Remote transformer maintenance.
X Semi-auto mode
X Auto mode
Indication of generator running mode.
X Test mode
X Manual mode
X Block mode
X DI semi-auto mode used
X DI test mode used
X DI auto mode used DI = Digital Input.
X DI manual mode used
X DI block mode used
X Mode shift or AMF activated Mode shift active or AMF sequence active.
Relays The number of relays available is option-
X Relay output activated dependent. The number relates to the
lowest terminal number of the output.
Virtual events These are used as interconnection between
X Virtual event 1-32 multiple logics to enhance the possible
number of events in one sequence.
Fail class X Block Start blocking.
X Warning Warning.
X Trip GB Trip genset breaker.
X Trip+stop Trip breaker, cool down and stop.
X Shutdown Trip genset breaker and stop engine.
X Trip MB Trip mains breaker.
X Trip BTB Trip bus tie breaker.
X Trip TB Trip tie breaker.
| 17

A failure condition is expected, and the
generator will be taken out for safety
X Safety stop
reasons. This feature is only useful in
power management.
MB will be primary breaker to trip. If no
X Trip MB/GB MB is available in the application, the GB
will trip instead.
Power - All GBs closed All genset breakers closed in a section.
management
X All GBs opened All genset breakers opened in a section.
Minimum 1 genset breaker closed in a
X Any GB closed
section.
Minimum 1 mains breaker closed in a
X Any MB closed
section.
X Unit has command status This unit is in command.
In the following section, the X refers to the Qc4002™ MkII module CANbus addresses.
These are divided into:
- DG (Diesel generator unit): Address 1-16
- Mains (mains breaker unit with or without tie breaker): Address 17-32
- BTB (bus tie breaker unit): Address 33-40
X DG X GB closed Diesel generator breaker closed.
Tie breaker controlled by mains unit
X Mains X TB closed
closed.
X DG X GB opened Diesel generator breaker closed.
X Mains X TB opened Tie breaker controlled by mains units open.
Diesel generator voltage and frequency
X DG X volt/freq OK
OK.
X Mains X mains volt/freq OK Mains grid voltage and frequency OK.
X DG X ready to auto start Diesel generator ready to auto start.
X Mains X in auto or test Mains unit in auto or test running mode.
X DG X has any alarm present Diesel generator unit has an alarm.
X Mains X has any alarm present Mains unit has an alarm.
X DG X running Diesel engine running.
X Mains X MB closed Mains breaker closed.
X Mains X MB opened Mains breaker open.
Diesel generator breaker is being
X DG X synchronising
synchronised.
X Mains X synchronising Mains breaker is being synchronised.
X Mains X TB synchronising Tie breaker is being synchronised.
X BTB X BTB closed Bus tie breaker is closed.
X BTB X BTB opened Bus tie breaker is open.
X BTB X BTB synchronising Bus tie breaker is being synchronised.
X Mains X mains failure Mains failure detected.
18 |
User Manual

X Any BTB deloading Any bus tie breaker is deloading.
X First standby Indicates number of priority.
X Second standby Indicates number of priority.
X Third standby Indicates number of priority.
Run with required number of DGs + one
X Secured mode active
extra.
This genset is allowed to activate the base
X Base load active
load function.
This genset is not allowed to activate the
X Base load inhibited
base load function.
This genset is not allowed to activate the
X Base load enabled
base load function.
X LD start timer expired Load-dependent start sequence is initiated.
X LD stop timer expired Load-dependent stop sequence is initiated.
Do any of the mains connections supply
X Any mains on busbar
voltage to the busbar?
Are any of the mains breakers in the
X Any MB synchronising
process of synchronising?
Are any of the tie breakers in the process of
X Any TB synchronising
synchronising?
Are any of the tie breakers in the process of
X Any TB deloading
being deloaded?
X Asymmetric LS enabled Asymmetric LS enabled
X Asymmetric LS active Asymmetric LS active
Heavy X DG X HC 1 request HC 1 generator X requested.
consumers
X DG X HC 2 request HC 2 generator X requested.
X DG X HC 1 acknowledge HC 1 generator X acknowledge.
X DG X HC 2 acknowledge HC 2 generator X acknowledge.
Any heavy consumer requested without
X Any unack. HC request
acknowledge.
All heavy consumers requested with
X All HC req ack
acknowledge.
X Any HC request Any heavy consumer in operation.
Any heavy consumer acknowledged
X Any HC ack. no feedback
without power feedback.
EIC event X DPF Lamp OFF Particulate filter is OK.
X DPF Lamp ON (solid) Indicates initial need for regeneration.
Regeneration is necessary
X DPF Lamp ON (blink)
(after regeneration the lamp turns OFF).
DPF Active Regeneration not activated
X Regeneration status.
(status)
| 19

DPF Active Regeneration activated
(status)
DPF Active Regeneration needed
(status)
X DPF Regen not needed (status) Level of needed regeneration.
DPF Regen needed – lowest level
X Level of needed regeneration.
(status)
DPF Regen needed – moderate level
(status)
DPF Regen needed – highest level
(status)
X DPF Regen not inhibited (lamp) Regeneration switch is disabled.
Regeneration disable switch is active.
X DPF Regen inhibited (lamp) Automatic and manual regeneration cannot
occur.
X High Exh Syst Temp OFF (lamp) Exhaust temp. below.
X High Exh Syst Temp ON (lamp) Exhaust temp. above.
5.2 Operators
Operator Description
OR Using OR between 2 events means that the output will activate when one of these activates.
AND Using AND between 2 operators means that the output will only activate if both events are activated.
20 |
User Manual
5.3 Outputs
Output Qc4002™ MkII Description Notes
Commands X Island
X AMF
X Peak shaving
X Fixed power
X Mains power export Function modes.
X Load takeover
X Power management
X Activate secured mode
X Deactivate secured mode
X Semi-auto
X Auto mode
X Test mode
X Manual mode
Running modes.
X Block mode
- DG supply
X Activate base load
X Deactivate base load
X Lamp test Activate lamp test (LEDs on display).
X Ack. all alarms Acknowledge all alarms.
X Battery test Activate battery test
Force/release block of engine heater (this
X Engine heater manual ctrl. will disable/enable the engine heater
function).
Select local start in a power management
X Set to local start
application.
Select remote start in a power management
X Set to remote start
application.
X Set clock to 4 am Set the device clock to 4 am/04.00.
Switch between event, alarm and battery
X Switch log to print
log to print.
X Print log
Print output.
X Print status
X Set parameter 1
X Set parameter 2
Choose a parameter set (nominal settings).
X Set parameter 3
X Set parameter 4
X Derate Pnom Activate derate.
X Derate Pnom 1 Activate derate 1
| 21

X Select test type to simple
X Select test type to load Test sequence selection.
X Select test type to full
X Block GB sequence Block the operation of the genset breaker.
X BTB X closed feedback X = Address (33-40 for bus tie breakers).
X BTB X opened feedback X = Address (33-40 for bus tie breakers).
X BTB X close cmd X = Address (33-40 for bus tie breakers).
X BTB X open cmd X = Address (33-40 for bus tie breakers).
- Open SGB/SCB X Shaft generator breaker or shore connection
- Close SGB/SCB X breaker.
X Select application 1
Power management: Four different
X Select application 2 applications can be stored at the same time
X Select application 3 in the units. Here the selection between
them can be made.
X Select application 4
Running mode update for the single
X Update mode local
Qc4002™ MkII
Running mode update for all Qc4002™
X Update mode on all
MkII
X Store common settings Broadcast the common settings to all units.
X Abs. prio. Handling Absolute (fixed) start priority.
Relative (running timer based) start
X Rel. prio. Handling
priority.
X Open GB
Generator breaker.
X Close GB
X Open MB
Mains breaker.
X Close MB
- Open SGB/SCB
Shaft generator/shore connection.
- Close SGB/SCB
X Start and close GB Start the engine and close the breaker/open
X GB open and stop the breaker and stop engine.
X Auto start/stop ON = Start, OFF = Stop.

X Remote start Pulse signal.
X Remote stop Pulse signal.
Droop command to the engine
- EIC droop
communication controller.
When active, the Multi-line 2 unit will
- EIC droop emulated
emulate the droop function.
22 |
User Manual

X Activate base load Activates the base load function.
X Deactivate base load Disables the base load function.
Forces this unit to have the first priority in
X First priority
a power management system.
Locks the power ramp up function until the
X Freeze ramp
command is disabled again.
Forces the power management system to
X Use Ana LS instead of CAN
use the analogue load share line.
X Activate Asymmetric LS Activate asymmetric load share.
X Deactivate Asymmetric LS Deactivate asymmetric load share.
Selects the Qc4002™ MkII to expect to
X Select 3-phase system
measure AC voltage on a 3-phase system.
X Select split L1L3-phase system
X Select split L1L2-phase system
X Select single phase system
- Act. view 1
- Act. view 2 These functions are used to force the
display to show the measurements in view
- Act. view 3 1-4 that are available in “V1”.
- Act. view 4
The genset mode remote maintenance is
X Remote maintenance
activated.
Activates measurement relay if remote
X Mbox meas relay on
maintenance is active.
X Idle run low speed Idle speed constant low speed.
X Idle run temp control Idle speed temperature-dependent.
X Cool down threshold Interrupt cool down sequence.
X Inductive reference
Inductive or capacitive cosphi reference.
X Capacitive reference
X Activate all AOP-2 buzzers All AOP-2 buzzers.
X Activate all AOP-2 relays All AOP-2 relays.
X Activate relay on AOP-2 ID1
X Activate relay on AOP-2 ID3 Single AOP-2 relays.
X Activate buzzer on AOP-2 ID1
X Activate buzzer on AOP-2 ID2 Single AOP-2 buzzer.
| 23

X Enable analogue LS Activate analogue load sharing.
X Act. dynamic sync.
Selection between static and dynamic sync.
X Act. static sync.
X Fan A running
X Fan B running
Running feedback for cooling fans.
X Fan C running
X Fan D running
X Act. power offset 1
X Act. power offset 2 Power reference offset activation.
X Act. power offset 3
X Deact. power offset 1
X Deact. power offset 2 Deactivate power reference offset.
X Deact. power offset 3
X Act. cosphi offset 1
X Act. cosphi offset 2 Cosphi reference offset activation.
X Act. cosphi offset 3
X Deact. cosphi offset 1
X Deact. cosphi offset 2 Deactivate cosphi reference offset.
X Deact. cosphi offset 3
X MB close inhibit Inhibit the closing of MB.
Override fuel pump hysteresis to fill the
X Activate Fuel Pump
tank to threshold level.
X Reset horn Reset the horn relay.
X Reset I max demand Reset the peak current detected in the unit.
Reset the thermal current detected in the
X Reset I thermal demand
unit.
X Pulse counter 1
Increment pulse counters.
X Pulse counter 2
X Reset pulse counter 1
Reset pulse counters.
X Reset pulse counter 2
X Set parameter 1 Select between parameter set 1 and 2 for
X Set parameter 2 BB nominal settings.
Virtual events These are used as interconnection between

X Virtual event 1-32 multiple logics to enhance the possible
number of events in one sequence.
Relays The list will show all relays possible,
Selectable no. of relays are option-
X including optional ones. Make sure that a
dependent
selected relay is actually present.
24 |
User Manual

Inhibits X Not used -
X Activate LD stop used
Load-dependent stop.
X Activate LD stop
X Deactivate mode button Mode button on display front.
X Activate MB synchronisation Mains breaker.
X Activate GB synchronisation Generator breaker.
X Deactivate MB synchronisation Mains breaker.
X Deactivate GB synchronisation Generator breaker.
X Inh. analogue load share Deactivate analogue load sharing.
If in AUTO mode, the alarm acknowledge
X Inh. acknowledge in AUTO
is not possible.
X Inh. Modbus commands Modbus commands are ignored.
Diesel generator will not participate in
X Force DG in quarantine
power management.
X Activate short time parallel
1 s max. parallel time ON/OFF.
X Deactivate short time parallel
X Inhibit 1
X Inhibit 2 Alarm inhibits.
X Inhibit 3
X Select multi-start set 1 Selection of number of generators to start
X Select multi-start set 2 on blackout.
X Block priority swapping Present start priority list is maintained.

X Activate mode shift Shift from a running mode to AMF in case
X Deactivate mode shift of mains failure.
X Inh. BTB close request Bus tie breaker closing not allowed.
- Block request for section Use of section not allowed.
X Inh. AOP1 buttons
X Inh. AOP2_1 buttons
All command buttons on AOP are ignored.
X Activate CBE Activates and deactivates the Close Before
X Deactivate CBE Excitation function.
GOV/AVR X GOV incr. for 5 s

control Speed governor control output.
X GOV decr. for 5 s
X AVR incr. for 5 s
X AVR decr. for 5 s AVR voltage control output.
| 25

CAN The CAN commands can be used to
commands X CAN command 01-16 active distribute signals between the Qc4002™
MkII units in a power management system.
Alarm ind. X LED X Red+blink
LEDs
X LED X Red
X LED X Yellow+blink
X = ID number (01-04).
X LED X Yellow
X LED X Green+blink
X LED X Green
Display X Set display 1 to primary
When multiple DU-2 displays are used, the
X Set display 2 to primary command will set the desired display as the
primary.
X Set display 3 to primary
X Activate view 1-20 on display 1 Activate a specific view on display 1.
Makes the menu 7050 "Fixed Power set"
Act. power reference menu on display
X appear on display 1 (display with CAN ID
1
1).
Act. test power reference menu on Makes the menu 7040 "Test" appear on
X
display 1 display 1 (display with CAN ID 1).
Act. cosphi reference menu on display
1
1).
2
2).
X
2
2).
3
3).
X
3
3).
Quick Setup X Off
X Setup stand alone
Quick setup for application configuration.
X Setup plant
26 |
User Manual

Static sync. type X GB: breaker
X GB: infinite
Static sync breaker type.
X MB: breaker
X MB: infinite
EIC commands X EIC droop Activate ECU droop.
Activate droop in the ML-2 (reference
setpoint still nominal frequency/power but
X EIC droop emulation
regulation loop is with added droop for
stability).
X EIC reset trip fuel Reset fuel counter in the ECU.
X EIC enable cylinder cutout Allows cylinder cutout.
X EIC engine overspeed test Initiate overspeed test.
X EIC intermittent oil priming Activate oil priming pump.
X EIC Engine opr mode command Set the operating mode of the engine.
Select default or variant 1 governor
X EIC Engine speed gov param command
parameter setting.
The Regeneration Disabled (Inhibit) switch
disallows any automatic or manual (non-
mission) regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter.
X EIC DPF regeneration inhibit This may be used by the operator to
prevent regeneration when the machine is
operating in a hazardous environment and
the OEM is concerned about high
temperature.
The Regeneration Initiate switch initiates a
manual (non-mission) regeneration of the
particulate filter when the machine is in
non-mission condition and DPF soot levels
are high enough to allow regeneration.
X EIC DPF regeneration force
This switch is for use in forcing a
regeneration event to occur to troubleshoot
the system. During a non-mission
regeneration the engine speed will increase
to an optimum speed for regeneration.
Inhibit of EIC alarms;
X Inh EIC alarms
red/yellow/protection/malfunction.
X EIC Select Cummins PCC1301 Enable speed control for PCC 1301.
Switch ON/OFF the start and stop
X EIC Start/stop enable
commands.
X EIC Speed control inhibit Disable the EIC speed control.
| 27
28 |
User Manual
Qc4002™ MkII – PARAMETER LIST

DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS
CONTENTS
1. DELIMITATION .......................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Scope of this document......................................................................................................................5

2.1.3 Safety issues ............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2 About this document ..........................................................................................................................7
2.2.1 General purpose ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2.2 Intended users .......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.3 Contents/overall structure ......................................................................................................................... 7
3. ALARM LIST ...........................................................................................................................................8
3.1 General ..............................................................................................................................................8

3.2 Alarm table overview........................................................................................................................ 10
3.3 Protection parameters ...................................................................................................................... 17
3.3.1 Reverse power and overcurrent protection ............................................................................................. 17
3.3.2 Voltage protections ................................................................................................................................. 20
3.3.3 Frequency protections............................................................................................................................. 22
3.3.4 Busbar voltage protections...................................................................................................................... 24
3.3.5 Busbar frequency protections ................................................................................................................. 27
3.3.6 Mains failure protections ......................................................................................................................... 29
3.3.7 Overload protections ............................................................................................................................... 30
3.3.8 Current unbalance protection .................................................................................................................. 32
3.3.9 Voltage unbalance protection .................................................................................................................. 33
3.3.10 Reactive power import (loss of excitation) protection ............................................................................. 33
3.3.11 Reactive power export (over-excitation) protection ................................................................................. 34
3.3.12 Negative sequence.................................................................................................................................. 34
3.3.13 Zero sequence ........................................................................................................................................ 35
3.3.14 Directional overcurrent protection ........................................................................................................... 36
3.3.15 Busbar unbalance voltage ....................................................................................................................... 37
3.3.16 Time-dependent undervoltage ................................................................................................................ 38
3.3.17 Power dependent reactive power import ................................................................................................ 40
3.3.18 Power dependent reactive power export ................................................................................................ 41
3.3.19 Non-essential load trip (load shedding) ..................................................................................................... 42
3.3.20 Undervoltage and reactive power low ...................................................................................................... 44
| 1
Qc4002™ MkII Control Panel – Parameter list
3.4 Control parameters - synchronisation................................................................................................ 46

3.4.1 Synchronisation and breaker alarms ........................................................................................................ 46
3.5 Control parameters - regulation ........................................................................................................ 49
3.5.1 Regulation alarms .................................................................................................................................... 49
3.6 Input/output parameters - binary input setup .................................................................................... 50
3.6.1 Digital input 23-27 setup ......................................................................................................................... 50
3.6.4 Digital input 102-108 setup ..................................................................................................................... 51
3.6.6 Emergency stop ...................................................................................................................................... 53
3.7 Input/output parameters - analogue input setup ................................................................................ 54
3.7.1 Analogue input setup (option M15.6) ...................................................................................................... 54
3.8 Multi-functional analogue input setup ............................................................................................... 58
3.8.1 Multi-input no. 102 .................................................................................................................................. 58
3.8.2 Multi-input no. 105 .................................................................................................................................. 62
3.8.3 Multi-input no. 108 .................................................................................................................................. 66
3.8.4 Differential measurement ....................................................................................................................... 71
3.8.5 Analogue input setup (option M15.8) ...................................................................................................... 73
3.8.6 Aux. supply setup .................................................................................................................................... 77
3.9 System parameters - general setup .................................................................................................. 79
3.9.1 Stop coil wirebreak and internal communication alarms ......................................................................... 79
3.9.2 Engine heater failure ............................................................................................................................... 79
3.9.3 Battery tests ............................................................................................................................................ 80
3.9.4 Max. ventilation ....................................................................................................................................... 82
3.9.5 Switchboard error - Block and Stop ......................................................................................................... 83
3.9.6 Switchboard error - Not in auto ............................................................................................................... 83
3.9.7 Oil renewal .............................................................................................................................................. 84
3.10 System parameters - communication................................................................................................ 84
3.10.1 External communication error ................................................................................................................. 84
3.10.2 Engine interface communication alarms ................................................................................................. 85
3.10.3 Power management communication error .............................................................................................. 89
3.10.4 Internal CAN communication error .......................................................................................................... 89
3.11 External I/O parameters .................................................................................................................... 90
3.11.1 External I/O alarm setup .......................................................................................................................... 90
3.11.2 Analogue inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 90
3.11.3 External analogue input scale .................................................................................................................. 91
3.11.4 Digital inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 92
4. PARAMETER LIST ................................................................................................................................. 93
4.1 Parameter table overview ................................................................................................................. 93

4.2 Control parameters - synchronisation................................................................................................ 99
4.2.1 Synchronisation ....................................................................................................................................... 99
4.3 Control parameters - regulation ...................................................................................................... 102
4.3.1 Regulation ............................................................................................................................................. 102
4.4 Control parameters - output setup .................................................................................................. 108
4.4.1 Digital output setup ............................................................................................................................... 108
2|
User Manual
4.5 Control parameters - analogue output ............................................................................................. 113

4.5.1 Analogue output limits .......................................................................................................................... 113
4.6 Control parameters - Transducer outputs ........................................................................................ 114
4.6.1 Transducer outputs ............................................................................................................................... 114
4.7 Control parameters - analogue regulator output setup..................................................................... 118
4.7.1 Regulator output selection .................................................................................................................... 118
4.8 System parameters - general setup ................................................................................................ 119
4.8.1 General setup ........................................................................................................................................ 119
4.8.2 Counters and timers .............................................................................................................................. 121
4.8.3 Alarm horn............................................................................................................................................. 123
4.8.4 Run coil setup ....................................................................................................................................... 123
4.8.5 Running, start and stop ......................................................................................................................... 123
4.8.6 Breaker control ...................................................................................................................................... 125
4.8.7 Power derate ......................................................................................................................................... 125
4.8.8 Idle start ................................................................................................................................................ 126
4.8.9 Engine heater ........................................................................................................................................ 127
4.8.10 Analogue load sharing lines output........................................................................................................ 127
4.8.11 Master clock .......................................................................................................................................... 128
4.8.12 Cooling ventilation ................................................................................................................................. 128
4.8.13 Summer/winter time ............................................................................................................................. 128
4.8.14 Fuel transfer pump logic........................................................................................................................ 129
4.8.15 Fan logic ............................................................................................................................................... 129
4.8.16 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 131
4.8.17 I thermal demand .................................................................................................................................. 132
4.8.18 Pulse counter ........................................................................................................................................ 132
4.8.19 Alarm jump ............................................................................................................................................ 132
4.8.20 Command timers................................................................................................................................... 133
4.9 System parameters - mains setup .................................................................................................. 134
4.9.1 Mains setup .......................................................................................................................................... 134
4.9.2 Test ....................................................................................................................................................... 135
4.9.3 Controller settings ................................................................................................................................. 135
4.9.4 Mains failure .......................................................................................................................................... 135
4.9.5 Y1(X1) droop curve ................................................................................................................................ 136
4.9.6 Y2(X2) droop curve ................................................................................................................................ 137
4.9.7 Power offset ......................................................................................................................................... 138
4.9.8 Cosphi offset ......................................................................................................................................... 138
4.10 System parameters - external communication ................................................................................ 139
4.10.1 External communication ........................................................................................................................ 139
4.10.2 Power management internal communication ........................................................................................ 139
4.11 System parameters - engine interface communication .................................................................... 140
4.11.1 Engine interface communication ........................................................................................................... 140
4.12 System parameters - external I/O communication setup ................................................................. 141
4.12.1 External I/O communication setup .......................................................................................................... 141
4.12.2 Event printer.......................................................................................................................................... 142
4.13 System parameters - power management setup ............................................................................. 142
4.13.1 Power management setup .................................................................................................................... 142
4.14 Jump menus .................................................................................................................................. 149
| 3
4.14.1 9000 Software version .......................................................................................................................... 149

4.14.2 9010 Display character test ................................................................................................................... 149
4.14.3 9020 Service port .................................................................................................................................. 149
4.14.4 9070 M4 SW version............................................................................................................................. 149
9.14.5 9120 Service menu ............................................................................................................................... 150
9.14.6 9130 AC config...................................................................................................................................... 150
9.14.7 9140 Angle compensation BB/G ........................................................................................................... 151
9.14.8 9170 Internal CAN protocol ................................................................................................................... 151
9.14.9 9180 Quick setup (mains controller) ...................................................................................................... 152
4.14.10 9190 Application broadcast ................................................................................................................... 152
4.15 System parameters - utility software .............................................................................................. 153
4.15.1 GSM settings ........................................................................................................................................ 153
4.15.2 Passwords ............................................................................................................................................. 153
4.16 System parameters - VDO inputs ................................................................................................... 154
4.16.1 VDO 102................................................................................................................................................ 154
4.16.2 VDO 105................................................................................................................................................ 155
4.16.3 VDO 108................................................................................................................................................ 155
4.16.4 Multi-input selections ............................................................................................................................ 156
4.16.5 4-20 mA input scaling ............................................................................................................................ 156
4.16.6 Parameter ID ......................................................................................................................................... 157
4.17 System parameters - external digital outputs .................................................................................. 157
4.17.1 External digital outputs .......................................................................................................................... 157
4.17.2 External module status.......................................................................................................................... 157
4.17.3 13000 SuperVision ................................................................................................................................ 158
5. RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 159
4|
User Manual
1. Delimitation
1.1 Scope of this document
| 5


be lost.
Disclaimer
2.1.3 Safety issues



6|
User Manual
2.2 About this document
2.2.1 General purpose

This document is a complete parameter list including all parameters, which means that some of the option
parameters included may not be accessible in the system in question.
The document includes a complete standard alarm list and a complete standard parameter list for setup. Therefore,
this document is to be used for reference, when information about specific alarms and parameters is needed.
Please make sure to read this document before starting to work with the Qc4002™ MkII unit and the
generator to be controlled. Failure to do this could result in human injury or damage to the equipment.
2.2.2 Intended users

The parameter list is mainly intended for the person responsible for the unit parameter setup. In most cases, this
would be a panel builder designer. Naturally, other users might also find useful information here.
2.2.3 Contents/overall structure

The Parameter List is divided into chapters and in order to make the structure of this document simple and easy to
use, each chapter will begin from the top of a new page.
| 7
3. Alarm list
3.1 General
In this document, following abbreviations are used:
G: Generator
GB: Generator breaker
TB: Tie breaker (for mains unit)
MB: Mains breaker
BTB: Bus tie breaker
BA: Busbar A (BTB unit)
BB: Busbar (BTB unit: Busbar B)
N/A: Not available
This chapter includes a complete alarm list, including all possible options. Therefore, this chapter is to be used for
reference when specific information about the individual parameters is needed for the unit setup. An overview list
can be seen on the next page.
The table consists of the following possible adjustments:

Setpoint: The alarm setpoint is adjusted in the setpoint menu. The setting is a percentage of the nominal
values.
Delay: The timer setting is the time that must expire from the alarm level is reached until the alarm
occurs.
Relay output A: A relay can be activated by output A.
Relay output B: A relay can be activated by output B.
Enable: The alarm can be activated or deactivated. ON means always activated, RUN means that the
alarm has run status. This means it is activated when the running signal is present.
Fail class: When the alarm occurs the unit will react depending on the selected fail class.
Fail classes are:

Fail class Generator Mains unit BTB (bus tie breaker)
F1 Block Block Block
F2 Warning Warning Warning
F3 Trip GB Trip TB Trip BTB
F4 Trip + Stop Trip MB N/A
F5 Shutdown N/A N/A
F6 Trip MB N/A N/A
F7 Safety stop N/A N/A
F8 Trip MB/GB N/A N/A
NOTE: Small differences due to the character of the parameters may exist between the individual tables.
8|
User Manual
It is also possible to configure the parameters by using the PC utility software. It will be possible to make the same
configurations as described above.
By using the PC utility software, extra functionality is available. For all the protections it is possible to make an
automatic acknowledgement of the alarm. Usually it is important when the mains protections are used, as the
sequences are blocked until the alarm is acknowledged.
| 9
3.2 Alarm table overview
Protection
1000 G/M/BA -P> 1
1010 G/M/BA -P> 2
1030 G/M/BA I> 1
1040 G/M/BA I> 2
1050 G/M/BA I> 3
1060 G/M/BA I> 4
1100 G Iv > 1-6
1110 G Iv >
1130 G/M/BA I>> 1
1140 G/M/BA I>> 2
1150 G/M/BA U> 1
1160 G/M/BA U> 2
1170G/M/BA U< 1
1180 G/M/BA U< 2
1190 G/M/BA U< 3
1200 G/M/BA voltage trip
1210 G/M/BA f> 1
1220 G/M/BA f> 2
1230 G/M/BA f> 3
1240 G/M/BA f< 1
1250 G/M/BA f< 2
1260 G/M/BA f< 3
1270 BB U> 1
1280 BB U> 2
1290 BB U> 3
1300 BB U< 1
1310 BB U< 2
1320 BB U< 3
1330 BB U< 4
1340 BB Voltage trip
1350 BB f> 1
1360 BB f> 2
1370 BB f> 3
1380 BB f< 1
1390 BB f< 2
1400 BB f< 3
1410 BB f< 4
1420 df/dt (ROCOF)
1430 Vector jump
1440 BB pos seq volt
1450 G/M/BA P> 1
1460 G/M/BA P> 2
1470 G/M/BA P> 3
1480 G/M/BA P> 4
10 |
User Manual
1490 G/M/BA P> 5

1500 G/M Unbalance current
1510 G/M Unbalance volt
1520 G -Q>
1530 G Q>
1540 G/M Neg. Seq. current
1550 G/M Neg. seq. voltage
1560 Neg. seq. select
1570 G/M/BA zero seq. current
1580 G/M/BA zero seq. voltage
1590 Zero seq. select
1600 G/M/BA Directional overcurrent 1
1610 G/M/BA Directional overcurrent 2
1620 BB Unbalance U
1630 Ut< SP 1-3 1
1640 Ut< SP 4-6 1
1650 Ut< Activate 1
1660 Ut< 1
1670 Ut< SP 1-3 2
1680 Ut< SP 4-6 2
1690 Ut< Activate 2
1700 Ut< 2
1740 G P dep Q< 1-3
1750 G P dep Q< 4-6
1760 G P dep Q<
1770 G P dep Q> 1-3
1780 G P dep Q> 4-6
1790 G P dep Q>
1800 NEL 1 I>
1810 NEL 2 I>
1820 NEL 3 I>
1830 NEL 1 BB f>
1840 NEL 2 BB f>
1850 NEL 3 BB f>
1860 NEL 1 P>
1870 NEL 2 P>
1880 NEL 3 P>
1890 NEL 1 P>>
1900 NEL 2 P>>
1910 NEL 3 P>>
1960 U and Q < 1
1970 U and Q < 2
1980 GB ext. tripped
Control
Synchronisation
2120 Sync window
| 11
2130 GB/TB/BTB sync failure

2140 MB sync failure
2150 Phase seq error
2160 GB/TB/BTB open fail
2170 GB/TB/BTB close fail
2180 GB/TB/BTB pos. fail
2200 MB open fail
2210 MB close fail
2220 MB pos. fail
2270 Close before excitation fail
Regulation
2560 GOV reg. fail
2630 Deload error
2680 AVR reg. fail
Input/output
Binary input setup
3000 Dig. input 23
3010 Dig. input 24
3020 Dig. input 25
3030 Dig. input 26
3040 Dig. input 27
3130 Dig. input 43
3140 Dig. input 44
3150 Dig. input 45
3160 Dig. input 46
3170 Dig. input 47
3180 Dig. input 48
3190 Dig. input 49
3200 Dig. input 50
3210 Dig. input 51
3220 Dig. input 52
3230 Dig. input 53
3240 Dig. input 54
3250 Dig. input 55
3330 Dig. input 91
3340 Dig. input 92
3350 Dig. input 93
3360 Dig. input 94
3370 Dig. input 95
3380 Dig. input 96
3390 Dig. input 97
3400 Dig. input 102
3410 Dig. input 105
3420 Dig. input 108
3430 Dig. input 112
12 |
User Manual
3440 Dig. input 113

3450 Dig. input 114
3460 Dig. input 115
3470 Dig. input 116
3480 Dig. input 117
3490 Emergency stop
3500 Dig. input 127
3510 Dig. input 128
3520 Dig. input 129
3530 Dig. input 130
3540 Dig. input 131
3550 Dig. input 132
3560 Dig. input 133
Analogue input setup
4000 4-20 mA 91.1
4010 4-20 mA 91.2
4020 W. fail ana 91
4030 4-20 mA 93.1
4040 4-20 mA 93.2
4050 W. fail ana 93
4060 4-20 mA 95.1
4070 4-20 mA 95.2
4080 W. fail ana 95
4090 4-20 mA 97.1
4100 4-20 mA 97.2
4110 W. fail ana 97
Multi-analogue input setup
4120 4-20mA 102.1
4130 4-20mA 102.2
4140 V DC 102.1
4150 V DC 102.2
4160 PT 102.1
4170 PT 102.2
4180 VDO oil 102.1
4190 VDO oil 102.2
4200 VDO water 102.1
4220 VDO fuel 102.1
4230 VDO fuel 102.2
4240 W. fail 102
4250 4-20mA 105.1
4260 4-20mA 105.2
4270 V DC 105.1
4280 V DC 105.2
4290 PT 105.1
4300 PT 105.2
4310 VDO oil 105.1
| 13
4320 VDO oil 105.2

4350 VDO fuel 105.1
4360 VDO fuel 105.2
4370 W. fail 105
4380 4-20mA 108.1
4390 4-20mA 108.2
4400 V DC 108.1
4410 V DC 108.2
4420 PT 108.1
4430 PT 108.2
4440 VDO oil 108.1
4450 VDO oil 108.2
4480 VDO fuel 108.1
4490 VDO fuel 108.2
4500 W. fail 108
Differential measurement
4610 Delta analogue 1.1
Analogue input setup
4800 4-20 mA 127.1
4810 4-20 mA 127.2
4820 wire fail 4-20 mA 127
4830 4-20 mA 129.1
4840 4-20 mA 129.2
4850 Wire fail 4-20 mA 129.2
4860 4-20 mA 131.1
4870 4-20 mA 131.2
4880 Wire fail 4-20 mA 131
4890 4-20 mA 133.1
4900 4-20 mA 133.2
4910 Wire fail 4-20 mA 133
Aux. supply setup
4960 U< aux. term. 1
4970 U> aux. term. 1
4980 U< aux. term.98
4990 U> aux. term.98
14 |
User Manual
System
General setup
6270 Stop coil wire fail
6280 Int. comm. fail
6330 Engine heater 1
6410 Battery test
6420 Auto battery test
6430 Battery asymmetry
6440 Battery asymmetry 1
6470 Max ventilation 1
6480 Max ventilation 2
6500 Blk. swbd error
6510 Stp. swbd error
6540 Not in Auto
6890 Oil renewal
Communication
7520 Ext. comm. error
7530 CAN fail mode
7570 EI comm. error
7580 EIC warning
7590 EIC shutdown
7600 EIC overspeed
7610 EIC coolant t. 1
7620 EIC coolant t. 2
7630 EIC oil press. 1
7640 EIC oil press. 2
7650 EIC oil temp. 1
7660 EIC oil temp. 2
7670 EIC coolant level 1
7870 Any BTB missing/appl hazard
7930 CAN 1 Comm error
7940 CAN 2 Comm error
External I/O
12000 Ext. Ain 1.1
12010 Ext. Ain 1.2
12030 Ext. Ain 2.1
12040 Ext. Ain 2.2
12060 Ext. Ain 3.1
12070 Ext. Ain 3.2
12090 Ext. Ain 4.1
12100 Ext. Ain 4.2
12120 Ext. Ain 5.1
12130 Ext. Ain 5.2
12150 Ext. Ain 6.1
| 15
12160 Ext. Ain 6.2

12180 Ext. Ain 7.1
12190 Ext. Ain 7.2
12210 Ext. Ain 8.1
12220 Ext. Ain 8.2
12230 4-20 mA Ext in 1 scale
12540 Ext dig. In 1
12550 Ext dig. In 2
12560 Ext dig. In 3
12570 Ext dig. In 4
12580 Ext dig. In 5
12590 Ext dig. In 6
12600 Ext dig. In 7
12610 Ext dig. In 8
12620 Ext dig. In 9
12630 Ext dig. In 10
16 |
User Manual
3.3 Protection parameters
3.3.1 Reverse power and overcurrent protection
No. Setting Min. Factory Notes Ref. Description

Max. setting
1000 G/M/BA reverse power 1

G/M/BA -200.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm and fail class are
1001 Setpoint -5.0%
–P> 1 0.0% User Manual activated when the reverse
power has been continuously
G/M/BA 0.1 s
1002 Timer 10.0 s above the programmed value
–P> 1 100.0 s during the programmed delay.
G/M/BA Relay Not used
1003 Not used
–P> 1 output A Option dep.
1004 Not used
–P> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1005 Enable ON
–P> 1 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
1006 Fail class F1…F8
–P> 1 (F3)
1010 G/M/BA reverse power 2

1011 Setpoint -5.0%
–P> 2 0.0% User Manual activated when the reverse
power has been continuously
G/M/BA 0.1 s
1012 Timer 10.0 s above the programmed value
–P> 2 100.0 s during the programmed delay.
1013 Not used
–P> 2 output A Option dep.
1014 Not used
–P> 2 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1015 Enable ON
–P> 2 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
–P> 2 (F3)
1030 G/M/BA overcurrent 1

G/M/BA 50.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm and fail class are
1031 Setpoint 115.0%
I> 1 200.0% User Manual activated when the current has
been continuously above the
G/M/BA 0.1 s
1032 Timer 10.0 s programmed value during the
I> 1 3200.0 s programmed delay.
1033 Not used
I> 1 output A Option dep.
1034 Not used
I> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1035 Enable ON
I> 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
I> 1 (F2)
| 17

Max. setting

G/M/BA 0.1 s
1043 Not used
1044 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1045 Enable ON
I> 2 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
I> 2 (F3)

G/M/BA 0.1 s
1053 Not used
1054 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1055 Enable ON
I> 3 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
I> 3 (F3)

G/M/BA 0.1 s
1063 Not used
1064 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1065 Enable ON
I> 4 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
I> 4 (F3)
18 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1100 Voltage-dependent overcurrent curve setting

@50% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
50.0%
1101 G Iv > (50%) Setpoint I1 110.0% nom. User Manual generator current.
200.0%
voltage The condition has to be true
i.e. I1<I2<I3<I4<I5<I6.
@60%
50.0% If this is not fulfilled, the
1102 G Iv > (60%) Setpoint I2 125.0% nom.
200.0% worst-case setpoint I1 will be
voltage
used.
@70% Setpoints 3 to 6 include Relay
50.0%
1103 G Iv > (70%) Setpoint I3 140.0% nom. output A and B.
200.0%
voltage
@80%
50.0%
200.0%
voltage
@90%
50.0%
200.0%
voltage
@100%
50.0%
200.0%
voltage
1110 Voltage-dependent overcurrent alarm

50.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm and fail class are
1110 G Iv > Setpoint 110.0%
200.0% User Manual activated when the overcurrent
has been continuously above
0.1 s
1111 G Iv > Timer 1.0 s the programmed value during
10.0 s the programmed delay. The
Relay Not used setpoint value is calculated
1112 G Iv > Not used automatically by the values in
output A Option dep.
menus 1101-1106.
Relay Not used
1113 G Iv > Not used
output B Option dep.
OFF
1114 G Iv > Activate ON
ON
1115 G Iv > Fail class F1…F8 Trip GB (F3)
1130 G/M/BA fast overcurrent 1

G/M/BA 150.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm settings relate to the
I>> 1 350.0% User Manual nominal current setting.
The alarm and fail class are
G/M/BA 0.0 s
1132 Timer 2.0 s activated when the current has
I>> 1 100.0 s been continuously above the
G/M/BA Relay Not used programmed value during the
1133 Not used programmed delay.
I>> 1 output A Option dep.

1134 Not used
I>> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1135 Enable OFF
I>> 1 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
I>> 1 (F3)
| 19

Max. setting
1140 G/M/BA fast overcurrent 2

I>> 2 350.0% User Manual activated when the current has
G/M/BA 0.0 s
I>> 2 100.0 s programmed delay.
1143 Not used
I>> 2 output A Option dep.

1144 Not used
I>> 2 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1145 Enable OFF
I>> 2 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
I>> 2 (F3)
3.3.2 Voltage protections

Max. setting
1150 G/M/BA overvoltage 1

U> 1 120.0% User Manual activated when the voltage has
G/M/BA 0.1 s
U> 1 100.0 s programmed delay.
1153 Not used
U> 1 output A Option dep.

1154 Not used
U> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1155 Enable OFF
U> 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
U> 1 (F2)
1160 G/M/BA overvoltage 2

U> 2 120.0% User Manual activated when the voltage has
G/M/BA 0.1 s programmed value during the
1162 Timer 5.0 s
U> 2 100.0 s programmed delay.
1163 Not used
U> 2 output A Option dep.

1164 Not used
U> 2 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1165 Enable OFF
U> 2 ON
G/M/BA Warning
U> 2 (F2)
20 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1170 G/M/BA undervoltage 1

1171 Setpoint 97.0%
U< 1 100.0% User Manual activated when the voltage has
been continuously under the
1172 Timer 10.0 s
U< 1 100.0 s programmed delay.
1173 Not used
U< 1 output A Option dep.

1174 Not used
U< 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1175 Enable OFF
U< 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
U< 1 (F2)

1181 Setpoint 95.0%
1182 Timer 5.0 s
1183 Not used

1184 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1185 Enable OFF
U< 2 ON
G/M/BA Warning
U< 2 (F2)

1191 Setpoint 95.0%
1192 Timer 5.0 s
1193 Not used

1194 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1195 Enable OFF
U< 3 ON
G/M/BA Warning
U< 3 (F2)
| 21

Max. setting
1200 G/M/BA Voltage trip

Qc4002™ MkII Selection between phase-phase
User Manual or phase-neutral voltage
detection.
When phase-phase tripping is
G/M/BA Ph-Ph selected, the voltage alarms
1201 Setpoint Ph-Ph
Voltage trip Ph-N relate to the nominal voltage.
When phase-neutral tripping is
selected, the voltage alarms
relate to the nominal voltage
divided by √3.
3.3.3 Frequency protections
NOTE: Frequency settings relate to the nominal frequency setting.

Max. setting
1210 G/M/BA overfrequency 1

f> 1 120.0% User Manual activated when the frequency
G/M/BA 0.2 s
1212 Timer 10.0 s the programmed value during
f> 1 100.0 s the programmed delay.
G/M/BA Relay Not used Frequency settings relate to
1213 Not used nominal frequency setting.
f> 1 output A Option dep.
1214 Not used
f> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1215 Enable OFF
f> 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f> 1 (F2)

G/M/BA 0.2 s the programmed value during
1222 Timer 5.0 s
1223 Not used

1224 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1225 Enable OFF
f> 2 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f> 2 (F2)
22 |
User Manual

Max. setting

1232 Timer 5.0 s
1233 Not used

1234 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1235 Enable OFF
f> 3 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f> 3 (F2)
1240 G/M/BA underfrequency 1

1241 Setpoint 97.0%
f< 1 100.0% User Manual activated when the frequency
has been continuously under
1242 Timer 10.0 s
f< 1 100.0 s the programmed delay.
1243 Not used
f< 1 output A Option dep.

1244 Not used
f< 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1245 Enable OFF
f< 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f< 1 (F2)

1251 Setpoint 95.0%
1252 Timer 5.0 s
1253 Not used

1254 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1255 Enable OFF
f< 2 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f< 2 (F2)
| 23

Max. setting

1261 Setpoint 95.0%
1262 Timer 5.0 s
1263 Not used

1264 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1265 Enable OFF
f< 3 ON
G/M/BA Warning
f< 3 (F2)
3.3.4 Busbar voltage protections

NOTE: Voltage settings relate to the nominal voltage setting.

Max. setting
1270 Busbar overvoltage 1

1271 BB U> 1 Setpoint 103.0%
120.0% User Manual activated when the voltage has
0.0 s programmed value during the
1272 BB U> 1 Timer 10.0 s
99.99 s programmed delay.
Relay Not used
1273 BB U> 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
1275 BB U> 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1276 BB U> 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

1281 BB U> 2 Setpoint 105.0%
1282 BB U> 2 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
24 |
User Manual

Max. setting

1291 BB U> 3 Setpoint 105.0%
1292 BB U> 3 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
1300 Busbar undervoltage 1

1301 BB U< 1 Setpoint 97.0%
1302 BB U< 1 Timer 10.0 s
Relay Not used
1303 BB U< 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
1305 BB U< 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1306 BB U< 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

1312 BB U< 2 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 25

Max. setting

1322 BB U< 3 Timer 10.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

1332 BB U< 4 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
1336 BB U< 4 Fail class F1…F8 Warning (F2)
1340 Busbar voltage trip

Qc4002™ MkII Selection between phase-phase
Ph-Ph
1341 BB voltage trip Setpoint Ph-Ph User Manual or phase-neutral voltage
Ph-N
detection.
26 |
User Manual
3.3.5 Busbar frequency protections
NOTE: Frequency settings relate to the nominal frequency setting.

Max. setting
1350 Busbar overfrequency 1

1351 BB f> 1 Setpoint 103.0%
120.0% User Manual activated when the frequency
0.00 s the programmed value during
1352 BB f> 1 Timer 10.0 s
99.99 s the programmed delay.
Relay Not used
1353 BB f> 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
1355 BB f> 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1356 BB f> 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

1361 BB f> 2 Setpoint 105.0%
1362 BB f> 2 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

1371 BB f> 3 Setpoint 105.0%
1372 BB f> 3 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 27

Max. setting
1380 Busbar underfrequency 1

1381 BB f< 1 Setpoint 97.0%
1382 BB f< 1 Timer 10.0 s
Relay Not used
1383 BB f< 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
1385 BB f< 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1386 BB f< 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

1392 BB f< 2 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

1402 BB f< 3 Timer 10.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
28 |
User Manual

Max. setting

0. 00 s the programmed value during
1412 BB f< 4 Timer 5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
3.3.6 Mains failure protections

Max. setting
1420 Df/dt (ROCOF)

1.5 Hz/s Option A1 The alarm and fail class are
1421 Df/dt (ROCOF) Setpoint 5.0 Hz/s
10.0 Hz/s activated when the df/dt rate
3 periods
1422 Df/dt (ROCOF) Timer 6 periods the programmed value during
20 periods the programmed number of
Relay Not used periods (delay).
1423 Df/dt (ROCOF) Not used
Relay Not used

1424 Df/dt (ROCOF) Not used
OFF
1425 Df/dt (ROCOF) Enable OFF
ON
1426 Df/dt (ROCOF) Fail class F1…F8 Trip MB (F6)
1430 Vector jump

1.0 deg. Option A1 The alarm and fail class are
1431 Vector jump Setpoint 10.0 deg.
90.0 deg. activated when a vector jump
is detected.
Relay Not used
1432 Vector jump Not used
Relay Not used

1433 Vector jump Not used
OFF
1434 Vector jump Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1435 Vector jump Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
| 29

Max. setting
1440 Busbar positive sequence voltage low

10.0% Option A4 The alarm and fail class are
1441 BB pos seq volt Setpoint 70.0%
110.0% activated when the
symmetrical (positive
1 period
1442 BB pos seq volt Timer 2 periods sequence) voltage has been
9 periods continuously below the
Relay Not used programmed value during the
1443 BB pos seq volt Not used programmed delay.
output A Option-dep.
The timer factory setting is set
Relay Not used to 2 periods. This means that
1444 BB pos seq volt Not used
output B Option-dep. the error has to be active in 2
OFF whole periods before the alarm
1445 BB pos seq volt Enable OFF will be tripped.
ON
E.g. in a 50 Hz system, the
alarm will be activated if the
positive sequence is below
Trip MB 70% of U nominal voltage for
1446 BB pos seq volt Fail class F1…F8
(F6) 40 ms. The alarm will trip the
fail class as soon as possible
after this delay.
3.3.7 Overload protections

Max. setting
1450 G/M/BA overload 1

G/M/BA -200.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
P> 1 200.0% User Manual power.
G/M/BA 0.1 s
1452 Timer 10.0 s activated when the power has
P> 1 3200.0 s
1453 Not used programmed delay.
P> 1 output A Option dep.
1454 Not used
P> 1 output B Option dep.
G/M/BA OFF
1455 Enable OFF
P> 1 ON
G/M/BA Warning
P> 1 (F2)
30 |
User Manual

Max. setting

P> 2 200.0% User Manual activated when the power has
1462 Timer 5.0 s
P> 2 3200.0 s programmed delay.
1463 Not used

1464 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1465 Enable OFF
P> 2 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
P> 2 (F3)

1472 Timer 10.0 s
1473 Not used

1474 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1475 Enable OFF
P> 3 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
P> 3 (F3)

1482 Timer 5.0 s
1483 Not used

1484 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1485 Enable OFF
P> 4 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
P> 4 (F3)
| 31

Max. setting

1492 Timer 10.0 s programmed delay.
P> 5 3200.0 s

1493 Not used

1494 Not used
G/M/BA OFF
1495 Enable OFF
P> 5 ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
P> 5 (F3)
3.3.8 Current unbalance protection

Max. setting
1500 G/M/BA unbalanced current

G/M/BA 0.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
1501 Setpoint 30.0%
unbalance curr. 100.0% User Manual generator current.
G/M/BA 0.1 s
1502 Timer 10.0 s activated when the difference
unbalance curr. 100.0 s
between the max. reading and
G/M/BA Relay Not used the min. reading of the 3
1503 Not used
unbalance curr. output A Option dep. measured currents has been
continuously above the
1504 Not used
unbalance curr. output B Option dep. programmed delay.
G/M/BA OFF
1505 Enable OFF
unbalance curr. ON
G/M/BA Trip GB
unbalance curr. (F3)
32 |
User Manual
3.3.9 Voltage unbalance protection

Max. setting
1510 G/M/BA unbalanced voltage

G/M/BA unbalance 0.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
1511 Setpoint 10.0%
volt. 50.0% User Manual voltage.
G/M/BA unbalance 0.1 s
1512 Timer 10.0 s activated when the difference
volt. 100.0 s between the max. reading and
G/M/BA unbalance Relay Not used the min. reading of the 3
1513 Not used measured generator voltages
volt. output A Option dep.
G/M/BA unbalance Relay Not used the programmed value during
1514 Not used
volt. output B Option dep. the programmed delay.
G/M/BA unbalance OFF
1515 Enable OFF
volt. ON
G/M/BA unbalance Trip GB

volt. (F3)
3.3.10 Reactive power import (loss of excitation) protection

Max. setting
1520 G/M/BA reactive power import (loss of excitation)

0.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
1521 G/M/BA –Q> Setpoint 50.0%
150.0% User Manual power.
0.1 s
1522 G/M/BA –Q> Timer 10.0 s activated when imported VAr
100.0 s
Relay Not used the programmed value during
1523 G/M/BA –Q> Not used the programmed delay.
Relay Not used

1524 G/M/BA –Q> Not used
OFF
1525 G/M/BA –Q> Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1526 G/M/BA –Q> Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 33
3.3.11 Reactive power export (over-excitation) protection

Max. setting
1530 G/M/BA reactive power export (overexcitation)

0.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to nominal
1531 G/M/BA Q> Setpoint 60.0%
100.0% User Manual power.
0.1 s
1532 G/M/BA Q> Timer 10.0 s activated when exported VAr
100.0 s has been continuously above
Relay Not used the programmed value during
1533 G/M/BA Q> Not used the programmed delay.
Relay Not used

1534 G/M/BA Q> Not used
OFF
1535 G/M/BA Q> Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1536 G/M/BA Q> Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
3.3.12 Negative sequence

Max. setting
1540 G/M/BA negative sequence current

1.0% Option C2 Settings relate to nominal
1541 G/M/BA neg seq I Setpoint 20.0%
100.0% current.
0.2 s
1542 G/M/BA neg seq I Timer 0.5 s activated when the negative
100.0 s sequence has been
Relay Not used continuously above the
1543 G/M/BA neg seq I Not used programmed value during the
programmed delay.
Relay Not used
1544 G/M/BA neg seq I Not used
OFF
1545 G/M/BA neg seq I Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1546 G/M/BA neg seq I Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
34 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1550 G/M/BA negative sequence voltage

1.0% Option C2 Settings relate to nominal
1551 G/M/BA neg seq U Setpoint 5.0%
100.0% voltage.
0.2 s
1552 G/M/BA neg seq U Timer 0.5 s activated when the negative
100.0 s
sequence has been
Relay Not used continuously above the
1553 G/M/BA neg seq U Not used programmed value during the
programmed delay.
Relay Not used
1554 G/M/BA neg seq U Not used
OFF
1555 G/M/BA neg seq U Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1556 G/M/BA neg seq U Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
1560 G/M/BA negative sequence selection

G/M/BA Option C2 Selection between generator
G/M/BA neg seq G/M/BA
1561 Setpoint measurement or busbar measurement of
select measurement
BB measurement negative sequence voltage.
3.3.13 Zero sequence

setting
Max.
1570 G/M/BA zero sequence current

0.0% Option C2
1571 G/M/BA zero seq I Setpoint 20.0% Settings relate to nominal
100.0% current.
0.2 s
1572 G/M/BA zero seq I Timer 0.5 s The alarm and fail class are
100.0 s activated when the zero
Relay Not used sequence has been
1573 G/M/BA zero seq I Not used continuously above the
programmed value during
Relay Not used the programmed delay.
1574 G/M/BA zero seq I Not used
OFF
1575 G/M/BA zero seq I Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1576 G/M/BA zero seq I Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
| 35

setting
Max.
1580 G/M/BA zero sequence voltage

G/M/BA zero seq 0.0% Option C2 Settings relate to nominal
1581 Setpoint 5.0%
U 100.0% voltage.
G/M/BA zero seq 0.2 s
1582 Timer 0.5 s activated when the zero
U 100.0 s
sequence has been
G/M/BA zero seq Relay Not used continuously above the
1583 Not used programmed value during
U output A Option dep.
the programmed delay.
G/M/BA zero seq Relay Not used
1584 Not used
U output B Option dep.
G/M/BA zero seq OFF

1585 Enable OFF
U ON
G/M/BA zero seq Trip MB

U (F6)
1590 G/M/BA zero sequence selection

G/M/BA Option C2 Selection between generator
G/M/BA zero seq G/M/BA
1591 Setpoint measurement or busbar measurement of
select measurement
BB measurement zero sequence voltage.
3.3.14 Directional overcurrent protection

Max. setting
1600 G/M/BA directional overcurrent 1

-200.0% Option A5 Settings relate to nominal
1601 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Setpoint 120.0%
200.0% current.
0.0 s
1602 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Timer 0.1 s activated when the directional
100.0 s current has been continuously
Relay Not used above the programmed value
1603 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Not used during the programmed delay.
The current measurement is
Relay Not used positive when current is
1604 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Not used
output B Option dep. supplied from the mains to the
OFF plant. The current
1605 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Enable OFF measurement is negative
ON
when current is being
Trip MB supplied to the mains.
1606 G/M/BA I> direct 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
36 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1610 G/M/BA directional overcurrent 2

-200.0% Option A5 Settings relate to nominal
1611 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Setpoint 130.0%
200.0% current.
0.0 s
1612 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Timer 0.1 s activated when the directional
100.0 s
current has been continuously
Relay Not used above the programmed value
1613 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Not used during the programmed delay.
The current measurement is
Relay Not used positive when current is
1614 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Not used
output B Option dep. supplied from the mains to the
OFF plant. The current
1615 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Enable OFF measurement is negative
ON
when current is being
Trip MB supplied to the mains.
1616 G/M/BA I> direct 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
3.3.15 Busbar unbalance voltage

Max. setting
1620 BB unbalance U
0.0% Qc4002™ MkII Settings relate to average
1621 BB unbalance U Setpoint 6.0%
50.0% User Manual actual voltage.
0.1 s 10.0 s
1622 BB unbalance U Timer activated when the difference
100.0 s between the max. reading and
Relay Not used the min. reading of the 3
1623 BB unbalance U Not used measured busbar voltages has
Relay Not used programmed value during the
1624 BB unbalance U Not used
output B Option dep. programmed delay.
OFF
1625 BB unbalance U Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1626 BB unbalance U Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 37
3.3.16 Time-dependent undervoltage

Max. setting
1630 Time-dependent undervoltage 1 1-3

30.0% Option A1 Curve setting for time-
1631 Ut < 1 Setting 1 30.0%
120.0% dependent undervoltage.
Settings relate to nominal
0.00 s
1632 Ut < 1 Delay 1 0.15 s generator voltage.
20.00 s
The condition has to be true
30.0% i.e. Ut(1)1≤Ut(2)≤Ut(3)≤
1633 Ut < 1 Setting 2 70.0%
120.0% Ut(4)≤Ut(5)≤Ut(6).
If this is not fulfilled, the
0.00 s
1634 Ut < 1 Delay 2 0.15 s worst-case setpoint Ut(6) will
20.00 s be used.
30.0%
1635 Ut < 1 Setting 3 70.0%
120.0%
0.00 s
1636 Ut < 1 Delay 3 0.70 s
20.00 s

1641 Ut < 1 Setting 4 90.0%
0.00 s
20.00 s
30.0% i.e. Ut(1)1≤Ut(2)≤Ut(3)≤
1643 Ut < 1 Setting 5 90.0%
120.0% Ut(4)≤Ut(5)≤Ut(6).
0.00 s
20.00 s be used.
30.0%
1645 Ut < 1 Setting 6 90.0%
120.0%
0.00 s
1646 Ut < 1 Delay 6 3.00 s
20.00 s
1650 Time-dependent undervoltage 1 activation

30.0% Option A1 Activate is the voltage value
1651 Ut < act 1 Activate 90%
120.0% where the function timer starts.
Reset is the value where the
30.0%
1652 Ut < act 1 Recovery 95% function timer is reset to 0 ms.
120.0%
Delay is the delay timer for the
0.0 s reset.
1653 Ut < act 1 Delay 1.00 s
320.0 s The relay outputs will activate
immediately when the function
Relay Not used
1654 Ut < act 1 Not used timer starts.
Relay Not used

1655 Ut < act 1 Not used
OFF
1656 Ut < act 1 Enable OFF
ON
38 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1660 Time-dependent undervoltage 1

Relay Not used Option A1 The alarm and fail class is
1661 Ut < 1 Not used
output A Option dep. activated instantaneously when
the voltage value is under the
Relay Not used
1662 Ut < 1 Not used programmed value curve.
OFF
1663 Ut < 1 Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1664 Ut < 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F6)

1671 Ut < 2 Setting 1 30.0% 120.0% 30.0% Option A1 Curve setting for time-
dependent undervoltage.
1672 Ut < 2 Delay 1 0.00 s 20.00 s 0.15 s
1673 Ut < 2 Setting 2 30.0% 120.0% 70.0% generator voltage.
1674 Ut < 2 Delay 2 0.00 s 20.00 s 0.15 s
i.e. Ut(1)1≤Ut(2)≤Ut(3)≤
1675 Ut < 2 Setting 3 30.0% 120.0% 70.0% Ut(4)≤Ut(5)≤Ut(6).
1676 Ut < 2 Delay 3 0.00 s 20.00 s 0.70 s worst-case setpoint Ut(6) will
be used.

1681 Ut < 2 Setting 4 90.0%
0.00 s
20.00 s
30.0% i.e. Ut(1)1≤Ut(2)≤Ut(3)≤
1683 Ut < 2 Setting 5 90.0%
120.0% Ut(4)≤Ut(5)≤Ut(6).
0.00 s
20.00 s be used.
30.0%
1685 Ut < 2 Setting 6 90.0%
120.0%
0.00 s
1686 Ut < 2 Delay 6 3.00 s
20.00 s
1690 Time-dependent undervoltage 2 activation

30.0% Option A1 Activate is the voltage value
1691 Ut < act 2 Activate 90%
120.0% where the function timer starts.
Reset is the value where the
30.0%
1692 Ut < act 2 Recovery 95% function timer is reset to 0 ms.
120.0%
Delay is the delay timer for the
0.0 s reset.
1693 Ut < act 2 Delay 1.00 s
320.0 s The relay output will activate
immediately when the function
Relay Not used
1694 Ut < act 2 Not used timer starts.
Relay Not used

1695 Ut < act 2 Not used
OFF
1696 Ut < act 2 Enable OFF
ON
| 39

Max. setting
1700 Time-dependent undervoltage 2

Relay Not used Option A1 The alarm and fail class is
1701 Ut < 2 Not used
output A Option dep. activated instantaneously when
the voltage value is under the
Relay Not used
1702 Ut < 2 Not used programmed value curve.
OFF
1703 Ut < 2 Enable OFF
ON
Trip MB
1704 Ut < 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F6)
3.3.17 Power dependent reactive power import

Max. setting
1740 G P dep Q< 1-3

0% Qc4002™ MkII
1741 G P dep Q< Q1 Setpoint 20%
100% User Manual
0%
1742 G P dep Q< P1 Setpoint 0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
1750 G P dep Q< 4-6

0% Qc4002™ MkII
100% User Manual
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
40 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1760 G P dep Q<

0.1 s Qc4002™ MkII
1761 G P dep Q< Timer 1.0 s
300.0 s User Manual
Relay Not used

1762 G P dep Q< Not used
output A Variant dep.
Relay Not used

1763 G P dep Q< Not used
output B Variant dep.
OFF
1764 G P dep Q< Enable OFF
ON
Trip GB
1765 G P dep Q< Fail class F1…F8
(F3)
3.3.18 Power dependent reactive power export

Max. setting
1770 G P dep Q> 1-3

0% Qc4002™ MkII
1771 G P dep Q> Q1 Setpoint 88%
100% User Manual
0%
1772 G P dep Q> P1 Setpoint 0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
1780 G P dep Q> 4-6

0% Qc4002™ MkII
100% User Manual
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
| 41

Max. setting
1790 G P dep Q>

0.1 s Qc4002™ MkII
1791 G P dep Q> Timer 1.0 s
300.0 s User Manual
Relay Not used

1792 G P dep Q> Not used
Relay Not used

1793 G P dep Q> Not used
OFF
1794 G P dep Q> Enable OFF
ON
Trip GB
1795 G P dep Q> Fail class F1…F8
(F3)
3.3.19 Non-essential load trip (load shedding)
NOTE: Setting values relate to the nominal setting.

Max. setting
1800 NEL 1 overcurrent

50.0% Qc4002™ MkII Trip of non-essential load due
1801 NEL 1 I> Setpoint 100.0%
200.0% User Manual to overcurrent. This function
activates NEL group 1.
0.1 s
1802 NEL 1 I> Timer 5.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
1803 NEL 1 I> Enable OFF
ON

0.1 s
1812 NEL 2 I> Timer 8.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
ON

0.1 s
1822 NEL 3 I> Timer 10.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
ON
42 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1830 NEL 1 busbar underfrequency

1831 NEL 1 bus f< Setpoint 95.0%
100.0% User Manual to low frequency. This
function activates NEL group
0.1 s
1832 NEL 1 bus f< Timer 5.0 s 1.
100.0 s
OFF
1835 NEL 1 bus f< Enable OFF
ON

0.1 s
1842 NEL 2 bus f< Timer 8.0 s 2.
100.0 s
OFF
ON

0.1 s
1852 NEL 3 bus f< Timer 10.0 s 3.
100.0 s
OFF
ON
1860 NEL 1 overload

1861 NEL 1 P> Setpoint 100.0%
200.0% User Manual to overload. This function
0.1 s
1862 NEL 1 P> Timer 5.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
1865 NEL 1 P> Enable OFF
ON
1870 NEL 2 overload

0.1 s
1872 NEL 2 P> Timer 8.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
ON
1880 NEL 3 overload

0.1 s
1882 NEL 3 P> Timer 10.0 s
100.0 s
OFF
ON
| 43

Max. setting
1890 NEL 1 high overload

1891 NEL 1 P>> Setpoint 110.0%
200.0% User Manual to high overload. This
0.1 s
1892 NEL 1 P>> Timer 1.0 s 1.
999.9 s
OFF
1895 NEL 1 P>> Enable OFF
ON

1901 NEL 2 P>> Setpoint 110.0%
200.0% User Manual to high overload. This
0.1 s 2.
1902 NEL 2 P>> Timer 1.0 s
999.9 s
OFF
ON

Qc4002™ MkII
10.0% Trip of non-essential load due
1911 NEL 3 P>> Setpoint 110.0% User Manual
to high overload. This
200.0%
3.
0.1 s
1912 NEL 3 P>> Timer 1.0 s
999.9 s
OFF
ON
3.3.20 Undervoltage and reactive power low

Max. setting
1960 U and Q < 1

Option A1 The setting relates to the
1961 U and Q < 1 Setpoint 40.0% 100.0% 85.0%
generator nominal voltage.
The condition for trip is that
0.1 s
1962 U and Q < 1 Timer 0.5 s the actual voltage drops
3200.0 s
below the setting value
Relay and the reactive power is
1963 U and Q < 1 Option dep. Not used ≤ 0 kVAr.
output A
Relay
1964 U and Q < 1 Option dep. Not used
output B
OFF
1965 U and Q < 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1966 U and Q < 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
44 |
User Manual

Max. setting
1970 U and Q < 2

1971 U and Q < 2 Setpoint 40.0% 100.0% 85.0% Option A1 The setting relates to the
generator nominal voltage.
0.1 s
1972 U and Q < 2 Timer 0.5 s The condition for trip is that
3200.0 s
the actual voltage drops
Relay below the setting value
output A and the reactive power is
≤ 0 kVAr.
Relay
output B
OFF
1975 U and Q < 2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
1976 U and Q < 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
1980 GB/MB external trip

OFF Qc4002™ MkII The generator breaker or the
1981 GB ext. trip Enable ON
ON User Manual mains breaker has been
tripped by an external
Warning
1982 GB ext. trip Fail class F1…F8 device.
(F2)
OFF
1983 MB ext. trip Enable ON
ON
Warning
1984 MB ext. trip Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 45
3.4 Control parameters - synchronisation
3.4.1 Synchronisation and breaker alarms

Max. setting
2120 Synchronisation window

2.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm will activate if the
2121 Sync window Setpoint 15.0%
20.0% User Manual actual voltage deviates from
nominal voltage with the set
0.1 s
2122 Sync window Timer 0.5 s percentage.
2.0 s
Relay output Not used

2123 Sync window Not used
A Option dep.

2124 Sync window Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
2125 Sync window Enable OFF
ON
2130 GB/TB/BTB breaker synchronisation failure

GB/TB/BTB sync 30.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The controller has
2131 Timer 60.0 s
failure 300.0 s User Manual unsuccessfully tried to
synchronise the breaker to
GB/TB/BTB sync Relay output Not used the busbar within the time
2132 Not used
failure A Option dep. delay.
GB/TB/BTB sync Relay output Not used
2133 Not used
failure B Option dep.
GB/TB/BTB sync OFF

2134 Enable ON
failure ON
GB/TB/BTB sync Block

failure (F1)
2140 Mains breaker synchronisation failure

30.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The controller has
2141 MB sync failure Timer 60.0 s
300.0 s User Manual unsuccessfully tried to
synchronise the breaker to
Relay output Not used the busbar within the time
2142 MB sync failure Not used
A Option dep. delay.
2143 MB sync failure Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
2144 MB sync failure Enable ON
ON
Warning
2145 MB sync failure Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
46 |
User Manual

Max. setting
2150 Phase sequence error

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ MkII The controller has detected
2151 Phase seq error Not used
A Option dep. User Manual that the rotation direction of
the generator phases is
Relay output Not used opposite direction as the
2152 Phase seq error Not used
B Option dep. busbar.
Block
2153 Phase seq error Fail class F1…F8
(F1) Compares phase rotation to
expected direction at all
L1L2L3 times, not only during
2154 Phase rotation Setpoint L1L2L3
L1L3L2 synchronisation.
2160 GB/TB/BTB open failure

GB/TB/BTB open 1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The breaker open failure will
2161 Timer 2.0 s
fail 10.0 s User Manual occur if the unit has
transmitted a breaker open
GB/TB/BTB open Relay output Not used signal and the breaker
2162 Not used
fail A Option dep. feedback has not changed
GB/TB/BTB open Relay output Not used position from ON to OFF
2163 Not used within the time delay.
fail B Option dep.
GB/TB/BTB open OFF

2164 Enable ON
fail ON
GB/TB/BTB open Warning

fail (F2)
2170 GB/TB/BTB breaker close failure

GB/BTB/BTB 1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The breaker close failure
2171 Timer 2.0 s
close fail 5.0 s User Manual will occur if the unit has
transmitted a breaker close
GB/BTB/BTB Relay output Not used signal and the breaker
2172 Not used
close fail A Option dep. feedback has not changed
GB/BTB/BTB Relay output Not used position from OFF to ON
2173 Not used within the timer delay.
close fail B Option dep.
GB/BTB/BTB OFF
2174 Enable ON
close fail ON
GB/BTB/BTB Warning
close fail (F2)
2180 GB/TB/BTB breaker position failure

GB/TB/BTB pos 1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII This alarm will occur if the
2181 Timer 1.0 s
fail 5.0 s User Manual breaker feedbacks for ON
and OFF are both missing or
GB/TB/BTB pos Relay output Not used active for more than the time
2182 Not used
fail A Option dep. delay,
GB/TB/BTB pos Relay output Not used
2183 Not used
fail B Option dep.
GB/TB/BTB pos OFF

2184 Enable ON
fail ON
GB/TB/BTB pos Warning

fail (F2)
| 47

Max. setting
2200 MB open failure

1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The breaker open failure will
2201 MB open fail Timer 2.0 s
10.0 s User Manual occur if the unit has
transmitted a breaker open
Relay output Not used signal and the breaker
2202 MB open fail Not used
A Option dep. feedback has not changed
Relay output Not used position from ON to OFF
2203 MB open fail Not used within the time delay.
B Option dep.
2204 MB open fail Enable ON ON
Warning
2205 MB open fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
2210 MB close failure

1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The breaker close failure
2211 MB close fail Timer 2.0 s
5.0 s User Manual will occur if the unit has
transmitted a breaker close
Relay output Not used signal and the breaker
2212 MB close fail Not used
A Option dep. feedback has not changed
Relay output Not used position from OFF to ON
2213 MB close fail Not used within the time delay.
B Option dep.
2214 MB close fail Enable ON ON
Warning
2215 MB close fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
2220 MB position failure

1.0 s Qc4002™ MkII This alarm will occur if the
2221 MB pos fail Timer 1.0 s
5.0 s User Manual breaker feedbacks for ON
and OFF are both missing or
Relay output Not used active for more than the time
2222 MB pos fail Not used
A Option dep. delay.
2223 MB pos fail Not used
B Option dep.
2224 MB pos fail Enable ON ON
Warning
2225 MB pos fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
2270 Close before excitation failure

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII This alarm will occur if the
2271 Cl.bef.exc.fail Timer 5.0 s
999.0 s User Manual generator and breaker are not
operating within the limits of
Relay output Not used the Close Before Excitation.
2272 Cl.bef.exc.fail Not used
A Option dep. The alarm will open the
Relay output Not used generator breaker and enable
2273 Cl.bef.exc.fail Not used the regulation synchronising
B Option dep.
the generator in a normal
OFF way.
2274 Cl.bef.exc.fail Enable OFF
ON
Warning
2275 Cl.bef.exc.fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
48 |
User Manual
3.5 Control parameters - regulation
3.5.1 Regulation alarms

Max. setting
2560 Governor regulation fail

1.0% Qc4002™ MkII The alarm is activated if the
2561 Gov. reg fail Dead band 30.0%
100.0% User Manual difference between the
measured value and the
10.0 s
2562 Gov. reg fail Timer 60.0 s setpoint is outside the dead
300.0 s band for longer than the
Relay Not used time delay.
2563 Gov. reg fail Not used
Relay Not used

2564 Gov. reg fail Not used
Warning
2565 Gov. reg fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
2630 Deload error

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The alarm is activated if the
2631 Deload error Timer 10.0 s
User Manual generator fails to deload
60.0 s
within the time delay.
Relay Not used
2632 Deload error Not used
Relay Not used

2633 Deload error Not used
OFF
2634 Deload error Enable ON
ON
Warning
2635 Deload error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
2680 AVR regulation failure

1.0% Option D1 The alarm is activated if the
2681 AVR reg. failure Dead band 30.0%
100.0% difference between the
measured value and the
10.0 s
2682 AVR reg. failure Timer 60.0 s setpoint is outside the setting
300.0 s ‘Deadband’ for a longer
Relay Not used time period than specified in
1153 AVR reg. failure Not used the timer setpoint.
Relay Not used

1154 AVR reg. failure Not used
Warning
1155 AVR reg. failure Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
NOTE: These parameters are used when a digital input are used as protection inputs or to activate a limit relay.
| 49
3.6 Input/output parameters - binary input setup
3.6.1 Digital input 23-27 setup

Max. setting
3000 Digital input 23

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The input is configurable
3001 Dig. input 23 Timer 10.0 s
100.0 s User Manual and can have different
functions in different units.
Relay Not used
3002 Dig. input 23 Not used Inputs 24-27 are by default
output A Option dep. used for breaker feedback.
Relay Not used These inputs are only
3003 Dig. input 23 Not used available if no MB or TB is
present in the application.
OFF
3004 Dig. input 23 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
3005 Dig. input 23 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
OFF
3006 Dig. input 23 High Alarm ON
ON
NOTE: The same settings apply to inputs 24-27, menus 3010 to 3040.

Max. setting

0.0 s Option M12 The input is configurable
100.0 s and can have different
Relay Not used
3132 Dig. input 43 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
High OFF
3136 Dig. input 43 ON
Alarm ON
50 |
User Manual

Max. setting

0.0 s Option M12 The input is configurable
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
OFF
ON

Max. setting

OFF Qc4002™ MkII The input is configurable
3401 Wire fail 102 Enable OFF
ON User Manual and can have different
0.0 s
3402 Dig. input 102 Timer 10.0 s (Only available if multi-
100.0 s
input 102 is configured to
Relay output Not used ‘binary’ in menu 10980).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 51

Max. setting

0.0 s
100.0 s
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

0.0 s
100.0 s
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

Max. setting

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII The input is configurable
100.0 s User Manual and can have different
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
OFF
ON
52 |
User Manual
3.6.6 Emergency stop

Max. setting
3490 Emergency stop

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII Emergency stop input is
3491 Emer. stop Timer 0.0 s
60.0 s User Manual intended for a normally
closed contact.
Not used
Relay output
3492 Emer. stop Option Not used
A
dependent
Not used
Relay output
3493 Emer. stop Option Not used
B
dependent
OFF
3494 Emer. stop Enable ON
ON
Shutdown
3495 Emer. stop Fail class F1…F8
(F5)

Max. setting

0.0 s Option M13.8 The input is configurable
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
OFF
ON
| 53
3.7 Input/output parameters - analogue input setup
3.7.1 Analogue input setup (option M15.6)

Max. setting
4000 4-20 mA 91.1

4 mA Option M15.6: Configurable analogue
4001 4-20 mA 91.1 Setpoint 10 mA
20 mA 4 x 4-20 mA input.
inputs
0.0 s
4002 4-20 mA 91.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4003 4-20 mA 91.1 Not used
Relay Not used
4004 4-20 mA 91.1 Not used
OFF
4005 4-20 mA 91.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4006 4-20 mA 91.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4010 4-20 mA 91.2

4011 4-20 mA 91.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4012 4-20 mA 91.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4013 4-20 mA 91.2 Not used
Relay Not used
4014 4-20 mA 91.2 Not used
OFF
4015 4-20 mA 91.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4016 4-20 mA 91.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4020 Wire fail 4-20 mA 91

Relay Not used Option M15.6: The wire fault will detect if
4021 W. fail ana 91 Not used
output A Option dep. 4 x 4-20 mA the current drops below 2
inputs mA or exceeds 22 mA. In
Relay Not used
4022 W. fail ana 91 Not used both cases the alarm will be
output B Option dep. activated.
OFF
4023 W. fail ana 91 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4024 W. fail ana 91 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
54 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4030 4-20 mA 93.1

4031 4-20 mA 93.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4032 4-20 mA 93.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4033 4-20 mA 93.1 Not used
Relay Not used
4034 4-20 mA 93.1 Not used
OFF
4035 4-20 mA 93.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4036 4-20 mA 93.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4040 4-20 mA 93.2

4041 4-20 mA 93.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4042 4-20 mA 93.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4043 4-20 mA 93.2 Not used
Relay Not used
4044 4-20 mA 93.2 Not used
OFF
4045 4-20 mA 93.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4046 4-20 mA 93.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 55

Max. setting
4060 4-20 mA 95.1

4061 4-20 mA 95.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4062 4-20 mA 95.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4063 4-20 mA 95.1 Not used
Relay Not used
4064 4-20 mA 95.1 Not used
OFF
4065 4-20 mA 95.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4066 4-20 mA 95.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4070 4-20 mA 95.2

4071 4-20 mA 95.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4072 4-20 mA 95.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4073 4-20 mA 95.2 Not used
Relay Not used
4074 4-20 mA 95.2 Not used
OFF
4075 4-20 mA 95.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4076 4-20 mA 95.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
56 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4090 4-20 mA 97.1

4091 4-20 mA 97.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4092 4-20 mA 97.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4093 4-20 mA 97.1 Not used
Relay Not used
4094 4-20 mA 97.1 Not used
OFF
4095 4-20 mA 97.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4096 4-20 mA 97.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4100 4-20 mA 97.2

4101 4-20 mA 97.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs
0.0 s
4102 4-20 mA 97.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4103 4-20 mA 97.2 Not used
Relay Not used

4104 4-20 mA 97.2 Not used
OFF
4105 4-20 mA 97.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4106 4-20 mA 97.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

output A Option dep. 4 x 4-20 mA the current drops below
inputs 2 mA or exceeds 22 mA. In
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 57
3.8 Multi-functional analogue input setup
3.8.1 Multi-input no. 102

NOTE: The available menus for multi-input no. 102 depend on the input type configured in the PC utility software
(menu 10980).

Max. setting
4120 4-20 mA 102.1

4 mA Qc4002™ MkII The multi-input 102 has
4121 4-20 mA 102.1 Setpoint 10 mA
20 mA User Manual been configured as
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4122 4-20 mA 102.1 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s

4123 4-20 mA 102.1 Not used
A Option dep.

4124 4-20 mA 102.1 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4125 4-20 mA 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4126 4-20 mA 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4130 4-20 mA 102.2

4131 4-20 mA 102.2 Setpoint 10 mA
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4132 4-20 mA 102.2 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s

4133 4-20 mA 102.2 Not used
A Option dep.

4134 4-20 mA 102.2 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4135 4-20 mA 102.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4136 4-20 mA 102.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4140 V DC 102.1
0.0 V DC Qc4002™ MkII The multi-input 102 has
4141 V DC 102.1 Setpoint 20.0 V DC
40.0 V DC User Manual been configured as V DC.
0.2 s
4142 V DC 102.1 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s

4143 V DC 102.1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
4145 V DC 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4146 V DC 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
58 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4150 V DC 102.2
0.2 s
4152 V DC 102.2 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4160 Pt100 102.1

-49 Qc4002™ MkII The multi-input 102 has
4161 PT 102.1 Setpoint 80
482 User Manual been configured as Pt100.
Pt100 setpoint can be in
0.0 s
4162 PT 102.1 Timer 5.0 s deg. C or Fahrenheit,
999.0 s
dependent on the unit
Relay output Not used selection (menu 10970).
4163 PT 102.1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
4165 PT 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4166 PT 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4170 Pt100 102.2

0.0 s
4172 PT 102.2 Timer 10.0 s deg. C or Fahrenheit,
999.0 s
dependent on the unit
Relay output Not used selection (menu 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 59

Max. setting
4180 VDO oil 102.1

0.0 Qc4002™ MkII The multi-input 102 has
4181 VDO oil 102.1 Setpoint 4.0
145.0 User Manual been configured as VDO oil
pressure.
0.0 s
4182 VDO oil 102.1 Timer 5.0 s Oil pressure setpoint can be
999.0 s
in Bar or PSI, dependent on
Relay output Not used the unit selection (menu
4183 VDO oil 102.1 Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

4184 VDO oil 102.1 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4185 VDO oil 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4186 VDO oil 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4190 VDO oil 102.2

pressure.
0.0 s
999.0 s
4193 VDO oil 102.2 Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

4201 VDO water 102.1 Setpoint 100
482 User Manual been configured as VDO
water temperature.
0.0 s
4202 VDO water 102.1 Timer 5.0 s Water temperature setpoint
999.0 s can be in deg. C or F,
Relay output Not used dependent on the unit
4203 VDO water 102.1 Not used selection (menu 10970).
A Option dep.

4204 VDO water 102.1 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4205 VDO water 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4206 VDO water 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
60 |
User Manual

Max. setting

water temperature.
0.0 s
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4220 VDO fuel level 102.1

0% Qc4002™ MkII The multi-input 102 has
4221 VDO fuel 102.1 Setpoint 10%
100% User Manual been configured as VDO
fuel level.
0.0 s
4222 VDO fuel 102.1 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s

4223 VDO fuel 102.1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
4225 VDO fuel 102.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4226 VDO fuel 102.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

fuel level.
0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 61

Max. setting
4240 Wire fail 102

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ MkII The wire break fault
4241 W. fail 102 Not used
A Option dep. User Manual detection is activated.

B Option dep.
OFF
4243 W. fail 102 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4244 W. fail 102 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

(menu 10990).

Max. setting
4250 4-20 mA 105.1

4251 4-20 mA 105.1 Setpoint 10 mA
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4252 4-20 mA 105.1 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

4253 4-20 mA 105.1 Not used
Relay Not used
4254 4-20 mA 105.1 Not used
OFF
4255 4-20 mA 105.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4256 4-20 mA 105.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4260 4-20 mA 105.2

4261 4-20 mA 105.2 Setpoint 10 mA
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4262 4-20 mA 105.2 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

4263 4-20 mA 105.2 Not used
Relay Not used
4264 4-20 mA 105.2 Not used
OFF
4265 4-20 mA 105.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4266 4-20 mA 105.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
62 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4270 V DC 105.1
0.2 s
4272 V DC 105.1 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4280 V DC 105.2
0.2 s
4282 V DC 105.2 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4290 Pt100 105.1

0.0 s
4292 PT 105.1 Timer 5.0 s deg. C or F, dependent on
999.0 s the unit selection (menu
Relay Not used 10970).
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 63

Max. setting
4300 Pt100 105.2

0.0 s
999.0 s
the unit selection (menu
Relay Not used 10970).
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4310 VDO oil 105.1

pressure.
0.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used the unit selection (menu
4313 VDO oil 105.1 Not used 10970).
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4320 VDO oil 105.2

pressure.
0.0 s
999.0 s in Bar or PSI, dependent on
Relay Not used the unit selection (menu
4323 VDO oil 105.2 Not used 10970).
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
64 |
User Manual

Max. setting

water temperature.
0.0 s
Relay Not used dependent on the unit
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

water temperature.
0.0 s
999.0 s
can be in deg. C or F,
Relay Not used dependent on the unit
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

fuel level.
0.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 65

Max. setting

fuel level.
0.0 s
999.0 s
Relay Not used

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4370 Wire fail 105

Relay Not used Qc4002™ MkII The wire break fault
output A Option dep. User Manual detection is activated.
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
(menu 11000).

Max. setting
4380 4-20 mA 108.1

4381 4-20 mA 108.1 Setpoint 10 mA
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4382 4-20 mA 108.1 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s

4383 4-20 mA 108.1 Not used
A Option dep.

4384 4-20 mA 108.1 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4385 4-20 mA 108.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4386 4-20 mA 108.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
66 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4390 4-20 mA 108.2

4391 4-20 mA 108.2 Setpoint 10 mA
4-20 mA.
0.0 s
4392 4-20 mA 108.2 Timer 120.0 s
999.0 s

4393 4-20 mA 108.2 Not used
A Option dep.

4394 4-20 mA 108.2 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
4395 4-20 mA 108.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4396 4-20 mA 108.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4400 V DC 108.1
0.2 s
4402 V DC 108.1 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4410 V DC 108.2
0.2 s
4412 V DC 108.2 Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 67

Max. setting
4420 Pt100 108.1

0.0 s
999.0 s
Relay output Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4430 Pt100 108.2

0.0 s
999.0 s
Relay output Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4440 VDO oil 108.1

pressure.
0.0 s
999.0 s in Bar or PSI, dependent on
4443 VDO oil 108.1 Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
68 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4450 VDO oil 108.2

pressure.
0.0 s
999.0 s
4453 VDO oil 108.2 Not used 10970).
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

water temperature.
0.0 s
999.0 s
can be in deg. C or F,
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

water temperature.
0.0 s
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 69

Max. setting

fuel level.
0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

fuel level.
0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
4500 Wire fail 108

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ MkII The wire break fault
A Option dep. User Manual detection is activated.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
70 |
User Manual
3.8.4 Differential measurement

Max. setting

999.1 Qc4002™ MkII Delta analogue alarm
4611 Delta Ana1.1 Setpoint 1
999.1 User Manual setting 1.1
0.0 s
4612 Delta Ana1.1 Timer 5.0 s
999.0 s

4613 Delta Ana1.1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
4615 Delta Ana1.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4616 Delta Ana1.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 71

Max. setting

4641 Delta ana 2.2 Setpoint 1
0.0 s
4642 Delta ana 2.2 Timer 5.0 s
999.0 s

4643 Delta ana 2.2 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
4645 Delta ana 2.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4646 Delta ana 2.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)

0.0 s
999.0 s

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
72 |
User Manual
3.8.5 Analogue input setup (option M15.8)

Max. setting
4800 4-20 mA 127.1

4 mA Option: Configurable analogue
4801 4-20 mA 127.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4802 4-20 mA 127.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4803 4-20 mA 127.1 Not used
Relay Not used

4804 4-20 mA 127.1 Not used
OFF
4805 4-20 mA 127.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4806 4-20 mA 127.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4810 4-20 mA 127.2

4811 4-20 mA 127.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4812 4-20 mA 127.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4813 4-20 mA 127.2 Not used
Relay Not used

4814 4-20 mA 127.2 Not used
OFF
4815 4-20 mA 127.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4816 4-20 mA 127.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4820 wire fail 4-20 mA 127

Relay Not used Option: The wire fault will detect if
inputs (M15.8) 2 mA or exceeds 22 mA.
Relay Not used
4822 W. fail ana 127 Not used In both cases the alarm will
output B Option dep. be activated.
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 73

Max. setting
4830 4-20 mA 129.1

4831 4-20 mA 129.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4832 4-20 mA 129.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4833 4-20 mA 129.1 Not used
Relay Not used

4834 4-20 mA 129.1 Not used
OFF
4835 4-20 mA 129.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4836 4-20 mA 129.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4840 4-20 mA 129.2

4841 4-20 mA 129.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4842 4-20 mA 129.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4843 4-20 mA 129.2 Not used
Relay Not used

4844 4-20 mA 129.2 Not used
OFF
4845 4-20 mA 129.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4846 4-20 mA 129.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4850 Wire fail 4-20 mA 129.2

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
74 |
User Manual

Max. setting
4860 4-20 mA 131.1

4861 4-20 mA 131.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4862 4-20 mA 131.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4863 4-20 mA 131.1 Not used
Relay Not used

4864 4-20 mA 131.1 Not used
OFF
4865 4-20 mA 131.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4866 4-20 mA 131.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4870 4-20 mA 131.2

4871 4-20 mA 131.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4872 4-20 mA 131.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4873 4-20 mA 131.2 Not used
Relay Not used

4874 4-20 mA 131.2 Not used
OFF
4875 4-20 mA 131.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4876 4-20 mA 131.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4880 Wire fail 4-20 mA 131

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 75

Max. setting
4890 4-20 mA 133.1

4891 4-20 mA 133.1 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4892 4-20 mA 133.1 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4893 4-20 mA 133.1 Not used
Relay Not used

4894 4-20 mA 133.1 Not used
OFF
4895 4-20 mA 133.1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4896 4-20 mA 133.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4900 4-20 mA 133.2

4901 4-20 mA 133.2 Setpoint 10 mA
inputs (M15.8)
0.0 s
4902 4-20 mA 133.2 Timer 120.0 s
600.0 s
Relay Not used

4903 4-20 mA 133.2 Not used
Relay Not used

4904 4-20 mA 133.2 Not used
OFF
4905 4-20 mA 133.2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
4906 4-20 mA 133.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4910 Wire fail 4-20 mA 133

Relay Not used
OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
76 |
User Manual
3.8.6 Aux. supply setup

Max. setting
4960 U< auxiliary power supply terminal 1

8.0 V DC Qc4002™ MkII The power supply on
4961 U< aux. term. 1 Setpoint 18.0 V DC
32.0 V DC User Manual terminal 1 and 2 has been
continuously below the
0.0 s
4962 U< aux. term. 1 Timer 1.0 s adjusted setpoint during the
Relay Not used
4963 U< aux. term. 1 Not used
Relay Not used

4964 U< aux. term. 1 Not used
OFF
4965 U< aux. term. 1 Enable ON
ON
Warning
4966 U< aux. term. 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4970 U> auxiliary power supply terminal 1

4971 U> aux. term. 1 Setpoint 30.0 V DC
0.0 s
4972 U> aux. term. 1 Timer 1.0 s adjusted setpoint during the
Relay Not used
4973 U> aux. term. 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
4975 U> aux. term. 1 Enable ON
ON
Warning
4976 U> aux. term. 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4980 U< auxiliary power supply terminal 98

continuously below the
0.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
| 77

Max. setting
4990 U> auxiliary power supply terminal 98

0.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
ON
Warning
(F2)
78 |
User Manual
3.9 System parameters - general setup
3.9.1 Stop coil wirebreak and internal communication alarms

Max. setting
6270 Stop coil wirebreak

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ MkII The wirebreak monitoring
6271 Stop coil wirebreak Not used
A Option dep. User Manual is only active when the stop
coil output is deactivated.
6272 Stop coil wirebreak Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
6273 Stop coil wirebreak Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6274 Stop coil wirebreak Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
6280 Internal communication fail

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ MkII This is the alarm for
6281 Int. comm. fail Not used
A Option dep. User Manual communication fail
between the main processor
Relay output Not used and the engine interface
6282 Int. comm. fail Not used
B Option dep. processor.
Warning
6283 Int. 79omm.. fail Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
3.9.2 Engine heater failure

Max. setting
6330 Engine heater 1

10 deg Qc4002™ MkII
6331 Engine heater 1 Setpoint 30 deg
250 deg User Manual
1.0 s
6332 Engine heater 1 Timer 10.0 s
300.0 s

6333 Engine heater 1 Not used
A Option dep.

6334 Engine heater 1 Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
6335 Engine heater 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6336 Engine heater 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 79
3.9.3 Battery tests

Max. setting
6410 Battery test

8.0 V Qc4002™ MkII If the battery voltage drops
6411 Battery test Setpoint 18.0 V
32.0 V User Manual below setpoint during crank
test the alarm activates.
1s
6412 Battery test Timer 20 s
300 s
Power supply
Multi-input 102
Multi-input 105 Power
6413 Battery test Type
Multi-input 108 supply
Power supply
98/99

6414 Battery test Not used
A Option dep.
OFF
6415 Battery test Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6416 Battery test Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
6420 Auto battery test

On Qc4002™ MkII Automatic battery test time
6421 Auto batt test Enable Off
Off User Manual setting.
Monday
6422 Auto batt test Day Monday
Sunday
0h
6423 Auto batt test Hours 10h
23 h
1
6424 Auto batt test Week 52
52

6425 Auto batt test Not used
A Option dep.
80 |
User Manual

Max. setting
6430 Battery asymmetry

Power supply Qc4002™ MkII Battery asymmetry input
Multi-input 102 User Manual selections.
Multi-input 105 Multi-
6431 Batt. asymmetry T1
Multi-input 108 input 105
Power supply
98/99
Power supply
Multi-input 102
Multi-input 105 Power
6432 Batt. asymmetry RF1
Multi-input 108 supply
Power supply
98/99
Power supply
Multi-input 102
6433 Batt. asymmetry T2
Power supply
98/99
Power supply
Multi-input 102
6434 Batt. asymmetry RF2
Power supply
98/99

0.1 V Qc4002™ MkII If the battery voltage
6441 Battery asym 1 Setpoint 1.0 V
15.0 V User Manual asymmetry between the
single batteries exceeds the
0.0 s
6442 Battery asym 1 Timer 1.0 s setting, the alarm will
10.0 s activate.
6443 Battery asym 1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
6445 Battery asym 1 Enable OFF
ON

0.1 V Qc4002™ MkII If the battery voltage
6451 Battery asym 2 Setpoint 1.0 V
15.0 V User Manual asymmetry between the
single batteries exceeds the
0.0 s
6452 Battery asym 2 Timer 1.0 s setting, the alarm will
10.0 s activate.
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
6455 Battery asym 2 Enable OFF
ON
| 81
3.9.4 Max. ventilation

Max. setting
6470 Max vent 1

20 deg Qc4002™ MkII If the cooling fans fail to
6471 Max vent 1 Setpoint 95 deg
250 deg User Manual operate and the coolant
temperature exceeds the
0.0 s
6472 Max vent 1 Timer 1.0 s setting, the alarm will
60.0 s activate.
Relay Not used
6473 Max vent 1 Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
6475 Max vent 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6476 Max vent 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
6480 Max vent 2

20 deg Qc4002™ MkII If the cooling fans fail to
6481 Max vent 2 Setpoint 98 deg
250 deg User Manual operate and the coolant
temperature exceeds the
0.0 s
6482 Max vent 2 Timer 1.0 s setting, the alarm will
60.0 s activate.
Relay Not used
Relay Not used

OFF
6485 Max vent 2 Enable OFF
ON
Shutdown
6486 Max vent 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F5)
82 |
User Manual
3.9.5 Switchboard error - Block and Stop

Max. setting
6500 Block switchboard error

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII If the binary input
6501 Blk. swbd error Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s User Manual “switchboard error”
activates, a stopped
ON
6502 Blk. swbd error Parallel OFF generator will be blocked
OFF for start.
Relay Not used Parameter 6502:
6503 Blk. swbd error Not used
output A Option dep. OFF: only AMF start is
affected
Relay Not used
6504 Blk. swbd error Not used ON: All starts are affected.
OFF
6505 Blk. swbd error Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6506 Blk. swbd error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
6510 Stop switchboard error

0.0 s Qc4002™ MkII If the binary input
6511 Stp. swbd error Timer 1.0 s
999.0 s User Manual “switchboard error”
activates, the generator will
Relay Not used
6512 Stp. swbd error Not used be stopped.
Relay Not used

6513 Stp. swbd error Not used
OFF
6514 Stp. swbd error Enable OFF
ON
Shutdown
6515 Stp. swbd error Fail class F1…F8
(F5)
3.9.6 Switchboard error - Not in auto

Max. setting
6540 Not in auto

10.0 s Qc4002™ MkII
6541 Not in auto Timer 300.0 s
900.0 s User Manual
Relay Not used

6542 Not in auto Not used
Relay Not used

6543 Not in auto Not used
OFF
6544 Not in auto Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6545 Not in auto Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 83
3.9.7 Oil renewal

Max. setting
6890 Oil renewal

1h Qc4002™ MkII Setup of Oil renewal
6891 Oil renewal Setpoint 750h
999h User Manual
Relay Not used

6892 Oil renewal Not used
Relay Not used

6893 Oil renewal Not used
Basic
Password
6894 Oil renewal Customer Basic
level
Service
3.10 System parameters - communication
3.10.1 External communication error

Max. setting
7520 External communication error

1.0 s
7521 Ext. comm. error Delay 10.0 s Modbus Supervision of the external
100.0 s Communication communication line. The
Relay Not used (standard) (H2) alarm will occur when there
7522 Ext. comm. error Not used has not been any
output A Option dep. Profibus (option
communication during the
Relay Not used i.s.o. Modbus
7523 Ext. comm. error Not used time delay.
output B Option dep. Communication)
(H3)
OFF
7524 Ext. comm. error Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7525 Ext. comm. error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
84 |
User Manual

Max. setting
7530 Internal communication ID

Qc4002™ MkII The mode decides the
User Manual reaction of the power
Manual
CAN fail. management system in case
7532 Int. comm. ID Semi auto Manual
mode of different errors on the
No mode change CAN communication lines.
Missing all Warning Mode:
7533 Int. comm. ID F1…F8
units (F2) - Manual
- Semi auto
Fatal CAN Warning
7534 Int. comm. ID F1…F8 - No mode change
error (F2)
Any DG Warning
missing (F2)
Any mains Warning

missing (F2)
3.10.2 Engine interface communication alarms

Max. setting
7570 EI comm. error

0.0 s Option: J1939 Supervision of the EIC
7571 EI comm. error Timer 0.0 s and MTU
100.0 s communication line. The
ADEC/ MDEC alarm will occur when there
Relay Not used (H5)
7572 EI comm. error Not used Cummins has not been any
output A Option dep. communication during the
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6) time delay.
7573 EI comm. error Not used J1939 (H7)
OFF
7574 EI comm. error Enable ON
ON
Warning
7575 EI comm. error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
7580 EIC warning

0.0 s Option: J1939
7581 EIC warning Timer 0.0 s and MTU
100.0 s
ADEC/ MDEC
Relay Not used (H5)
7582 EIC warning Not used Cummins
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7583 EIC warning Not used J1939 (H7)
OFF
7584 EIC warning Enable ON
ON
Warning
7585 EIC warning Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 85

Max. setting
7590 EIC shutdown

0.0 s Option: J1939
7591 EIC shutdown Timer 0.0 s and MTU
100.0 s
ADEC/ MDEC
Relay Not used (H5)
7592 EIC shutdown Not used Cummins
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7593 EIC shutdown Not used J1939 (H7)
OFF
7594 EIC shutdown Enable ON
ON
Shutdown
7595 EIC shutdown Fail class F1…F8
(F5)
7600 EIC overspeed

100.0% Option: J1939
7601 EIC overspeed Setpoint 110.0% and MTU
150.0%
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7602 EIC overspeed Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7603 EIC overspeed Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7604 EIC overspeed Not used
OFF
7605 EIC overspeed Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7606 EIC overspeed Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
7610 EIC coolant temp. 1

-40 deg Option: J1939
7611 EIC coolant t. 1 Setpoint 100 deg and MTU
410 deg
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7612 EIC coolant t. 1 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7613 EIC coolant t. 1 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7614 EIC coolant t. 1 Not used
OFF
7615 EIC coolant t. 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7616 EIC coolant t. 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
86 |
User Manual

Max. setting
7620 EIC coolant temp. 2

-40 deg Option: J1939
7621 EIC coolant t. 2 Setpoint 110 deg and MTU
410 deg
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7622 EIC coolant t. 2 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7623 EIC coolant t. 2 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7624 EIC coolant t. 2 Not used
OFF
7625 EIC coolant t. 2 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7626 EIC coolant t. 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
7630 EIC oil pressure 1

0.0 bar Option: J1939
7631 EIC oil press. 1 Setpoint 2.0 bar and MTU
145.0 bar
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7632 EIC oil press. 1 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7633 EIC oil press. 1 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7634 EIC oil press. 1 Not used
OFF
7635 EIC oil press. 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7636 EIC oil press. 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
7640 EIC oil pressure 2

0.0 bar Option: J1939
7641 EIC oil press. 2 Setpoint 1.0 bar and MTU
145.0 bar
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7642 EIC oil press. 2 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7643 EIC oil press. 2 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7644 EIC oil press. 2 Not used
OFF
7645 EIC oil press. 2 Enable OFF
ON
Shutdown
7646 EIC oil press. 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F5)
| 87

Max. setting
7650 EIC oil temp 1

0 deg Option: J1939
7651 EIC oil temp. 1 Setpoint 40 deg and MTU
410 deg
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7652 EIC oil temp. 1 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7653 EIC oil temp. 1 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7654 EIC oil temp. 1 Not used
OFF
7655 EIC oil temp. 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7656 EIC oil temp. 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
7660 EIC oil temp 2

0 deg Option: J1939
7661 EIC oil temp. 2 Setpoint 50 deg and MTU
410 deg
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7662 EIC oil temp. 2 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7663 EIC oil temp. 2 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7664 EIC oil temp. 2 Not used
OFF
7665 EIC oil temp. 2 Enable OFF
ON
Shutdown
7666 EIC oil temp. 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F5)

0% Option: J1939
7671 EIC coolant level 1 Setpoint 20 % and MTU
100 %
ADEC/ MDEC
0.0 s (H5)
7672 EIC coolant level 1 Timer 5.0 s Cummins
100.0 s
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7673 EIC coolant level 1 Not used J1939 (H7)
Relay Not used

7674 EIC coolant level 1 Not used
OFF
7675 EIC coolant level 1 Enable OFF
ON
Warning
7676 EIC coolant level 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
88 |
User Manual

Max. setting

0% Qc4002™ MkII
7681 EIC coolant level 2 Setpoint 10 % User Manual
100 %
0.0 s Option: J1939
7682 EIC coolant level 2 Timer 5.0 s and MTU
100.0 s
ADEC/ MDEC
Relay Not used (H5)
7683 EIC coolant level 2 Not used Cummins
Modbus
Relay Not used (H6)
7684 EIC coolant level 2 Not used J1939 (H7)
OFF
7685 EIC coolant level 2 Enable OFF
ON
Shutdown
7686 EIC coolant level 2 Fail class F1…F8
(F5)
3.10.3 Power management communication error

Max. setting
7870 Any BTB missing/appl hazard

Warning Qc4002™ MkII The “Any BTB missing”
7871 Any BTB missing Fail class F1…F8
(F2) User Manual alarm is activated if the
communication to any BTB
ON unit failed.
7872 Appl hazard Enable ON
OFF The application hazard
alarm is activated if
Warning
7873 Appl hazard Fail class F1…F8 different applications are
(F2) installed in the controllers.
3.10.4 Internal CAN communication error

Max. setting
7930 CAN1 communication error

10.0 s Option: If both options H8.x are
7931 CAN1 com error Timer 10.0 s External I/O
600.0 s present, an error on any of
modules these will activate the alarm.
Relay Not used (H8.2)
7932 CAN1 com error Not used
Relay Not used

7933 CAN1 com error Not used
OFF
7934 CAN1 com error Enable ON
ON
Warning
7935 CAN1 com error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
| 89

Max. setting
7940 CAN2 comm error

10.0 s Option: If both options H8.x are
7941 CAN2 comm error Timer 10.0 s External I/O
600.0 s present, an error on any of
modules these will activate the alarm.
Relay Not used (H8.8)
7942 CAN2 comm error Not used
Relay Not used

7943 CAN2 comm error Not used
OFF
7944 CAN2 comm error Enable ON
ON
Warning
7945 CAN2 comm error Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
3.11 External I/O parameters
3.11.1 External I/O alarm setup
NOTE: The alarms based on external I/O modules can only be configured using the PC utility software.
3.11.2 Analogue inputs

Max. setting
12000 Ext. Ain 1.1

0 Option:
Ext. Ain 1.1 Setpoint 10 External I/O
10
modules
0.0 s (H8.x)
Ext. Ain 1.1 Timer 10.0 s
600.0 s
Warning
Ext. Ain 1.1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

Ext. Ain 1.1 Not used
A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
Ext. Ain 1.1 Enable OFF
ON
90 |
User Manual

Max. setting
12010 Ext. Ain 1.2

0 Option:
Ext. Ain 1.2 Setpoint 10 External I/O
10
modules
0.0 s (H8.x)
Ext. Ain 1.2 Timer 10.0 s
600.0 s
Warning
Ext. Ain 1.2 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)

A Option dep.

B Option dep.
OFF
Ext. Ain 1.2 Enable OFF
ON
NOTE: The same settings apply to external analogue inputs 2-8, menus 12030-12220.
3.11.3 External analogue input scale

Max. setting
12230 4-20 mA Ext in 1 scale

4-20 mA Ext in 1 No decimal One Option: Selecting ‘Enable’ and
Setpoint External I/O
scale Two decimal decimal writing the new setpoint will
modules scale the associated min.,
4-20 mA Ext in 1 OFF (H8.x)
Enable OFF max. and value
scale ON automatically.
| 91
3.11.4 Digital inputs

Max. setting
12540 Ext. dig. in 1

0.0 s Option:
Ext. dig. in 1 Timer 10.0 s External I/O
100.0 s
modules
Warning (H8.x)
Ext. dig. in 1 Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
Not used
Ext. dig. in 1 Relay output A Not used
Option dep.
Not used
Ext. dig. in 1 Relay output B Not used
Option dep.
OFF
Ext. dig. in 1 Enable OFF
ON
OFF
Ext. dig. in 1 High alarm ON
ON
NOTE: The same settings apply to External digital inputs 2-16, menus 12550-12690.
92 |
User Manual
4. Parameter list
The parameter list contains settings for regulators and other non-alarm related settings.
4.1 Parameter table overview
Control
Synchronisation
2000 Sync type
2020 Dynamic sync
2030 Static sync
2040 f sync. control Analogue
2050 f sync. control Relay
2060 Phase sync. control Analogue
2070 Phase sync. control relay
2110 Sync. blackout
2240 Separate sync relay
2250 Close before excitation
2260 Breaker Sequence
Regulation
2510 Frequency control analogue
2530 Power control analogue
2540 Power load sharing control analogue
2550 Analogue gov. offset 1-4
2570 f control relay
2580 P control relay
2590 Load sharing control relay
2600 Relay control
2610 Power ramp up
2620 Power ramp down
2640 Voltage control analogue
2650 Reactive power control analogue
2660 Reactive power load sharing control analogue
2670 Analogue AVR output offset 1-4
2690 U control relay
2700 Q control relay
2710 Q load sharing control relay
2720 Relay control (AVR)
2740 Delay reg.
2760 Overlap
2770 EIC speed control
2780 Reg. output
2790 EIC speed demand switch
2950 Base load
Output setup
5000 Relay 05
5010 Relay 08
5020 Relay 11
| 93
5030 Relay 14
5040 Relay 17
5050 Relay 20
5060 Relay 21
5070 Relay 29
5080 Relay 31
5090 Relay 33
5100 Relay 35
5110 Relay 57
5120 Relay 59
5130 Relay 61
5140 Relay 63
5150 Relay 65
5160 Relay 67
5170 Relay 69
5180 Relay 71
5190 Relay 90
5200 Relay 92
5210 Relay 94
5220 Relay 96
5230 Relay 126
5240 Relay 128
5250 Relay 130
5260 Relay 132
5270 Transistor setup
Analogue output
5720 PWM 68 limits
5780 Aout 66 limits
5790 Aout 71 limits
5800 Aout 91 limits
5810 Aout 95 limits
Transducer outputs
5820 P output 1
5830 P output 2
5840 P output 3
5850 S output
5860 Q output
5870 PF output
5880 f output
5890 U output
5900 I output
5910 U BB output
5920 f BB output
5930 Multi-input 102
5960 P total consumed
94 |
User Manual
5970 P total available

Analogue regulator output setup
5980 Governor output
5990 AVR output
System
General setup
6000 Nom. Settings 1
6040 G/M/BA transformer
6050 BB transformer settings 1
6060 BB transformer settings 2
6070 Genset Mode
6080 Language
6090 Date and time
6100 Counters
6110 Service timer 1
6130 Alarm horn
6150 Run coil setup
6160 Run status
6170 Running detect.
6180 Starter
6190 Start attempts
6200 Shutdown override
6210 STOP
6220 Hz/V OK
6230 GB/MB/BTB control
6240 Power derate 1
6250 Power derate 2
6260 Power derate 3
6290 Idle start
6320 Engine heater
6380 Load share out
6390 Load share type
6400 Master Clock
6460 Max ventilation
6490 Summer/winter time
6550 Fuel transfer pump logic
6560 Fan logic
6570 3rd prio fan
6580 Fan A output
6590 Fan A failure
6600 Fan B failure
6610 Fan C failure
| 95
6620 Fan D failure

6700 Diagnostics
6840 I thermal demand
6850 Pulse counter 1
6900 Alarm jump
6960 Command start/stop timer 1
Mains setup
7000 Mains power
7010 Daytime period
7020 Start generator
7030 Stop generator
7040 Test running
7050 Fixed power settings
7060 U mains failure
7070 f mains failure
7080 Mains breaker control
7120 Y1(x1) Dead band
7130 P(x1) Slope
7140 Droop curve 1
7160 Q(x2) Slope
7170 Cosphi(x2) Slope
7180 Droop curve 2
7220 Power offset
7240 Cosphi offset
External communication
7500 Communication control
7510 External communication
Power management internal comm.
Engine interface communication
7560 Engine I/F
External I/O communication setup
7950 KL 320x setup
7970 CAN 1
7980 CAN 2
7990 Event printer
Power management setup
8000 Load dependent start
8010 Load dependent stop
8020 PM config
8030 Priority selection
8080 Priority (1-5)
8090 Priority (6-11)
8100 Priority (12-16)
8110 Running hours
96 |
User Manual
8120 Ground relay

8140 Stop non-connected DGs
8170 Fuel optimize
8180 Mains config.
8190 Tie breaker
8200 Heavy consumer 1
8220 Avail. power 1
8230 Avail. power 2
8240 Avail. power 3
8250 Avail. power 4
8260 Avail. power 5
8270 TB power
8280 Asymmetric load share
8880 Load dependent start/stop calc.
8920 Secure mode
8930 Heavy consumer 1 variable load
Jump menus
9000 Software version
9010 Display character test
9020 Service port
9070 M4 SW version
9100 Application
911X Password
9120 Service menu
9130 AC config.
9140 Angle compensation BB/G
9150 Backlight dim
9160 User-defined application
9170 Internal CAN protocol
9180 Quick setup
9190 Application broadcast
Utility Software
10320 GSM pin code
10330-10370 Telephone no. 1-5
10390 Password language page
10400 Password log page
10410 Password control page
VDO inputs
10460-10620 VDO 102
10630-10790 VDO 105
10800-10960 VDO 108
10970 Engineering units
10980 Multi-input configuration 102
11000 Multi-input configurable 108
| 97
11010-11110 4-20 mA input scaling

11200 Parameter ID
External digital outputs
12790-12940 Ext. dig. out
External module status
12950-12980 Ext. module STATUS
SuperVision
13000 Fuel consumption
13010 Oil pressure, coolant temp, fuel level input
98 |
User Manual
4.2 Control parameters - synchronisation
4.2.1 Synchronisation

Max. setting
2000 Sync type

Qc4002™ MkII Static sync aims at a
User Manual frequency difference of
0 Hz.
Dynamic sync aims at a
Dynamic frequency difference
Dynamic
2001 Sync type Type sync (midpoint between setting
sync
Static sync 2021 dfMax. and 2022
dfMin.).
OFF = dynamic sync,
ON = static sync
2020 Dynamic sync

0.0 Hz Qc4002™ MkII Menu 2020 is only
2021 Dynamic sync dfMax. 0.3 Hz
0.5 Hz User Manual applicable if ‘Dynamic
sync.’ is chosen in menu
-0.5 Hz
2022 Dynamic sync dfMin. 0.0 Hz 2001.
0.3 Hz
2%
2023 Dynamic sync dUMax. 5%
10%
Sync t. 40 ms
2024 Dynamic sync 50 ms
GB/BTB/TB 300 ms
40 ms
2025 Dynamic sync Sync t. MB 50 ms
300 ms
2030 Static sync

0.00 Hz Qc4002™ MkII Menu 2030 is only
2031 Static sync dfMax. 0.10 Hz
0.50 Hz User Manual applicable if ‘Static
sync.’ is chosen in menu
2%
2032 Static sync dUMax 5% 2001.
10%
0.1 deg
2033 Static sync Close window 10.0 deg
20.0 deg
0.1 s
2034 Static sync Timer 1.0 s
99.0 s
Breaker
2035 Static sync GB sync. type Breaker
Infinite sync.
Breaker
2036 Static sync MB sync. type Breaker
Infinite sync.
| 99

Max. setting
2040 Frequency synchronisation control analogue

0.00 Option E1, E2, PID controller for
2041 f sync f Kp 0.50 EF2, EF4. EF5
60.00 dynamic sync.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2042 f sync f Ti 5.00 s applicable if ‘Analogue’
60.00 s
or ‘PWM’ or ‘EIC’ is
2043 f sync f Td 0.00 s 0.00 s selected in menu 2780.
2.00 s
2050 Frequency synchronisation control relay

Qc4002™ MkII This menu is only
0
2051 f sync Kp 10 User Manual applicable if ‘Relay’ is
100
selected in menu 2780.
2060 Phase sync analogue

0.00 Qc4002™ MkII PID controller for static
2061 Phase sync Phase Kp 0.50
60.00 User Manual sync.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2062 Phase sync Phase Ti 5.00 s applicable if ‘Analogue’
60.00 s
or ‘PWM’ or ‘EIC’ is
0.00 s selected in menu 2780.
2063 Phase sync Phase Td 0.00 s
2.00 s
2070 Phase control relay

2071 Phase Kp 0 10 Qc4002™ MkII This menu is only
100 User Manual applicable if ‘Relay’ is
2110 Synchronisation blackout

0.0 Hz Qc4002™ MkII Settings are accepted
2111 Sync. Blackout dfMax. 3.0 Hz
5.0 Hz User Manual limits for closing of the
breaker, referring to
2% nominal frequency and
2112 Sync. Blackout dUMax 5%
10% voltage.
2240 Separate synchronisation relay

Not used Qc4002™ MkII The output activates
2241 Sep sync relay Relay output A Not used
Option dep. User Manual during synchronisation
and thereby a separate
Not used synchronising unit can be
2242 Sep sync relay Relay output B Not used
Option dep. activated.
2250 Close before excitation

0 rpm Qc4002™ MkII If set ON the function
2251 Close bef. Exc. Setpoint 400 rpm
4000 rpm User Manual will close the breaker at
the selected speed. The
s
2252 Close bef. Exc. Timer 5.0 s relay output is used for
999.0 s the excitation ON signal.
Relay Not used Remember to set the
2253 Close bef. Exc. Not used selected relay in ‘Limit’
mode.
OFF
2554 Close bef. Exc. Enable OFF
ON
100 |
User Manual

Max. setting
2260 Breaker sequence

Close GB Qc4002™ MkII The sequence is used for
2261 Breaker seq. Break Close Close GB User Manual the closed before
GB+TB excitation function. The
excitation will be
s
2262 Breaker seq. Timer 5.0 s activated at the selected
999.0 s speed in menu 2263.
0 rpm
2263 Breaker seq. RpmOK 1450 rpm
4000 rpm
| 101
4.3 Control parameters - regulation
4.3.1 Regulation

Max. setting
2510 Frequency control analogue

0.00 Qc4002™ MkII PID controller for
2511 f control f Kp 0.50
60.00 User Manual frequency control.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2512 f control f Ti 5.00 s applicable if ‘Analogue’
60.00 s
is selected in menu 2781.
0.00 s
2513 f control f Td 0.00 s
2.00 s
2530 Power control analogue

0.00 Qc4002™ MkII PID controller for power
2531 P control P Kp 0.50
60.00 User Manual control.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2532 P control P Ti 5.00 s applicable if ‘Analogue’
60.00 s
0.00 s
2533 P control P Td 0.00 s
2.00 s
2540 Power load sharing control analogue

0.00 Qc4002™ MkII PID controller for load
2541 P LS control P LS Kp 0.50
60.00 User Manual sharing control.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2542 P LS control P LS Ti 5.00 s applicable if ‘Analogue’
60.00 s is selected in menu 2781.
0.00 s
2543 P LS control P LS Td 0.00 s
2.00 s
0%
2544 P LS P weight P LS P weight 10%
100%
2550 Analogue governor offset

Analogue 0% Qc4002™ MkII PID controller for freq.
2551 Offset 50%
GOV 100% User Manual control
This menu is only
Analogue 0%
2552 Offset 50% applicable if ‘Analogue’
GOV 100%
Analogue 0%
2553 Offset 50%
GOV 100%
Analogue 0%
2554 Offset 50%
GOV 100%
2570 Frequency control relay output

0.2% Qc4002™ MkII This menu is only
2571 f control relay Dead band 1.0%
10.0% User Manual applicable if ‘Relay’ is
0
2572 f control relay Kp 10
100
102 |
User Manual

Max. setting
2580 Power control relay output

2581 P control relay Dead band 2.0%
0
2582 P control relay Kp 10
100
2590 Load sharing control relay output

2591 LS ctrl. relay f dead band 1.0%
0
2592 LS ctrl. relay LS Kp 10
100
0.2%
2593 LS ctrl. relay P dead band 2.0%
10.0%
0.0 %
2594 LS ctrl. relay P weight 10.0 %
100.0 %
2600 Relay control

10 ms Qc4002™ MkII This menu is only
2601 Relay control GOV ON time 500 ms
6500 ms User Manual applicable if ‘Relay’ is
GOV period 250 ms
2602 Relay control 2500 ms
time 32500 ms
NOTE: In the PC utility
Relay output A Not used software, settings
2603 Relay control Not used
(Increase relay) Option dep. 2603/2604 are found
under menu 2602.
Relay output B Output A is increase and
Not used
2604 Relay control (Decrease Not used output B is decrease.
Option dep.
relay)
2610 Power ramp up

Power ramp 0.1%/s Qc4002™ MkII The delay point
2611 Speed 2.0%/s
up 20.0%/s User Manual determines when the
generator will make a
Power ramp 1%
2612 Delay point 10% temporary stop ramping
up 100% up after closing of the
Power ramp 0s generator breaker to
2613 Delay time 10 s preheat the engine before
up 9900 s
commencing load taking.
Power ramp OFF If the delay function is
2614 Load/steps OFF
up ON not needed, set this time
to 0. Power % settings
Power ramp 0 relate to nominal
2615 Steps 1
up 100 generator power.
2620 Power ramp down

Power ramp 0.1%/s Qc4002™ MkII The breaker open point
2621 Speed 10.0%/s
down 20.0%/s User Manual determines when the
‘open breaker’ relay
2623 Power ramp Breaker open 1% 5%
output is activated to
down point 20% open the generator
breaker before reaching
0 kW. Power % settings
relate to nominal
generator power.
| 103

Max. setting
2640 Voltage control analogue

0.00 Option: PID controller for
2641 U control U Kp 0.50 AVR control
60.00 voltage control.
This menu is only
0.00 s
2642 U control U Ti 5.00 s applicable if analogue
60.00 s output is selected in
0.00 s menu 2782.
2643 U control U Td 0.00 s
2.00 s
2650 Reactive power control analogue

0.00 Option: PID controller for
2651 Q control Q Kp 0.50 AVR control
60.00 reactive power control.
The reactive power
0.00 s
2652 Q control Q Ti 5.00 s control is used for power
60.00 s
factor as well as reactive
2653 Q control Q Td 0.00 s 0.00 s power control.
2.00 s This menu is only
applicable if analogue
output is selected in
menu 2782.
2660 Reactive power load sharing control analogue

0.00 Option: The VAr (Q) load
2661 Q load sh. ctrl Q LS Kp 0.50 AVR control
60.00 sharing is based on a mix
of voltage and VAr
0.00 s
2662 Q load sh. ctrl Q LS Ti 5.00 s control. The setting 2664
60.00 s is setting the impact of
0.00 s the VAr controller over
2663 Q load sh. ctrl Q LS Td 0.00 s the voltage controller.
2.00 s
This menu is only
0.0% applicable if analogue
2664 Q load sh. ctrl Q weight 10.0% output is selected in
100.0%
menu 2782.
2670 Analogue AVR output offset

Analogue 0% Option: This Setting sets the
2671 Offset 50% AVR control
AVR 100% offset of the analogue
output when starting the
Analogue 0%
2672 Offset 50% generator.
AVR 100%
This menu is only
Analogue 0% applicable if analogue
2673 Offset 50% output is selected in
AVR 100%
menu 2782.
Analogue 0%
2674 Offset 50%
AVR 100%
2690 Voltage control relay

0.0% Option: PI controller for voltage
2691 U control U dead band 2.0% AVR control
10.0% control.
This menu is only
2692 U control U Kp 0 10
applicable if ‘Relay’ is
100
104 |
User Manual

Max. setting
2700 Reactive power control relay

0.0% Option: PI controller for reactive
2701 Q control Q dead band 2.0% AVR control
10.0% power control.
The reactive power
control is used for power
factor as well as reactive
0 10 power control.
2702 Q control Q Kp
100 This menu is only
applicable if ‘Relay’ is
2710 Reactive power load sharing control relay

0.0% Option: The VAr (Q) load
2711 Q load sh. ctrl U dead band 1.0% AVR control
10.0% sharing is based on a mix
of voltage and VAr
0
2712 Q load sh. ctrl U Kp 10 control. The setting 2664
100 is setting the impact of
0.0% the VAr controller over
2713 Q load sh. ctrl Q dead band 2.0% the voltage controller.
10.0%
This menu is only
0.0% 10.0% applicable if ‘Relay’ is
2714 Q load sh. ctrl Q weight
100.0% selected in menu 2782.
2720 Relay control setup (AVR)

AVR ON time 10 ms Option: Relay outputs for
2721 Relay control 100 ms AVR control
tN 3000 ms voltage/VAr/power
factor control.
AVR per time 50 ms
2722 Relay control 500 ms This menu is only
tP 15000 ms applicable if ‘Relay’ is
Relay output A Not used selected in menu 2782.
(U increase) Option dep.
Relay output B Not used

(U decrease) Option dep.
2740 Delay regulation

0s Qc4002™ MkII Delay regulation is the
2741 Delay reg. Timer 0s
9900 s User Manual waiting time before
synchronising after the
Relay Not used
2742 Delay reg. Not used engine has started. It is
output A Option dep. used if the engine needs
Relay Not used to stabilise after start
2743 Delay reg. Not used before attempting to
synchronise.
OFF
2744 Delay reg. Enable OFF
ON
2760 Overlap
OFF Qc4002™ MkII If set ON the generator
2761 Overlap Setpoint OFF
ON User Manual and mains breaker will
never both be closed for
2762 Overlap Timer 0.10 s 0.30 s
a longer time period than
99.90 s the selected.
| 105

Max. setting
2770 EIC speed control

0.0% Only appli- Option: Setting of speed control
2771 Scania control Droop 0.0% J1939
25.0% cable if via engine
‘Scania’ is communication interface.
User
selec-ted in
1500 RPM menu 7561.
2772 Scania control rpm User
1800 RPM
Low idle
Only appli-
cable when
0.00
2773 Cummins Gain Kp 5.00 ‘Cum-mins’
10.00
is selected in
menu 7561.
2780 Regulator output

Qc4002™ MkII Selection of the speed
User Manual output: Relay, analogue
Relay or engine interface
2781 Reg. output GOV Relay
EIC communication.
Analogue and EIC are
option-dependent.
2782 Reg. output AVR Relay Relay Option: Generator voltage

Analogue AVR control control based on relay,
analogue or EIC output
EIC Option: signals.
J1939 Analogue selection is
only available if option
E1, E2, EF2, EF4 or F2
is present.
106 |
User Manual

Max. setting
2790 EIC speed demand switch

Ana. CAN Option:
Up/Down Engine
communication
ECU
(H5)
Up/Down
EIC speed
Local norm sw. CAN Ana. CAN
2791 dem. Sw.
Ana. ECU
Ana. ECU
rel.
Frequency
Ana. CAN
Up/Down
ECU
Up/Down
EIC speed Local Emerg
CAN Ana. CAN
2792 dem. Sw. sw.
Ana. ECU
Ana. ECU
rel.
Frequency
Ana. CAN
Up/Down
ECU
Up/Down
EIC speed Remote norm
CAN Ana. CAN
2793 dem. Sw. sw.
Ana. ECU
Ana. ECU
rel.
Frequency
Ana. CAN
Up/Down
ECU
Up/Down
EIC speed Remote Emerg
CAN Ana. CAN
2794 dem. Sw. sw.
Ana. ECU
Ana. ECU
rel.
Frequency
2950 Base load

10% Qc4002™ MkII Setting and enabling of
2951 Base load Power set 90%
120% User Manual base load running. Note:
Base load is only
OFF
2952 Base load Enable OFF possible in semi-auto
ON mode.
Semi auto Menu 2953 specifies

Return
2953 Base load mode Auto mode what mode to return to
mode
Auto mode after base load is
completed.
| 107
4.4 Control parameters - output setup
4.4.1 Digital output setup

Max. setting
5000 Relay 05
Alarm Qc4002™ Function selections:
relay ND MkII User • Alarm relay ND
5001 Relay 05 Function Horn relay
Alarm relay Manual • Limit relay
NE • Horn relay
0.0 s • Alarm relay NE
5002 Relay 05 OFF delay 5.0 s
999.9 s
5010 Relay 08
relay ND Alarm relay MkII User • Alarm relay ND
5011 Relay 08 Function
Alarm relay ND Manual • Limit relay
NE • Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
This relay is only available
0.0 s
5012 Relay 08 OFF delay 5.0 s if no mains breaker is
999.9 s
controlled by the
controller.
5020 Relay 11
NE • Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
0.0 s
5022 Relay 11 OFF delay 5.0 s if no mains breaker is
999.9 s
controlled by the
controller.
5030 Relay 14
NE • Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
0.0 s
5032 Relay 14 OFF delay 5.0 s if no generator breaker is
999.9 s
controlled by the
controller.
108 |
User Manual

Max. setting
5040 Relay 17
Alarm Option Power Function selections:
relay ND Alarm relay Management, • Alarm relay ND
Alarm relay ND see PMS User • Limit relay
NE Manual
• Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
0.0 s
5042 Relay 17 OFF delay 5.0 s if no generator breaker is
999.9 s
controlled by the
Qc4002™ MkII.
5050 Relay 20
NE • Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
0.0 s This relay is only available
999.9 s if ‘Relay’ is selected in
menu 5271.
5060 Relay 21
NE • Horn relay
• Alarm relay NE
0.0 s This relay is only available
999.9 s if ‘Relay’ is selected in
menu 5272.
5070 Relay 29
Alarm Option M14.2 Function selections:
relay ND Alarm relay • Alarm relay ND
Alarm relay ND • Limit relay
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5080 Relay 31
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5090 Relay 33
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
| 109

Max. setting
5100 Relay 35
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5110 Relay 57
Alarm Option M12 Function selections:
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5120 Relay 59
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5130 Relay 61
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5140 Relay 63
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5150 Relay 65
Alarm Qc4002™ Used for governor UP
relay ND Alarm relay MkII User command if ‘Relay’ is
Alarm relay ND Manual selected in menu 2781.
NE Function selections:
• Alarm relay ND
0.0 s • Limit relay
5152 Relay 65 OFF delay 5.0 s • Horn relay
999.9 s
• Alarm relay NE
110 |
User Manual

Max. setting
5160 Relay 67
Alarm Qc4002™ Used for governor DOWN
NE • Function selections:
• Alarm relay ND
999.9 s
• Alarm relay NE
5170 Relay 69
Alarm Qc4002™ Used for AVR UP
• Alarm relay ND
999.9 s
• Alarm relay NE
5180 Relay 71
Alarm Qc4002™ Used for AVR DOWN
• Alarm relay ND
999.9 s
• Alarm relay NE
5190 Relay 90
Alarm Option M14.6: Function selections:
relay ND Alarm relay 4 x relay Alarm relay ND
Alarm relay ND output, slot 6 • Limit relay
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5200 Relay 92
relay ND Alarm relay 4 x relay • Alarm relay ND
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5210 Relay 94
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
| 111

Max. setting
5220 Relay 96
NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5230 Relay 126

NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5240 Relay 128

NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5250 Relay 130

NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5260 Relay 132

NE • Horn relay
999.9 s
5270 Transistor output setup

Qc4002™ The transistor outputs on
MkII User terminals 21 and 22 can be
Manual configured as relay outputs
or pulse signals. If ‘Relay’
kWh pulse is selected, the relays 20
5271 Transistor 20 T20 kWh pulse
Relay and 21 will be available.
If set to ‘Relay’, external
relays are needed due to
limited current output.
Max. 10 mA.
112 |
User Manual
4.5 Control parameters - analogue output
4.5.1 Analogue output limits

Max. setting
5720 PWM 68 limits

0% Option For Caterpillar engines.
5721 PWM 68 limits Min. 10%
50% PWM output
(EF5)
50%
5722 PWM 68 limits Max. 90%
100
5780 Aout 66 limits

-25/0 mA Option: Min. range and factory
5781 AOut 66 limits Min. -20/0 mA 2 x analogue
10 mA setting value is option-
outputs dependent.
10 mA (E1/E2)
5782 AOut 66 limits Max. 20 mA
25 mA
5790 Aout 71 limits

-25/0 mA Option: Min. range and factory
5791 AOut 71 limits Min. -20/0 mA 2 x analogue
outputs dependent.
10 mA (E1/E2)
25 mA
5800 Aout 91 limits

0 mA Option: Min. range and factory
5801 AOut 91 limits Min. 0 mA 2 x analogue
outputs (F1) dependent.
10 mA
20 mA
5810 Aout 95 limits

0 mA Option: Min. range and factory
5811 AOut 95 limits Min. 0 mA 2 x analogue
outputs (F1) dependent.
10 mA
20 mA
| 113
4.6 Control parameters - Transducer outputs
4.6.1 Transducer outputs

Max. setting
5820 P output 1
Disabled Option: Setpoint selections for all
5821 P output 1 Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep. transducer outputs:
outputs
- Disabled
Disabled (E2 or F1 or
5822 P output 1 Transducer B Disabled - 0-20 mA
Option dep. EF2)
- 4-20 mA
Disabled - 0-10 V
5823 P output 1 Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V - -10-0-10 V
0 kW
5824 P output 1 Max. value 500 kW
20000 kW
-9999 kW
5825 P output 1 Min. value 0 kW
20000 kW
5830 P output 2
Disabled Option:
Option dep.
outputs
5832 P output 2 Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kW
20000 kW
-9999 kW
20000 kW
5840 P output 3
Disabled Option:
Option dep.
outputs
5842 P output 3 Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kW
20000 kW
-9999 kW
20000 kW
114 |
User Manual

Max. setting
5850 S output
Disabled Option:
5851 S output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5852 S output Transducer B Disabled EF2)
Option dep.
Disabled
5853 S output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kVA
5854 S output Max. value 600 kVA
20000 kVA
-9999 kVA
5855 S output Min. value 0 kVA
20000 kVA
5860 Q output
Disabled Option:
5861 Q output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5862 Q output Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5863 Q output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kVAr
5864 Q output Max. value 400 kVAr
16000 kVAr
8000 kVA
5865 Q output Min. value 0 kVAr
16000 kVA
5870 PF output
Disabled Option: Positive value means
5871 PF output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep. inductive.
outputs
Negative value means
5872 PF output Transducer B Disabled capacitive.
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5873 PF output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0.5
5874 PF output Max. value 0.80
0.99
-0.99
5875 PF output Min. value -0.80
-0.50
5880 f output
Disabled Option:
5881 F output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5882 F output Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5883 F output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0.0 Hz
5884 F output Max. value 55.0 Hz
70.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
5885 F output Min. value 45.0 Hz
70.0 Hz
| 115

Max. setting
5890 U output
Disabled Option: The voltage output represents
5891 U output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep. L1-L2 voltage.
outputs
5892 U output Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5893 U output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0V
5894 U output Max. value 500 V
28000 V
0V
5895 U output Min. value 0V
28000 V
5900 I output
Disabled Disabled Option: The current output represents
5901 I output Transducer A Analogue
Option dep. L1 current.
outputs
Disabled Disabled (E2 or F1 or
5902 I output Transducer B
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5903 I output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0A
5904 I output Max. value 1000 A
9000 A
0A
5905 I output Min. value 0A
9000 A
5910 U BB output
Disabled Option: The voltage output represents
5911 U BB output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep. L1-L2 voltage.
outputs
5912 U BB output Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5913 U BB output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0V
5914 U BB output Max. value 500 V
28000 V
0V
5915 U BB output Min. value 0V
28000 V
5920 f BB output
Disabled Option:
5921 F BB output Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5922 F BB output Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5923 F BB output Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0.0 Hz
5924 F BB output Max. value 55.0 Hz
70.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
5925 F BB output Min. value 45.0 Hz
70.0 Hz
116 |
User Manual

Max. setting

Disabled Option:
5931 Multi-input 102 Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5932 Multi-input 102 Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5933 Multi-input 102 Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0
5934 Multi-input 102 Max. value 500
28000
0
5935 Multi-input 102 Min. value 0
28000

Disabled Disabled Option:
5941 Multi-input 105 Transducer A Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
Disabled Disabled (E2 or F1 or
5942 Multi-input 105 Transducer B
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0
28000
0
28000

Disabled Option: .
5951 Multi-input 108 Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5952 Multi-input 108 Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0
28000
0
28000
5960 P total consumed

Disabled Option:
5961 P total consumed Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5962 P total consumed Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5963 P total consumed Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kW
5964 P total consumed Max. value 500 kW
20000 kW
-9999 kW
5965 P total consumed Min. value 0 kW
20000 kW
| 117

Max. setting
5970 P total available

Disabled Option:
5971 P total available Transducer A Disabled Analogue
Option dep.
outputs
5972 P total available Transducer B Disabled
Option dep. EF2)
Disabled
5973 P total available Setpoint Disabled
-10-0-10 V
0 kW
5974 P total available Max. value 500 kW
20000 kW
-9999 kW
5975 P total available Min. value 0 kW
20000 kW
4.7 Control parameters - analogue regulator output setup
4.7.1 Regulator output selection
NOTE: These menus are used to select which analogue output to use for governor/AVR control.
No. Setting Available Factory Notes Ref. Description

settings setting
5980 Governor output

Disabled Option:
5981 Governor output Transducer A Transducer 66 Disabled Analogue governor output
Transducer 71 (E1/EF)
5990 AVR output

Disabled Option:
5991 AVR output Transducer A Transducer 66 Disabled Analogue AVR output
Transducer 71 (E1/EF
118 |
User Manual
4.8 System parameters - general setup

NOTE: These system parameters menus include parameters for the system setup.
4.8.1 General setup

Max. setting
6000 Nominal settings 1

48.0 Hz Qc4002™ The selection of nominal
6001 Nom. settings Frequency 50.0 Hz
62.0 Hz MkII User settings to be used is set in
Manual menu 6006. A binary input or
10 kW
6002 Nom. settings Power 480 kW selection in M-Logic can also
20000 kW be used.
0A
6003 Nom. settings Current 867 A
9000 A
100 V
6004 Nom. settings Voltage 400 V
160 kV
100 RPM
6005 Nom. settings RPM 1500 RPM
4000 RPM
1
6006 Nom. settings Setting 1
4

48.0 Hz Qc4002™
6011 Nom. Settings 2 Frequency 50.0 Hz
62.0 Hz MkII User
Manual
10 kW
6012 Nom. Settings 2 Power 230 kW
20000 kW
0A
6013 Nom. Settings 2 Current 345 A
9000 A
100 V
6014 Nom. Settings 2 Voltage 480 V
160 kV
100 RPM
6015 Nom. Settings 2 RPM 1500 RPM
4000 RPM

48.0 Hz Qc4002™
62.0 Hz MkII User
Manual
10 kW
20000 kW
0A
9000 A
100 V
160 kV
100 RPM
4000 RPM
| 119

Max. setting

48.0 Hz Qc4002™
62.0 Hz MkII User
Manual
10 kW
20000 kW
0A
9000 A
100 V
160 kV
100 RPM
4000 RPM
6040 Gen/Mains/busbar A transformer

100 V Qc4002™ If no voltage transformer is
6041 G/M/BA transformer U primary 400 V
160 kV MkII User present, the primary and
Manual secondary side values are set
100 V to generator nominal value.
6042 G/M/BA transformer U secondary 400 V
690 V
5A
6043 G/M/BA transformer I primary 1000 A
9000 A
1A
6044 G/M/BA transformer I secondary 5A
5A
6050 Busbar settings

6051 BB transformer U primary 400 V
100 V
6052 BB transformer U secondary 400 V to generator nominal value.
690 V
100 V
6053 BB transformer Nominal U 1 400 V
160 kV
Param set 1
6054 BB transformer Bus nom. set Param set 1
Param set 2
6060 Busbar settings 2

6061 BB transformer U primary 400 V
100 V
6062 BB transformer U secondary 400 V to generator nominal value.
690 V
100 V
6063 BB transformer Nominal U 2 400 V
160 kV
120 |
User Manual

Max. setting
6070 Genset Mode

Qc4002™ Selections are:
MkII User -Island
Manual -Auto Mains Failure
Island -Peak shaving
-Fixed power
6071 Genset mode
Power -Mains power export
management -Load takeover
-Power management
-Remote maintenance
-Plant management
6080 Language
Qc4002™ The master language is
MkII User English. Additionally, 11
English
6081 Language English Manual different languages can be
Language 11
configured with the PC utility
software.
4.8.2 Counters and timers

Max. setting
6090 Date and time

2001 Qc4002™ Used to set up the clock in
6091 Date and time Year 2008
2100 MkII User the controller. Only available
Manual from the display.
1
6092 Date and time Month 1
12
1
6093 Date and time Date 1
31
1
6094 Date and time Week day 1
7
0
6095 Date and time Hour 3
23
0
6096 Date and time Minute 5
59
| 121

Max. setting
6100 Counters
0 hr Qc4002™ Setting 6105 resets the kWh
6101 Counters Running hour 0 hr
999 hr MkII User counter to 0. It automatically
Manual reverts to OFF after being set
Running, th. 0 th. hrs
6102 Counters 0 th. hrs ON.
hours 999 th. hrs
GB/TB/BTB 0
6103 Counters 0
operations 20000
0
6104 Counters MB operations 0
20000
OFF
6105 Counters kWh OFF
ON
0
6106 Counters Start attempts 0
20000

OFF Qc4002™ The timer is reset by enabling
6111 Service timer 1 Enable ON
ON MkII User menu 6116. The menu
Manual automatically goes OFF.
0 hrs
6112 Service timer 1 Running hours 500 hrs
9000 hrs
1 days
6113 Service timer 1 Days 365 days
1000 days
F2
6114 Service timer 1 Fail class F1…F8
(Warning)
Not used
6115 Service timer 1 Output A Not used
Option dep.
OFF
6116 Service timer 1 Reset OFF
ON

OFF Qc4002™ The timer is reset by enabling
6121 Service timer 2 Enable ON
ON MkII User menu 6126. The menu
Manual automatically goes OFF.
0 hrs
6122 Service timer 2 Running hours 500 hrs
9000 hrs
1 days
6123 Service timer 2 Days 365 days
1000 days
F2
6124 Service timer 2 Fail class F1…F8
(Warning)

6125 Service timer 2 Not used
A Option dep.
OFF
6126 Service timer 2 Reset OFF
ON
122 |
User Manual
4.8.3 Alarm horn

Max. setting
6130 Alarm horn

Qc4002™ If the setting is adjusted to
0.0 sec MkII User 0 s, the horn relay will be
6131 Alarm horn ON time 20.0 sec
990.0 sec Manual activated continuously until
the alarm is acknowledged.
4.8.4 Run coil setup

Max. setting
6150 Run coil setup

Qc4002™
0.0 sec
6151 Run coil setup ON time 1.0 sec MkII User
600.0 sec
Manual
Qc4002™ Pulse: reset for each start

Pulse MkII User attempt.
6152 Run coil setup Type Pulse
Continuous Manual Continuous: high throughout
all start attempts.
4.8.5 Running, start and stop

Max. setting
6160 Run status

0.0 s Qc4002™ If a relay output is used, the
6161 Run status Timer 5.0 s
300.0 s MkII User relay in question must be set
Manual to ‘limit’.
6162 Run status Not used
A Option dep.

6163 Run status Not used
B Option dep.
OFF
6164 Run status Enable OFF
ON
| 123

Max. setting
6170 Running detection

0 teeth Qc4002™ If menu 6171 is set to 0, the
6171 Running detect. No. of teeth 0 teeth
500 teeth MkII User magnetic pickup input is not
Manual active.
Binary input
6172 Running detect. Type Frequency
EIC
Available running detection
0 RPM types:
6173 Running detect. Running RPM 1000 RPM
4000 RPM - Binary input
-MPU input
Remove 1 RPM
6174 Running detect. 400 RPM -Frequency
starter 2000 RPM
-EIC (engine
communication)
0.0 bar
6175 Running detect. Pressure level 0.0 bar If menu 6175 is set to 0.0,
150.0 bar
the oil pressure running
detection is OFF.
6180 Starter
0.0 s Qc4002™ Menu 6185 and 6186 relate
6181 Starter Start prepare 5.0 s
600.0 s MkII User to using oil pressure as
Manual running feedback.
0.0 s
6182 Starter Ext. prepare 0.0 s If menu 6186 is set to 0.0
600.0 s
the oil pressure running
1.0 s feedback is disregarded.
6183 Starter Start ON time 5.0 s
180.0 s
Start OFF 1.0 s

6184 Starter 5.0 s
time 99.0 s
Multi-input 102 Multi-input

6185 Starter Input type
Multi-input 108 102
0.0 bar
6186 Starter Setpoint 0.0 bar
300.0 bar
6190 Start attempts

Qc4002™ Number of start attempts.
1
6191 Start attempts Setpoint 3 MkII User
10
Manual
6200 Shutdown override

1 Qc4002™ Shutdown override turns all
6201 Shutdown override Attempts 7
10 MkII User shutdowns into warnings.
Manual Only exception is overspeed
0s
6202 Shutdown override Cooling down 240 s and emergency stop.
9900 s
OFF
6203 Shutdown override Enable OFF
ON
124 |
User Manual

Max. setting
6210 Stop
0.0 s Qc4002™ The extended stop timer
6211 Stop Cooling down 240.0 s
9900.0 s MkII User starts when the running
Manual feedback disappears. During
1.0 s
6212 Stop Extended stop 5.0 s the delay time it is not
99.0 s possible to start the engine.
Multi-input 102 Multi-input
6213 Stop TYPE
EIC 102
0 deg.
6214 Stop Setpoint 0 deg.
482 deg.
6220 Hz/V OK
Qc4002™ The voltage and frequency
MkII User have to be continuously
1.0 s
6221 HZ/V OK Timer 5.0 s Manual within the limits during the
99.0 s
delay timer before the
breaker can be closed.
4.8.6 Breaker control

Max. setting
6230 Gen/Mains/Tie/Bus tie Breaker control

GB/MB/TB/BTB 0.0 s Qc4002™ Menu 6232 is for compact
6231 Close delay 2.0 s
control 30.0 s MkII User breakers (need to charge
Manual spring before closing).
GB/MB/TB/BTB 0.0 s
6232 Load time 0.0 s
control 30.0 s
4.8.7 Power derate

Max. setting
6240 Power derate 1

Multi-inp. 102 Multi-inp. Qc4002™ The derate function lowers
6241 Power derate 1 Input
EIC 102 MkII User the max. power of the
Manual generator set based on e.g.
0 units
6242 Power derate 1 Start derate 16 units water temperature.
20000 units Input:
0.1 %/unit - Multi-input 102
6243 Power derate 1 Derate slope 5.0 %/unit
- Multi-input 108
OFF
6244 Power derate 1 Proportional OFF - M-logic
ON
- EIC water temp
OFF - EIC oil temp
6245 Power derate 1 Enable OFF
ON
0.0 %
6246 Power derate 1 Limit 80.0 %
100.0 %
| 125

Max. setting
6250 Power derate 2

0 units
20000 units
Input:
- Multi-input 108
OFF
ON
- EIC water temp
OFF - EIC oil temp
ON
0.0 %
100.0 %
6260 Power derate 3

0 units
20000 units
Input:
- Multi-input 108
OFF
ON
- EIC water temp
OFF - EIC oil temp
ON
0.0 %
100.0 %
4.8.8 Idle start

Max. setting
6290 Idle running

0.0 sec. 18000.0 Qc4002™
6291 Idle start Start timer
59940.0 sec. sec. MkII User
Manual
OFF
6292 Idle start Enable start OFF
ON
0.0 sec. 18000.0

6293 Idle stop Stop timer
59940.0 sec. sec.
OFF
6294 Idle stop Enable stop OFF
ON

6295 Idle active Not used
A Option dep.
OFF
6296 Idle active Enable OFF
ON
126 |
User Manual
4.8.9 Engine heater

setting
Max.
6320 Engine heater

Heater function for
20 deg. Qc4002™
6321 Engine heater Setpoint 40 deg. standstill.
MkII User
250 deg. Type:
Manual
- Multi-input 102
Relay output Not used - Multi-input 105
6322 Engine heater Not used - Multi-input 108
A Option dep.
- EIC
Multi-inp 102 Multi-inp
6323 Engine heater Type
EIC 102
1 deg.
6324 Engine heater Hysteresis 3 deg.
70 deg.
OFF
6325 Engine heater Enable OFF
ON
4.8.10 Analogue load sharing lines output

Max. setting
6380 Load share out

Option Adjustment of the
1.0 V Analogue analogue load sharing line
6381 Load share out Setpoint 4.0 V
5.0 V load max. value.
sharing
6390 Load share type

Option Selection between select-
Analogue able load sharing line max.
Adjustable
6391 Load share type Setpoint load value (setting 6381) or
Selco T4800
sharing adaptation to Selco T4800
load sharing line.
| 127
4.8.11 Master clock

Max. setting
6400 Master clock

0h Qc4002™ Compensation for frequency
6401 Master clock Start hour 8h
23 h MkII User variation related clock time
Manual in the system.
0h
6402 Master clock Stop hour 8h
23 h
1s
6403 Master clock Difference 20 s
999 s
Compen- 0.1 Hz
6404 Master clock 0.1 Hz
sation 1.0 Hz
OFF
6405 Master clock Enable OFF
ON
4.8.12 Cooling ventilation

Max. setting
6460 Max. ventilation

20 deg. Qc4002™ Ventilation fan control.
6461 Max ventilation Setpoint 90 deg.
250 deg. MkII User
Manual
6462 Max ventilation Not used
A Option dep
1 deg.
6463 Max ventilation Hysteresis 5 deg.
70 deg.
OFF
6464 Max ventilation Enable OFF
ON
4.8.13 Summer/winter time

Max. setting
6490 Summer/winter time

Qc4002™ The summer/winter time
OFF
6491 Sum/win time Enable OFF MkII User change follows the mainland
ON
Manual Europe rules.
128 |
User Manual
4.8.14 Fuel transfer pump logic

Max. setting
6550 Fuel pump logic

0% Qc4002™ Type:
6291 Fuel pump logic Setpoint start 20 %
100 % MkII User - Multi-input 102
Manual - Multi-input 105
0%
6292 Fuel pump logic Setpoint stop 80 % - Multi-input 108
100 %
Fill check 0.1 s

6293 Fuel pump logic 60.0 s
time 300.0 s

6294 Fuel pump logic Not used
A Option dep.
Multi-inp 102 Multi-inp

6295 Fuel pump logic Setpoint
Multi-inp 108 102
Warning
6296 Fuel pump logic Fail class F1…F8
(F2)
4.8.15 Fan logic

Max. setting
6560 Fan input settings

-Multi-input 102 Selection of fan input:
Multi- Qc4002™
6561 Fan input Setpoint start -Multi-input 105 MkII User - Multi-input 102
input 102
-Multi-input 108 Manual - Multi-input 105
- Mul ti-input 108
0h
6562 Fan prio update Setpoint stop 0h
200h
20deg
6563 1st prio fan Setpoint start 70deg
250deg
0deg
6564 1st pri fan hys. Setpoint stop 10deg
50deg
20deg
6565 2 st prio fan Setpoint start 80deg
250deg
0deg
6566 2st pr. fan hys. Setpoint stop 10deg
50deg
6570 3rd prio fan

20deg Qc4002™ Selection of fan input:
250deg MkII User - Multi-input 102
0deg
6572 3st pr. Fan hys. Setpoint stop 10deg - Mul ti-input 108
50deg
20deg
250deg
0deg
6574 4st pr. fan hys. Setpoint stop 10deg
50deg
| 129

Max. setting
6580 Fan A output

Relay output Not used Qc4002™ Selection of fan input:
6581 Fan A output Not used
A Option-dep. MkII User - Multi-input 102
6582 Fan B output Not used - Mul ti-input 108
B Option-dep.

6583 Fan C output Not used
C Option-dep.

6584 Fan D output Not used
D Option-dep.
OFF
6585 Fan run. hour reset Reset OFF
ON
0.0 s
6586 Fan start delay Timer 10.0 s
30.0 s
6590 Fan A failure

0.1 s Qc4002™
6591 Fan A failure Timer 10.0 s
300.0 s MkII User
Manual
Not used
6592 Fan A failure Output A Not used
Option-dep.
Not used
6593 Fan A failure Output B Not used
Option-dep.
OFF
6594 Fan A failure Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6595 Fan A failure Fail class F1...F8
(F2)
6600 Fan B failure

0.1 s Qc4002™
6601 Fan B failure Timer 10.0 s
300.0 s MkII User
Manual
Not used
6602 Fan B failure Output A Not used
Option-dep.
Not used
6603 Fan B failure Output B Not used
Option-dep.
OFF
6604 Fan B failure Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6605 Fan B failure Fail class F1...F8
(F2)
130 |
User Manual

Max. setting
6610 Fan C failure

0.1 s Qc4002™
6611 Fan C failure Timer 10.0 s
300.0 s MkII User
Manual
Not used
6612 Fan C failure Output A Not used
Option-dep.
Not used
6613 Fan C failure Output B Not used
Option-dep.
OFF
6614 Fan C failure Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6615 Fan C failure Fail class F1...F8
(F2)
6620 Fan D failure

0.1 s Qc4002™
6621 Fan D failure Timer 10.0 s
300.0 s MkII User
Manual
Not used
6622 Fan D failure Output A Not used
Option-dep.
Not used
6623 Fan D failure Output B Not used
Option-dep.
OFF
6624 Fan D failure Enable OFF
ON
Warning
6625 Fan D failure Fail class F1...F8
(F2)
4.8.16 Diagnostics

Max. setting
6700 Diagnostics
0s Qc4002™ Activates diagnostics mode
6701 Diagnostics Timer 30
30s MkII User to read ECU data without
Manual starting engine.
OFF
6702 Diagnostics Enable OFF
ON
| 131
4.8.17 I thermal demand

Max. setting
6840 I thermal demand

0s Qc4002™ Setup of I thermal period.
6841 I thermal demand Timer 480
1200s MkII User
Manual
OFF Enabled is used for reset.
6842 I thermal demand Enable OFF
ON
OFF Reset I max. demand.
6843 I max.demand Enable OFF
ON
4.8.18 Pulse counter

Max. setting

0 Qc4002™ Setup of pulse counter.
6851 Pulse counter 1 Setpoint 1
1000 MkII User
Manual
Unit/Pulse
6852 Pulse counter 1 Unit Unit/Pulse
Pulse/Unit
No decimals
One decimals
6853 Pulse counter 1 Decimals No decimals
Two decimals
Three decimal

0 Qc4002™ Setup of pulse counter.
6861 Pulse counter 2 Setpoint 1
1000 MkII User
Manual
Unit/Pulse
6862 Pulse counter 2 Unit Unit/Pulse
Pulse/Unit
No decimals
One decimals
6863 Pulse counter 2 Decimals No decimals
Two decimals
Three decimal
4.8.19 Alarm jump

Max. setting
6900 Alarm jump

Qc4002™ Selection of jump to alarm
OFF MkII User list view on the display if
6901 Alarm jump Enable ON
ON Manual an alarm appears (ON), or
stay at present view (OFF).
132 |
User Manual
4.8.20 Command timers
NOTE: There are 4 identical command timers in the unit: Menu 6960-6996, but only command timer 1 is displayed in
this manual.

Max. setting
6960 command start/stop timer 1

MkII User MO
Manual TU
WE
MO TH
MO-TU- FR
6961 Start timer 1 days Setpoint OFF
WE-TH- SA
FR-SA-SU SU
MO-TU-WE-TH
MO-TU-WE-TH-FR
SA-SU
MO-TU-WE-TH-FR-SA-SU
Qc4002™
0
6962 Start timer 1 hour Setpoint 10 MkII User
23
Manual
Qc4002™
0
6963 Start timer 1 min Setpoint 0 MkII User
59
Manual
MkII User MO
Manual TU
WE
MO TH
MO-TU-
MO-TU- FR
6964 Stop timer 1 days Setpoint WE-TH-
WE-TH- SA
FR-SA-SU
FR-SA-SU SU
MO-TU-WE-TH
MO-TU-WE-TH-FR
SA-SU
MO-TU-WE-TH-FR-SA-SU
Qc4002™
0
6965 Stop timer 1 hour Setpoint 10 MkII User
23
Manual
Qc4002™
0
6966 Stop timer 1 min Setpoint 0 MkII User
59
Manual
NOTE: Start/stop timers can be used in M-logic
| 133
4.9 System parameters - mains setup
4.9.1 Mains setup

Max. setting
7000 Mains power

-20000 kW Qc4002™ Menu 7000 is for peak
7001 Mains power Day 750 kW
20000 kW MkII User shaving/mains power
Manual export modes.
-20000 kW
7002 Mains power Night 1000 kW
20000 kW
Set values in the controller
Transducer 0 kW Mains unit.
7003 Mains power 0 kW
max 20000 kW
Menu 7001/7002 must be
a positive value for mains
power export or peak
-20000 kW shaving mode.
7004 Mains power Transducer min 0 kW
0 kW
Menu 7001/7002 must be
a negative value for mains
power import.
7010 Daytime period

0h Qc4002™ Menu 7010 is for peak
7011 Daytime period Start hour 8h
23 h MkII User shaving/mains power
0 min
7012 Daytime period Start minute 0 min
59 min
The period outside the
0h daytime period is defined
7013 Daytime period Stop hour 16 h
23 h as the night period.
0 min
7014 Daytime period Stop period 0 min
59 min
7020 Start generator

5% Qc4002™ Menu 7020 is for peak
7021 Start generator Setpoint 80%
100% MkII User shaving/mains power
0.0 s
7022 Start generator Timer 10.0 s
990.0 s
The setpoint refers to the
0% menu 7000 mains power
7023 Start generator Minimum load 5%
100% setting.
7030 Stop generator

0% Qc4002™ Menu 7030 is for peak
7031 Stop generator Setpoint 60%
80% MkII User shaving/mains power
0.0 s The setpoint refers to the

7032 Stop generator Timer 30.0 s
990.0 s menu 7000 mains power
setting.
134 |
User Manual
4.9.2 Test

Max. setting
7040 Test running

1% Qc4002™ Available test types:
7041 Test Setpoint 80%
100% MkII User -Simple (engine run only)
Manual -Load (parallel to mains)
0.0 sec.
7042 Test Test time 300.0 sec. -Full (disconnects mains)
59940.0
sec.
Semi- auto
7043 Test Return mode mode Auto mode
Auto mode
Simple test
7044 Test Test type Simple test
Full test
4.9.3 Controller settings

Max. setting
7050 Fixed power settings

0% Qc4002™ Fixed power parallel with mains
7051 Fixed power settings Power 100 %
100 % MkII User settings.
Manual
0.60
7052 Fixed power settings Power factor 0.90
1.00
Inductive
7053 Fixed power settings Power factor Inductive
Capacitive
4.9.4 Mains failure

Max. setting
7060 U Mains Failure

0.5 s Qc4002™ Menus 7063 and 7064 relate to
7061 U Mains failure Fail. delay 5.0 s
990.0 s MkII User nominal settings.
Manual Menu 7066 refers to the mean
10 s
7062 U Mains failure Mains OK delay 60 s value of the measured voltage.
9900 s
80%
7063 U Mains failure U< 90%
100%
100%
7064 U Mains failure U> 110%
120%
Start eng.
+ open
Mains fail. Start eng.
7065 U Mains failure MB
control + open MB
Start
engine
2%
7066 U Mains failure U unbalance 100%
100%
| 135

Max. setting
7070 f Mains Failure

0.5 s Qc4002™ Menus 7073 and 7074 relate to
7071 f Mains failure Fail. delay 5.0 s
990.0 s MkII User nominal settings.
Manual
10 s
7072 f Mains failure Mains OK delay 60 s
9900 s
80.0%
7073 f Mains failure f< 95.0%
100.0%
100.0%
7074 f Mains failure f> 105.0%
120.0%
7080 MB control
OFF Qc4002™ Mode shift allows switching to
7081 MB control Mode shift OFF
ON MkII User AMF mode.
Manual
0.0 s
7082 MB control MB close delay 0.5 s
30.0 s
OFF
7083 MB control Back sync. OFF
ON
OFF
7084 MB control Sync to Mains ON
ON
0.0s
7085 MB control Load time 0.0 s
30.0 s
4.9.5 Y1(X1) droop curve

Max. setting

0.00 % Qc4002™
7121 Y1(x1) Dead band Dead band low 0.40 %
99.99 % MkII User
Manual
0.00 %
7122 Y1(x1) Dead band Dead band high 0.50 %
99.99 %
0.00 %
7123 Y1(x1) Dead band Hysterese low 0.50 %
99.99 %
0.00 %
7124 Y1(x1) Dead band Hysterese high 0.50 %
99.99 %
7130 P(x1) Slope

0 kW Qc4002™
7131 P(x1) Slope MIN 200 kW
20000 kW MkII User
Manual
0 kW
7132 P(x1) Slope MAX 480 kW
20000 kW
-20000 kW
7133 P(x1) Slope Slope low 50 kW
20000 kW
-20000 kW
7134 P(x1) Slope Slope high -50 kW
20000 kW
136 |
User Manual

Max. setting
7140 Droop curve 1

P(x1) Qc4002™
7141 Droop curve 1 P(x1) P(x1)
P(x1) MkII User
Manual
f
7142 Droop curve 1 X1 f
f
OFF
7143 Droop curve 1 Enable OFF
ON
4.9.6 Y2(X2) droop curve

Max. setting

0.00 % Option D1
7151 Y2(x2) Dead band Dead band low 2.00 %
99.99 %
0.00 %
7152 Y2(x2) Dead band Dead band high 2.00 %
99.99 %
0.00 %
7153 Y2(x2) Dead band Hysterese low 2.10 %
99.99 %
0.00 %
7154 Y2(x2) Dead band Hysterese high 2.10 %
99.99 %
7160 Q(x2) Slope

0 kVAr Option D1
7161 Q(x2) Slope MIN 200 kVAr
20000 kVAr
0 kVAr
7162 Q(x2) Slope MAX 480 kVAr
20000 kVAr
-20000
7163 Q(x2) Slope Slope low kVAr 50 kVAr
20000 kVAr
-20000
7164 Q(x2) Slope Slope high kVAr -50 kVAr
20000 kVAr
7170 Cosphi(x2) Slope

0.60 Option D1
7171 Cosphi(x2) Slope MIN 0.80
1.00
Inductive
7172 Cosphi(x2) Slope I/C Inductive
Capacitive
0.60
7173 Cosphi(x2) Slope MAX 1.00
1.00
Inductive
7174 Cosphi(x2) Slope I/C Inductive
Capacitive
- 1.00
7175 Cosphi(x2) Slope Slope low -0.05
1.00
-1.00
7176 Cosphi(x2) Slope Slope high 0.05
1.00
| 137

Max. setting
7180 Droop curve 2

Cosphi(x2) Option D1
7181 Droop curve 2 Cosphi(x2) Cosphi(x2)
Q(x2)
U
7182 Droop curve 2 X2 U
P
OFF
7183 Droop curve 2 Enable OFF
ON
4.9.7 Power offset

Max. setting
7220 Power offset

-20000 kW Qc4002™ Setup of Power offset.
7221 Power offset 1 Setpoint 0 kW
20000 kW MkII User
Manual
OFF
7222 Power offset 1 Enable OFF
ON
-20000 kW
20000 kW
OFF
ON
-20000 kW
20000 kW
OFF
ON
4.9.8 Cosphi offset

Max. setting
7240 Cosphi offset

-0,8 Qc4002™ Setup of Cosphi offset.
7241 Cosphi offset 1 Setpoint 0
0,8 MkII User
Manual
OFF
7242 Cosphi offset 1 Enable OFF
ON
-0,8
0,8
OFF
ON
-0,8
0,8
OFF
ON
138 |
User Manual
4.10 System parameters - external communication
4.10.1 External communication

Max. setting
7500 Communication control

OFF Modbus These settings must be
7501 Comm. control Power OFF
ON (standard) ON if commands are to be
or Profibus sent via Modbus
OFF
7502 Comm. control Frequency OFF (optional) communication. When
ON enabled, the Modbus
OFF values will overrule
7503 Comm. control Voltage OFF external and internal
ON
settings.
OFF Voltage, power factor and
7504 Comm. control Cosphi OFF
ON reactive power control
requires AVR control.
OFF
7505 Comm. control Reactive power OFF
ON
7510 External communication

Modbus The mode ASCII is used
1 (Standard) for modem
7511 Ext. communication ID 1
247 or Profibus communication
(optional) (ASCII: 7 data bit,
RTU: 8 data bit).
9600 Modbus
7512 Ext. communication Baud rate 9600
19200 (Standard)
RTU Modbus
7513 Ext. communication Mode RTU
ASCII (Standard)
4.10.2 Power management internal communication

Max. setting

Qc4002™
1
7531 Int. comm. ID ID 1 MkII User
16
Manual
| 139
4.11 System parameters - engine interface communication
4.11.1 Engine interface communication

Max. setting
7560 Engine I/F

OFF Option:Cummins The setting affects the
Cummins QSX15 Modbus displayed data, but not the
Engine Modbus data (option H2)
7561 Engine I/F Cummins OFF
type
QSK23/45/60/78
Cummins QST30
OFF Option: MTU MDEC is only

DDEC J1939/MTU available in option H5.
ADEC/ MTU
EMR MDEC
JDEC J1939 ) Please choose MDEC
Iveco 2000/4000 M.303 when
Perkins M.201 or M.304 is
Caterpillar required.
Volvo Penta
Volvo Penta EMS 2 Menu 7562 is only
Engine applicable when MTU
Scania EMS
7561 Engine I/F OFF ADEC is selected as
type Scania EMS 2
engine type.
MDEC 2000/4000
M.302
Menu 7563 is for enabling
MDEC 2000/4000
the EIC commands
M.303
transmission.
MTU ADEC
Cummins
Menu 7564: When set to
Generic J1939
“ON”, up to 19 extra
MTU J1939 views (of 3 lines) are
Smart Connect added to the 15 original
0 V1 views (of 3 lines).
7562 CANopen ID Node ID 6 These extra views are
16
displaying all the present
OFF engine com. values
7563 EIC Controls Enable ON
ON broadcasted on this CAN
communication when this
OFF
7564 EIC Auto view Enable OFF function is set to “ON”.
ON
Menu 7565: ‘Caterpillar

Interface OFF CDVR’ Will not work if
7565 Digital AVR OFF
protocol Caterpillar CDVR MTU protocols are
selected in menu 7561
140 |
User Manual
4.12 System parameters - external I/O communication setup
4.12.1 External I/O communication setup

Max. setting
7950 KL320x config

7951 KL320x config Module 1 Option: Selection for analogue
External I/O modules.
7952 KL320x config Module 2
Pt100 modules The selections for KL
7953 KL320x config Module 3 (2/3-wire) 3202/3204 cannot be
10- changed.
1200 Ω After changing module type,
7954 KL320x config Module 4 (2-wire) the parameter list in the PC
USW must be uploaded
again.
7970 CAN 1
OFF Option: This menu is only activated
7971 CAN 1 Type OFF
Beckhoff External I/O if option H8.2 is activated.
modules After changing type, the
50k
parameter list in the PC
7972 CAN 1 Baud 125k 125k
250k again.
1 to Menu 7974 is for re-
7973 CAN 1 ID 1 establishing communication
64
after a fault/disconnection.
OFF
7974 CAN 1 Reset OFF
ON
7980 CAN 2
OFF Option: This menu is only activated
7981 CAN 2 Type OFF
Beckhoff External I/O if option H8.8 is activated.
modules After changing type, the
50k
parameter list in the PC
7982 CAN 2 Baud 125k 125k
250k again.
1 to Menu 7984 is for re-
7983 CAN 2 ID 1 establishing communication
64
after a fault/disconnection.
OFF
7984 CAN 2 Reset OFF
ON
| 141
4.12.2 Event printer

Max. setting
7990 Event printer

OFF Enable this when the printer is
7991 Event printer Enable OFF
ON connected to the service port.
Enable this if additional data is

OFF to be printed for every event;
7992 Event printer Print add data OFF
ON additional data such as power,
voltage, etc.
This counter is the number of

events that will be printed with
1
7993 Event printer Event records 5 additional data, when the digital
150
input ‘Print event log’ is
activated.
Log types:
Event -Event
7994 Event printer Log type select Event
Battery -Alarm
-Battery
Time interval between the

0 min automatic status prints. If auto
7995 Event printer Auto status 0 min
990 min status is set to 0, the auto print is
disabled.
4.13 System parameters - power management setup
4.13.1 Power management setup

Max. setting
8000 Load dependent start

1 kW Qc4002™
8001 Load dep. start P setpoint 100 kW
20000 kW MkII User
Manual
1 kVA
8002 Load dep. start S setpoint 100 kVA
20000 kVA
1%
8003 Load dep. start % setpoint 90 %
100 %
0.0 s
8004 Load dep. start Timer 10.0 s
990.0 s
0 kW
8005 Load dep. Start Min. load 20 kW
20000 kW
142 |
User Manual

Max. setting
8010 Load dependent stop

1 kW Qc4002™ Menu 8015 set to ‘ON’ will
8011 Load dep. stop P setpoint 200 kW
20000 kW MkII User block the load dependent stop if
Manual a heavy consumer is connected.
1 kVA
8012 Load dep. stop S setpoint 200 kVA
20000 kVA
1%
8013 Load dep. stop % setpoint 70 %
100 %
5.0 s
8014 Load dep. stop Timer 30.0 s
990.0 s
Blocked ON
Blocked
8015 Load dep. stop Select Blocked
ON
OFF
8020 PM config
Remote Qc4002™ Remote and local decide if the
8021 PM config Enable Remote
Local MkII User start/stop command of the plant
Manual is given Remote (digital input)
or Local (from the display).
Update is used to define if the
Update local Update change of a running mode will
8022 PM config Update affect all controllers connected
Update all all
on the power management CAN
line or only the local unit where
the running mode is changed.
8030 Priority selection

Manual abs. Setup of priority
Power
Running management
hours abs.
Fuel Manual See PMS
8031 Priority select. Priority User manual
optimization abs.
Manual rel.
Running
hours rel.
8080 Priority (1-5)

1 Menu 8086 is only applicable if
8081 Priority 1 ID 1 Power
16 “Manual” is selected in menu
management
8031. Menu 8086 resets itself to
1
8082 Priority 2 ID 2 See PMS OFF automatically once the new
16 User manual settings have been transmitted.
1
8083 Priority 3 ID 3
16
1
16
1
16
Transmit new ON
8086 Enable OFF
priority OFF
| 143

Max. setting
8090 Priority (6-11)

1
16
management
1
8092 Priority 7 ID 7 See PMS
16 User manual
1
16
1
16
1
16
1
16
8100 Priority (12-16)

1
16 management
1
8102 Priority 13 ID 13 See PMS
16 User manual
1
16
1
16
1
16
8110 Running hours

Priority 1 hrs Qc4002™ If menu 8113 is set ‘ON’, the
8111 Running hours 175 hrs
Update 20000 hrs MkII User Trip counter in the unit will be
Manual reset to 0 hours.
Total
8112 Running hours Type Trip Total
LoadProfiled
OFF
8113 Running hours Trip counter OFF
ON
8120 Ground relay

Not used Qc4002™ Selection of relay output for
8121 Ground relay Output A Not used
Option dep. MkII User start point grounding.
Manual
Not used
8122 Ground relay Output B Not used
Option dep.
OFF
8123 Ground relay Enable OFF
ON
8140 Stop non-connected DGs

Stop timer for non-connected
Power
gensets.
Stop non-con. 10.0 s management
8141 Delay 60.0 s
DGs 600.0 s
See PMS
User manual
144 |
User Manual

Max. setting
8170 Fuel optimise

30%
8171 Fuel optimise Setpoint 80% Power
100%
management
10 kW
8172 Fuel optimise Swap setpoint 200 kW See PMS
20000 kW User manual
0.0 s
8173 Fuel optimise Timer 10.0 s
999.0 s
1 hrs
8174 Fuel optimise Hours 175 hrs
20000 hrs
OFF
8175 Fuel optimise Enable hour OFF
ON
8180 Mains config.

OFF Only available in controller
8181 Mb failure start Enable OFF Power
ON mains unit.
management
Auto switch selections:
OFF
8182 Parallel Enable OFF See PMS -OFF
ON User manual -Static section
OFF -Dynamic section-
8183 No break transfer Enable OFF
ON -All sections
OFF
8184 Auto switch Select OFF
All sections
Run all
mains Run one
8185 Run type Select
Run one mains
mains
17
8186 Run type ID to run 17
32
8190 Tie breaker

0 kW Only available in controller
8191 Tie breaker TB open point 50 kW Power
20000 kW mains unit.
management
Power 1 kW
8192 Tie breaker 50 kW See PMS
Capacity 20000 kW User manual
P. cap. 5.0 s
8193 Tie breaker 30.0 s
Overrule 999.9 s
P cap. OFF
8194 Tie breaker OFF
Overrule ON
0.0 s
8195 Tie breaker Load time 0.0 s
30.0 s

10 kVA Only available in controller DG
8201 Heavy consumer 1 Req. value 500 kVA Power
9999 kVA units.
management
10 kW
8202 Heavy consumer 1 Nom. power 400 kW See PMS
9999 kW User manual
Fixed load
Fixed
8203 Heavy consumer 1 Load type Variable
load
load
| 145

Max. setting

10 kVA Only available in controller DG
8211 Heavy consumer 2 Req. value 500 kVA Power
9999 kVA units.
management
10 kW
8212 Heavy consumer 2 Nom. power 400 kW See PMS
9999 kW User manual
Fixed load
Fixed
8213 Heavy consumer 2 Load type Variable
load
load
8220 Available power 1

10 kW The setting can be used for
8221 Avail. power 1 Setpoint 1000 kW Power
20000 kW conditional connection of load
management
groups.
1.0 s
8222 Avail. power 1 Timer 10.0 s See PMS The relay(s) used must be set to
999.9 s User manual “Limit” mode.
Relay Not used
8223 Avail. power 1 Not used
Relay Not used
OFF
8225 Avail. power 1 Enable OFF
ON

management
groups.
2.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used
OFF
ON

management
groups.
3.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
146 |
User Manual

Max. setting

management
groups.
4.0 s
Relay Not used
output A Option-dep.
Relay Not used
output B Option-dep.
OFF
ON

management
groups.
5.0 s
Relay Not used
Relay Not used
OFF
ON
8270 TB power
Transducer 0 kW Qc4002™ mains only: If the
8271 TB power 0 kW Power
max. 20000 kW TB needs to be deloaded before
management
opening, a power transducer
Transducer -20000 kW See PMS must be connected to multi-
8272 TB power 0 kW
min. 0 kW User manual input 105.
8280 Asymmetric load sharing

1% Please refer to the PMS User
8281 Asymmetric LS Setpoint 80% Power
100% manual.
management
OFF
8282 Asymmetric LS Enable OFF
ON
8880 Load dependent start/stop calc.

kW These settings are used to decide
8881 Start/stop calc. S1 kW Power
kVA how the load dependent start
management
and stop commands in the
Value See PMS power management system
8882 Start/stop calc. S2 Value
Percentage User manual should be calculated.
| 147

Max. setting
8920 Secured mode

Secured Multi-start setpoint 1 and 2:
Secured Power
mode OFF
8921 Secured mode Sec mode management - Auto calculation
Secured - 1 DG
OFF
mode ON See PMS - 2 DG
User manual - 3 DG
Auto
Multi-start setpoint Auto cal- - 4 DG
8922 Setpoint 1 calculation
1 culation
Start 16 DG - 5 DG
- 6 DG
Minimum
Multi-start setpoint - 7 DG
8923 Run 1 number run. 1
1 - 8 DG
1-16
- 9 DG
Multi-start - 10 DG
set 1 Multi- - 11 DG
8924 Multi-start config. Select
Multi-start start set 1
- 12 DG
set 2
- 13 DG
Auto - 14 DG
Multi-start setpoint Start 16
8925 Setpoint 2 calculation - 15 DG
2 DG
Start 16 DG - 16 DG
Minimum number of running

Minimum DGs: 1-16 DGs.
Multi-start setpoint
8926 Run 2 number run. 1
2
1-16 Multi-start configuration:
Selects between setpoint 1 and
2.

Multi-in 102 Multi-in Type:
8931 HC 1 VAR load Type
Multi-in 108 102 - Multi-input 102
- Multi-input 105
Setpoint 0 mA
8932 HC 1 VAR load 0 mA - Multi-input 108
min. 10 mA
10 mA The function is only available in

8933 HC 1 VAR load Setpoint max. 20 mA
20 mA Qc4002™ MkII DG units.

Multi-in 102 Multi-in Type:
8941 HC 2 VAR load Type
Multi-in 108 105 - Multi-input 102
- Multi-input 105
Setpoint 0 mA
8942 HC 2 VAR load 0 mA - Multi-input 108
min. 10 mA
10 mA The function is only available in

8943 HC 2 VAR load Setpoint max. 20 mA
20 mA Qc4002™ MkII DG units.
148 |
User Manual
4.14 Jump menus

A number of menus can only be entered using the jump menu:
4.14.1 9000 Software version

Information about the application software version downloaded to the unit.
Please check this before contacting Atlas Copco regarding service and support matters.
Option N: ‘W1’ displays the IP address and Subnet mask, and ‘W2’ displays the Gateway address and software
image version.
4.14.2 9010 Display character test

Shows a test print of the character set in the display.
4.14.3 9020 Service port

The service port can be set up to use the ASCII communication. The ASCII communication is used when the utility
software is connected through a modem.
NOTES: Selection ‘0’ must be used for cable connection between the controller and the PC.
Selection ‘1’ must be used for modem connection between the controller and the PC.
4.14.4 9070 M4 SW version

Information about the software version in the engine I/F PCB placed in slot 8.

Max. setting
9100 Application
Qc4002™ This setting is only accessible
MkII User using the ‘JUMP’ button on the
Manual display.
DG unit
9100 Application Application DG unit Available selections:
BTB unit
- DG unit (diesel generator)
- Mains unit (mains connection)
- BTB unit (bus tie breaker)
The unit will return to factory settings if menu 9100 is changed!
| 149
No. Setting Min. Notes Ref. Description

Max.
911x Password
0 Qc4002™ It is recommended to change the
9116 User password Setting
32000 MkII User password levels of the user, service
Manual and master password if access to
0
9117 Service password Setting parameter settings must be
32000 restricted.
0
9118 Master password Setting
32000
9.14.5 9120 Service menu

The service menu can only be entered using the ‘JUMP’ push-button. This menu is used in service situations.
In the alarm selection you can see all the alarm timers and their remaining time if they are counting.
The input and output selections show the present status of the inputs and outputs. E.g. mode inputs relay outputs
and load sharing lines.
No. Setting Description
912x Service menu

Service menu Timers Shows remaining alarm delay time
Service menu Digital inputs Shows digital input status
Service menu Digital outputs Shows digital output status
Service menu Miscellaneous Shows misc. information
9.14.6 9130 AC config.

This menu is used to choose the AC configuration.
9130 AC config.
Selections:
- 3 phase L1L2L3
9130 AC config. Setting - 2 phase L1L3
- 2 phase L1L2
- 1 phase L1
NOTES: Phase angles:

L1L2L3: 120 degrees with neutral.
L1L3: 180 degrees (split phase, neutral in the centre).
L1L2: 120 degrees with neutral.
L1: Single phase with phase-neutral.
150 |
User Manual
9.14.7 9140 Angle compensation BB/G

This menu is used to compensate the transformer phase angle when the generator and busbar measurements are
made on each side of a transformer.

Max. setting
9140 Angle comp. BB/G

Qc4002™
-179.0 deg.
9140 Angle comp. BB/G 1 Angle 0.0 MkII User
179.0 deg. Manual
-179.0 deg.
9142 Angle comp. BB/G 2 Angle 0.0
179.0 deg.
9150 Backlight dim
9150 Backlight dim Sets the light intensity for the display.

Max. setting
9160 User defined application

Qc4002™ The 4 different applications
Appl. 1
9160 Application Appl. 1 MkII User available make it possible to shift
Appl. 4 Manual between different plant types.
9.14.8 9170 Internal CAN protocol

This menu is used to make it possible to interface to Qc4002™ MkII units using application SW version 3.20.x or
earlier.

setting
Max.
9170 Internal CAN protocol
Qc4002™
Protocol 1
9170 Application Application Protocol 2 MkII User
Protocol 2 Manual
| 151
9.14.9 9180 Quick setup (mains controller)

This menu makes it possible to set up the power management application without using the ‘Application
configuration’ tool in the PC utility software.

Max. setting
9180 Quick setup

OFF When using this menu, it will not
9181 Quick setup Mode Setup stand-alone OFF be possible to design applications
Setup plant with Qc4002™ MkII bus tie
units.
OFF
CAN A
9182 Quick setup CAN CAN A
CAN B
CAN A+B
Pulse
No MB
9183 Quick setup MB Pulse
Continuous
Compact
Pulse
9184 Quick setup GB Continuous Pulse
Compact
Mains present Mains

9185 Quick setup Mains
No mains present present
Standard
9186 Quick setup Plant type Standard
Single DG
4.14.10 9190 Application broadcast

This menu makes it possible to broadcast an application between all Qc4002™ MkII units connected on the CAN A
or CAN B line.

Max. setting
9190 Application broadcast

OFF
Application Broadcast
9191 Enable OFF
broadcast Broadcast +
Activate
Application 1
Application Application 2
9192 Application Application 1
broadcast Application 3
Application 4
152 |
User Manual
4.15 System parameters - utility software
4.15.1 GSM settings
NOTE: GSM settings are only accessible in the utility software.

Max. setting
10320 GSM Pin code

Qc4002™
0
GSM Pin code Function 1933 MkII User
9999
Manual
10330 Telephone no. 1

Qc4002™
0
10330 Telephone 1 Function 12345678903 MkII User
99999999999
Manual
NOTE: Telephone numbers 2-5 are available in menus 10340-10373.
4.15.2 Passwords
NOTE: Password settings are only accessible in the utility software.

Max. setting
10390 Password language page

MkII User - None
None Manual
10390 Passw. lang. page None - Master
Customer
- Service
- Customer
10400 Password log page

MkII User - None
None Manual
10400 Passw. log page None - Master
Customer
- Service
- Customer
10410 Password control page

MkII User - None
None Manual
10410 Passw. control page None - Master
Customer
- Service
- Customer
| 153
4.16 System parameters - VDO inputs
4.16.1 VDO 102
NOTE: VDO 102 settings are only accessible in the utility software

Max. setting
10460 VDO 1 type

Sensor type 1 MkII User - Sensor type 1
10460 VDO 1 type Configurable Sensor type 1 Manual - Sensor type 2
VDO - Sensor type 3
- Configurable VDO
10470 VDO 1 input setpoint 1

Qc4002™ Configurable VDO curve.
0 Ohm
10470 VDO 1 inp. setp. 1 10 Ohm MkII User
1800 Ohm
Manual
10480 VDO 1 output setpoint 1

-49
10480 VDO 1 outp. setp. 1 40 MkII User
482
Manual

0 Ohm
10480 VDO 1 inp. setp. 2 44.9 Ohm MkII User
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual

0 Ohm
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual

0 Ohm
10530 VDO 1 inp. setp. 4 134.7 Ohm MkII User
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual
154 |
User Manual

Max. setting

0 Ohm
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual

0 Ohm
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual

0 Ohm
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual

0 Ohm
1800 Ohm
Manual

-49
482
Manual
4.16.2 VDO 105
NOTES: VDO 105 settings are only accessible in the utility software.
Menus 10630-10790 equal the settings for VDO 102 (10460-10620).
4.16.3 VDO 108
NOTES: VDO 108 settings are only accessible in the utility software.
Menus 10800-10960 equal the settings for VDO 102 (10460-10620).
| 155
4.16.4 Multi-input selections

Max. setting
10970 Engineering units

Bar/Celsius
10970 Engineering units Bar/Celsius
Psi/Fahrenheit

Possible selections:
-4-20 mA
-0-40 V DC
-Pt100
4-20 mA
10980 Multi-inp.conf. 102 0-40 V DC -Pt1000
Binary
-VDO oil pressure
-VDO water temp
-VDO fuel level
-Binary

-4-20 mA
-0-40 V DC
-Pt100
4-20 mA
Binary
-VDO oil pressure
-VDO water temp
-VDO fuel level
-Binary
11000 Multi-input configurable 108

-4-20 mA
-0-40 V DC
-Pt100
4-20 mA
Binary
-VDO oil pressure
-VDO water temp
-VDO fuel level
-Binary
4.16.5 4-20 mA input scaling

Max. setting
11010 4-20 mA input scale 102

4-20 mA input scale No decimal Selecting ‘Enable’ and writing the
Setpoint No decimal
102 Two decimal new setpoint will scale the
associated min., max. and value
4-20 mA input scale OFF
Enable OFF automatically.
102 ON
NOTE: The same settings apply to menus 11020-11110.
156 |
User Manual
4.16.6 Parameter ID

Max. setting
11200 Parameter ID
11201 Parameter ID Setpoint “Insert text” Insert text” Qc4002™ Setup of Parameter Id
MkII User
Basic
Password Manual
11202 Parameter ID Customer Customer
level
Service
4.17 System parameters - external digital outputs
4.17.1 External digital outputs

Max. setting
12790 Ext. dig. out 1

Alarm relay Option:
ND External I/O
Alarm relay
Ext. dig. out 1 Function Limit modules
ND
Alarm relay
NE
0.0 s
Ext. dig. out 1 OFF delay 5.0 s
999.9 s
NOTE: The same settings apply to menus 12800-12940.
4.17.2 External module status
No. Setting Min. Notes Ref. Description

Max.
Option: This is a number read in the
-32768 External I/O modules external module and displayed in
12950 Ext module 0 STATUS
+32767 the USW only. Please refer to the
User manual for details.
NOTE: The same settings apply to menus 12951-12983 (external modules 1 to 33).
| 157
4.17.3 13000 SuperVision

The following menus define the data used for the ‘SuperVision’ page in the utility software.

Max. setting
13000 Fuel consumption

0 l/h Menu 13005 activates display of
13000 F. cons. 0% load Setpoint 2 l/h
3000 l/h the expected fuel rate in the
utility software SuperVision
0 l/h
13001 F. cons. 50% load Setpoint 114.8 l/h page.
3000 l/h
F. cons. optimum 0 l/h

13002 Setpoint 168.7 l/h
load 3000 l/h
0 l/h
13003 F. cons. 100% load Setpoint 228.5 l/h
3000 l/h
51%
13004 Optimum load Setpoint 75%
99%
OFF
13005 Fuel rate expected Enable OFF
ON
13010 Oil pressure, coolant temp, fuel level input

Multi-in 102 Selections are:
13010 Oil press. input Setpoint Auto detection
Auto detection - Multi-input 102
- Multi-input 105
Multi-in 102
13011 Cool water input Setpoint Auto detection - Multi-input 108
Auto detection
- Auto detection
Multi-in 102
13012 Fuel level input Setpoint Auto detection
Auto detection
158 |
User Manual
2954 6370 00 Qc4002™ MkII M-Logic
| 159
www.atlascopco.com
Printed in Belgium 04/2012 - 2954 6310 00

2954 6310 00 - Qc4002 MkII User Manual - EN

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

2954 6310 00 - Qc4002 MkII User Manual - EN

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

User manual

Qc4002™ MkII control panel

Qc4002™ MkII control panel

Quick start guide ................................................................. 2954 6320 00

Warranty and Liability Limitation

Copyright 2012, Atlas Copco Airpower n.v., Antwerp, Belgium.

Qc4002™ MkII – Quick Start Guide

2. GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................4

2.1 Warnings, legal information and safety ...............................................................................................4

3. ABOUT THE QUICK START GUIDE ..........................................................................................................5

3.1 General purpose .................................................................................................................................5

4. WHAT IS IN THE DELIVERY? ...................................................................................................................6

4.1 Standard delivery................................................................................................................................6

5. GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................................9

5.1 Connecting the devices ......................................................................................................................9

6. THE FIRST STEPS ................................................................................................................................. 10

6.1 Switching on the first time ............................................................................................................... 10

7. DISPLAY PUSHBUTTONS AND LEDS .................................................................................................... 23

7.1 Pushbutton functions ....................................................................................................................... 23

7.4.2 Controller output types............................................................................................................................ 26

8. RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 30

2.1.1 Warnings and notes

2.1.2 Legal information and disclaimer

2.1.3 Safety issues

2.1.4 Electrostatic discharge awareness

2.1.5 Factory settings

3. About the Quick Start Guide

3.2 Intended users

4. What is in the delivery?

• The main Qc4002™ MkII controller

• The Qc4002™ MkII display

• The Qc4002™ MkII User manual

4.2 Optional delivery

• Display cable (option J1/J2/J6)

• PC cable for utility software (option J7)

• Additional standard display (option X2)

• 1089 9561 54: PC Cable

• Additional Operator's Panel, AOP-1 (option X3)

• Additional Operator's Panel, AOP-2 (option X4)

5.1.1 Connecting the display with the main unit

6. The first steps

6.1.1 Qc4002™ MkII single application

6.1.2 Qc4002™ MkII Island

6.1.3 Qc4002™ MkII Mains

6.1.4 Qc4002™ MkII bus tie

6.2 Getting started with the utility software (USW)

6.2.1 Downloading the software

6.2.2 Installation of USB drivers

6.2.3 Getting connected with the Qc4002™ MkII

3. Open the application settings by clicking the Application button .

6. Click the Connect button .

6.2.4 Uploading parameters

2. Click the Upload parameters from device button .

6.2.5 Basic configuration of a device using the utility software

The parameters can be configured as follows:

3. Adjust the parameter:

• by using the slider : or

• by clicking on the value that needs to be changed:

• Select the Enable checkbox.

7. Display pushbuttons and LEDs

7.2 LED functions

1 ALARM LED flashing indicates that unacknowledged alarms are present.

7.3 Display navigation